Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Hawker 800xp Poh Feb2012
Hawker 800xp Poh Feb2012
P/N 140-590032-0007
for
Introduction
This Pilot’s Operating Manual is applicable to the Hawker 800XP airplane serials 258541,
258556, 258567 and after equipped with Collins Pro Line 21 avionics and is incomplete without
the current FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual, P/N 140-590032-0005.
The 140-590032-0007 Pilot’s Operating Manual is only applicable to those Hawker 800XP Pro
Line 21 equipped airplanes that have not installed Hawker Beechcraft winglet kits.
If any data inconsistency exists between this Pilot’s Operating Manual and the FAA Approved
Airplane Flight Manual, the Airplane Flight Manual shall be the governing authority. Illustrations
in this Pilot’s Operating Manual may depict optional equipment, not installed in all airplanes.
NOTE
Raytheon Aircraft Company, which has been renamed Hawker Beechcraft Corporation, is
now owned by Hawker Beechcraft, Inc. Neither Hawker Beechcraft, Inc. nor Hawker
Beechcraft Corporation are affiliated any longer with Raytheon Company. Any Raytheon
marks contained in this document are owned by Raytheon Company and are employed
pursuant to a limited license granted by Raytheon Company.
Published By
The export of these commodities, technology or software are subject to the US Export Administration
Regulations. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited. For guidance on
export control requirements, contact the Commerce Department’s Bureau
of Export Administration at 202-482-4811 or visit the US Department of
Commerce website.
P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pilot’s Operating Manual
P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A5: Feb, 2012
This List of Effective Pages contains all current pages issued to this manual at Revision A5. It should
be used to ensure the manual is complete and up to date.
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
Title Page Revision A5: Feb, 2012 4 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Introduction 5 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
Page
6 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
LIST OF
7 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
EFFECTIVE
PAGES Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Pages 1 thru 16 9 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
LOG OF See 10 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
TEMPORARY LOG OF
Section II - OPERATING LIMITATIONS
CHANGES TEMPORARY CHANGES
1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
LOG OF
REVISIONS Revision A5: Feb, 2012 2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Pages 1 thru 2 3 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
LOG OF 4 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
REVISIONS Revision A4: Sep, 2010 Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Pages 1 thru 4
Table of Contents
LOG OF
1 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
REVISIONS Revision A3: Apr, 2008
Page 1 of 1 2 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
Sub-section 1: Master Warning System
LOG OF
REVISIONS Revision A2: Nov, 2004 1-1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Pages 1 thru 10 1-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
LOG OF 1-3 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
REVISIONS Revision A1: Nov, 2002 1-4 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Pages 1 thru 9
1-5 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
LOG OF
REVISIONS 1-6 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Pages 1 of 1 1-7 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Section I - GENERAL 1-8 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 1-9 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 1-10 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Page 1 of 16
Pilot’s Operating Manual
17-12 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-13 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
17-14 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-4 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-15 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-5 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-16 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-6 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-17 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-7 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-18 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-8 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
17-19 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-9 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
17-20 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-10 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
17-21 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-11 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
17-22 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-12 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Sub-section 18: Pitot-Static System 2-13 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
18-1 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-14 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
18-2 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-15 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
2-16 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-48 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-17 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-49 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-18 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-50 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-19 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-51 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-20 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-52 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-21 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-53 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-22 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-54 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-23 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-55 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-24 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-56 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-25 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-57 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-26 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-58 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-27 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-59 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-28 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-60 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-29 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-61 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-30 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-62 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-31 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-63 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-32 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-64 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-33 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-65 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-34 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-66 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-35 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-67 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-36 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-68 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-37 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-69 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-38 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-70 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-39 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-71 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-40 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-72 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-41 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-73 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-42 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-74 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-43 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-75 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-44 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-76 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-45 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-77 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-46 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-78 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-47 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-79 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
2-80 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-112 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-81 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-113 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-82 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-114 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-83 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-115 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-84 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-116 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-85 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-117 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-86 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-118 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-87 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-119 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-88 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-120 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-89 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-121 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-90 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-122 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-91 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-123 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-92 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-124 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-93 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-125 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-94 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-126 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-95 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-127 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-96 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-128 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-97 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-129 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-98 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-130 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-99 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-131 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-100 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-132 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-101 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-133 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-102 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-134 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-103 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-135 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-104 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-136 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-105 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-137 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-106 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-138 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-107 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-139 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-108 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-140 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-109 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-141 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-110 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-142 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-111 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-143 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
2-144 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-176 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-145 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-177 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-146 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-178 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-147 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-179 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-148 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-180 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-149 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-181 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-150 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-182 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-151 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-183 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-152 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-184 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-153 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-185 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-154 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-186 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-155 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-187 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-156 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-188 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-157 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-189 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-158 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 2-190 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-159 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-191 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-160 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-192 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-161 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-193 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-162 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-194 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-163 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-195 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-164 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-196 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-165 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-197 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-166 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-198 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-167 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-199 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-168 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-200 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-169 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-201 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-170 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 2-202 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-171 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 Sub-section 3: Climb
2-172 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 3-1 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-173 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 3-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
2-174 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 3-3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-175 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 3-4 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
3-5 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-6 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-6 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-7 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-7 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-8 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-8 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 4-9 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
3-9 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-10 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-10 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-11 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-11 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-12 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-12 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-13 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-13 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-14 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-14 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-15 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-15 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-16 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-16 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-17 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-17 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-18 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-18 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-19 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-19 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-20 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-20 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-21 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-21 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-22 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-22 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 4-23 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-23 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-24 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-24 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-25 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-25 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-26 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-26 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-27 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-27 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-28 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-28 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-29 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-29 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-30 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
3-30 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-31 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Sub-section 4: Cruise En-Route 4-32 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
4-1 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-33 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
4-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 4-34 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
4-3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 4-35 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
4-4 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 4-36 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
4-5 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 4-37 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
4-38 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-2 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-39 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-3 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-40 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-4 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-41 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-5 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-42 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-6 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-43 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-7 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-44 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-8 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-45 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-9 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-46 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-10 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-47 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-11 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-48 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-12 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-49 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-13 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-50 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-14 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-51 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-15 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-52 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-16 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-53 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-17 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-54 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-18 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-55 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-19 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-56 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-20 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-57 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-21 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-58 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-22 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-59 Revision A1: Nov, 2002 6-23 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
4-60 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-24 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
Sub-section 5: Normal Descent 6-25 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-26 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-27 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-3 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-28 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-4 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-29 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-5 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-30 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
5-6 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 6-31 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
Sub-section 6: Single Engine 6-32 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
6-1 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 6-33 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
6-34 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-16 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-35 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-17 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-36 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-18 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-37 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-19 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-38 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-20 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-39 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-21 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-40 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-22 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-41 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 8-23 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
6-42 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 8-24 Revision A3: Apr, 2008
Sub-section 7: Unfactored Landing Sub-section 9: Extended Range
7-1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 Operations (Non-ETOPS)
7-2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002 9-1 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
9-2 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
7-3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
9-3 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
7-4 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
9-4 Revision A5: Feb, 2012
7-5 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 Section V - FLIGHT HANDLING
7-6 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 Table of Contents
Sub-section 8: Gear Down Performance 1 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
8-1 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 2 Original Issue: Feb, 2002
8-2 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 Sub-section 1: Normal Handling
8-3 Revision A5: Feb, 2012 1-1 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-4 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-2 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-5 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-3 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-6 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-4 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-7 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-5 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-8 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-6 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-9 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-7 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-10 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-8 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-11 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-9 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-12 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-10 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-13 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-11 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-14 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-12 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
8-15 Revision A3: Apr, 2008 1-13 Revision A4: Sep, 2010
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
1-10 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-21 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-11 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-22 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-12 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-23 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-13 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-24 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-14 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-25 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-15 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-26 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-16 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-27 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-19 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-28 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-20 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-29 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-21 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-30 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
1-22 Revision A4: Sep, 2010 2-31 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
Sub-section 2: Ground Servicing 2-32 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-1 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-33 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-2 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-34 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-3 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-35 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-4 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-36 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-5 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-37 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-6 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-38 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-7 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-39 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-8 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-40 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-9 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-41 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-10 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-42 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-11 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-43 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-12 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-44 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-13 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-45 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-14 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-46 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-15 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-47 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-16 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-48 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-17 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-49 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-18 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-50 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-19 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-51 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
2-20 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 2-52 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
Section & Page Revision & Date Section & Page Revision & Date
2-53 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 20 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-54 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 21 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-55 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 22 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-56 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 23 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-57 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 24 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-58 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 25 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-59 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 26 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-60 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 27 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-61 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 28 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2-62 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 Section VIII - SUPPLEMENTS
2-63 Revision A2: Nov, 2004 See LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS
2-64 Revision A2: Nov, 2004
Section VII - SAFETY INFORMATION
1 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
2 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
3 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
4 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
5 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
6 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
7 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
8 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
9 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
10 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
11 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
12 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
13 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
14 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
15 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
16 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
17 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
18 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
19 Revision A1: Nov, 2002
NOTE: This Log of Temporary Changes must be filed in the front of this POM immediately in front
of the Log of Revisions pages. This page replaces any Log of Temporary Changes dated
prior to the issue date near the top of this page.
Page 1 of 2
Pilot’s Operating Manual
A5
Page 1 of 2
Intentionally left blank
A4
Page 1 of 4
SECTION & PAGES DESCRIPTION
Sub-section 9 - Electrical Revised headers to Hawker Beechcraft format and footers for
Power Revision A4.
Pages 9-1 thru 9-24
Page 9-5 Figure 1, removed a green bar connecting the Starter Busbar to
the PS2 Busbar.
Page 9-12 Figure 4, revised APU GEN FAIL annunciator.
Page 9-16 DOUBLE GENERATOR FAILURE, removed XE FAIL
annunciator.
Page 9-17 Figure 6, removed GEN 2 FAIL annunciator.
Page 9-19 Figure 8, removed APU GEN FAIL annunciator.
Sub-section 17 - Avionics Revised headers to Hawker Beechcraft format and footers for
Pages 17-1 thru 17-22 Revision A4.
Page 17-1 Table of Contents, added "ACP" to "Operation" and revised the
indentation of four entries.
Page 17-10 Incorporated Temporary Change 3.
Page 17-22 MODE 7, revised "WINDHEAR" to "WINDSHEAR".
Section IV - FLIGHT Revised headers to Hawker Beechcraft format and footers for
PLANNING DATA Revision A4.
Sub-section 6 - Single
Engine
Pages 6-1 thru 6-42
Page 6-1 Table of Contents, added "SINGLE ENGINE" to "DRIFT
DOWN"; added "SINGLE ENGINE MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
THRUST FOR DESCENT AND CRUISE".
Page 6-2 Added the following Table of Contents listings: "SINGLE
ENGINE HIGH SPEED DESCENT", "SINGLE ENGINE MAXI-
MUM CONTINUOUS THRUST CRUISE", and tables from
10,000 ft through 27,000 ft.
Page 6-3 Added "SINGLE ENGINE" to "DRIFT DOWN" heading.
Page 6-4 INTRODUCTION, added Single Engine
Maximum Continuous Thrust for Descent and
Cruise heading and text.
Page 6-9 Added Figure number and title to chart.
Pages 6-30 and 6-31 Added Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust High Speed
Descent tables.
Pages 6-32 thru 6-42 Added Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust Cruise
tables and an intentionally left blank page.
A4
Page 2 of 4
SECTION & PAGES DESCRIPTION
Section V - FLIGHT Revised headers to Hawker Beechcraft format and footers for
HANDLING Revision A4.
Sub-section 1 - Normal
Handling
Pages 1-1 thru 1-26
Pages 1-1 and 1-2 Revised Table of Contents for Revision A4 additions and page
shifts.
Page 1-3 TAXI, replaced selected rudder bias and thrust reverser
information. THRUST REVERSERS, added "(T/Rs)" to heading
and referred thrust reverser checks to new ENGINE
COMPUTER, RUDDER BIAS AND T/R CHECKS text.
Pages 1-3 and 1-4 Added ENGINE COMPUTER, RUDDER BIAS AND T/R
CHECKS.
Page 1-7 Under "Repeated Wheel Brake Usage", revised AFM reference
for established cooling times to "Section 2 - LIMITATIONS".
Page 1-15 STABILITY AND TRIM CHANGE, removed selected text
regarding aileron and rudder trim.
Pages 1-15 and 1-16 Incorporated Temporary Change 2 and shifted data.
Page 1-17 Added "(FMS)" to Flight Management System heading.
Page 1-19 Revised "14 CFR 91.32" to "14 CFR 91.211" in three places.
Section VI - GROUND Revised headers to Hawker Beechcraft format and footers for
OPERATIONS Revision A4.
Sub-section 1 - Ground
Handling
Pages 1-1 thru 1-22
Page 1-2 Added "Installation of Engine Covers" heading to Table of
Contents.
Page 1-4 EQUIPMENT NECESSARY, revised "Raytheon Aircraft
Company" to "Hawker Beechcraft Corporation"; revised text
and added new text for FAA FSAT publications.
Page 1-5 FROST REMOVAL, removed a hyphen from "defrosting".
Page 1-6 DE-ICING THE LANDING GEAR, removed a hyphen from
"Brush off".
Page 1-7 Incorporated Temporary Change 4.
Page 1-8 PREFLIGHT INSPECTION, added icing and frost text.
Page 1-11 BETWEEN FLIGHTS, revised "Raytheon Aircraft Company" to
"Hawker Beechcraft Corporation"; revised text and added new
text for FAA FSAT publications.
A4
Page 3 of 4
SECTION & PAGES DESCRIPTION
Sub-section 1 - Ground ENGINE START, revised "Motor" to "motor".
Handling (continued)
Page 1-12
A4
Page 4 of 4
LOG OF REVISIONS
Pilot’s Operating Manual
P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A3: April 2008
NOTE: Revision bars in the margin of a revision page indicate the addition, deletion or revision
of pertinent or technical data only. Pages replaced in a revision that do not have revision
bars are replaced for pagination, formatting or editorial reasons only with no pertinent
or technical data changes.
A3
Page 1 of 1
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21 Pilot’s Operating Manual
LOG OF REVISIONS
A2
Page 1 of 10
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21 Pilot’s Operating Manual
Sub-section 3 - FUEL
Sub-section 5 - HYDRAULICS
Sub-section 10 - ENVIRONMENTAL
Page 10-17 Moved Figure 2 title above footer line and inserted
Key above color provisions.
Sub-section 17 - AVIONICS
Pages 17-12 & 17-13 Added text for the operation of the optional
installations of the Audio Control Panel.
Pages 17-14 thru 17-22 Pages re-numbered for pagination only and
updated company headers (no technical change).
Pages 1-19 and 1-20 Updated company header (no technical change).
Pages 2-3 thru 2-10 Updated company header (no technical change).
Pages 2-41 thru 2-43 Updated company header (no technical change).
Pages 2-58 & 2-59 Updated company header (no technical change).
A2
P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A1: Nov, 2002
for
AIRPLANES EQUIPPED WITH COLLINS PRO LINE 21 AVIONICS
Section I - General
Page 3 Changed ’Hawker 800XP’ to read ’Hawker 800XP
Pro Line 21’. Indented notes.
Page 4 Changed ’Hawker 800XP’ to read ’Hawker 800XP
Pro Line 21’. Was ’Co-pilot’, now ’Copilot’.
Pages 5 & 7 Indented bullets and notes.
Page 1 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Sub-section 2 - Engines
Page 2-5 Was ’de-icing’, now ’deicing’. Indent bullets.
Pages 2-7, 2-12, 2-13, 2-15, 2-16, 2-18, Indent bullets and notes. For conformity, changed
2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-25, 2-26, 2-29, 2-33, temperature callouts, ex: 103° C or 98° F.
2-35, 2-38, 2-40 and 2-41
Page 2-9 Add parenthesis close ’)’ in sentence.
Pages 2-31 and 2-32 Reprint for improved graphics.
Page 2-36 Deleted ’be’, indent bullets and notes.
Page 2-42 and 2-43 Corrected LATCH ACTUATOR reference on
OUTBOARD view of DOOR LATCH ASSEMBLY.
Sub-section 3 - Fuel System
Pages 3-3, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10 and 3-11 Indent notes and bullets.
Page 3-4 Reprint for improved graphics.
Page 3-9 Add space between ’No.’ and ’1’.
Page 3-12 Changed lettering style in graphics from BOLD to
PLAIN.
Sub-section 4 - Fire Protection
Pages 4-4, 4-5 and 4-8 Indent bullets and notes.
Page 4-6 Add space between ’No.’ and ’1’. Changed ’No 2’ to
’No. 2’. Indent notes.
Page 4-7 Changed line color for ENGINE 1, SHOT 2, from
red to green.
Sub-section 5 - Hydraulics
Pages 5-3, 5-5, 5-10 and 5-13 Indent bullets and notes. Add space between ’No.’
and ’1’.
Page 5-4 Removed period for conformity.
Page 5-6 Correct spelling for annunciator, was EMERG, now
EMRG.
Page 5-7 Correct spelling of PRESSURIZE, added DETAIL
B, moved DETAIL A.
Pages 5-9 and 5-12 Changed ’No 1’ to ’No. 1’ and ’No 2’ to ’No. 2’.
Indent bullets and notes.
Page 5-14 Changed ’level’ to ’lever’, indent notes.
Sub-section 6 - Flight Controls
Page 6-1 Deleted POWER SUPPLY.....Pg 6-14, from TOC.
Page 2 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Pages 6-3 and 6-17 Changed Co-pilot’s to Copilot’s for conformity in
manual. Indent bullets.
Pages 6-4, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-11, 6-13, Reprint for improved graphics.
6-16 and 6-18
Pages 6-5, 6-12, 6-19 and 6-20 Indent bullets and notes.
Sub-section 7 - Stall Warning/Identification
Page 7-3 Indent bullets.
Page 7-8 Changed Co-pilot’s to Copilot’s for conformity in
manual. Indent bullets.
Page 7-9 Added space to correct placard callouts.
Sub-section 8 - Landing Gear
Page 8-3 Indent bullets and notes. For conformity, made
panel callout black.
Page 8-6 Center page text box. Indent bullets.
Page 8-7 Duplicated page, removed and inserted correct
text. Indent bullets.
Page 8-8 Was ’PRESSURISED’, Now ’PRESSURIZED’.
Center page text box.
Page 8-13 Center page text box. Indent bullets. For confor-
mity, made panel callout black.
Sub-section 9 - Electrical Power
Pages 9-3, 9-8, and 9-16 Was ’BUSTIE’, now ’BUS TIE’, to correct annuncia-
tor call out. Indent notes.
Pages 9-4, 9-6, 9-7, 9-10, 9-12, Changed ’No’ to ’No.’ and add a space where
9-14, 9-17 and 9-18 needed, to correctly identify as a number. Indent
notes.
Page 9-5 Correct spelling of annunciator, was ’FAI1L’, now
’FAIL’. Changed ’No’ to ’No.’ to correctly identify as
a number. Changed ’PE2’ to ’PE 2’ to conform to
callout. Changed CNCTR to CNTCTR two places.
Page 9-9 Correct annunciator spelling, was ’BATT CNCTR’,
now ’BATT CNTCTR’. Minor format change.
Page 9-11 Changed art to depict correct call outs.
Page 9-13 Indent notes. Changed art to depict correct call out.
Page 9-15 Was ’BUSTIE’, now ’BUS TIE’, to correct annuncia-
tor call out. Indent notes. Correct graphic to show
proper leader call out.
Page 3 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Page 9-19 Was ’BUSTIE’, now ’BUS TIE’, to correct annuncia-
tor call out. Changed ’No’ to ’No.’ and add a space
where needed, to correctly identify as a number.
Indent notes.
Pages 9-20 and 9-21 Changed XS1, XS2, INV1 and INV2 to XS 1, XS 2,
INV 1 and INV 2, to correctly identify annunciators.
Changed ’No.1’ and ’No.2’ to ’No. 1’ and ’No. 2’ for
conformity. Indent bullets.
Page 9-22 Changed ’No’ to ’No.’ where applicable to identify
as a number. Changed ’PS 1’, ’PS 2’, ’XS1’ and
’XS2’ to ’PS1’, ’PS2’, ’XS 1’ and ’XS 2’ for confor-
mity.
Page 9-23 Reprint for improved graphics.
Sub-section 10 - Environmental
Pages 10-3, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 10-10 and For conformity, changed temperature callouts, ex:
10-11 103° C or 98° F. Indent notes and bullets.
Page 10-12 Reprint for improved graphics.
Page 10-13 Indent bullets. For conformity, made panel callout
black.
Page 10-14 Clarified language, now ’will provide a’. For confor-
mity, made panel callout black.
Page 10-16 Changed ’No 2’ to ’No. 2’ to properly identify as a
number. Changed ’co-pilot’ to ’copilot’ for confor-
mity. Indent note.
Sub-section 11 - Ice Protection
Page 11-3 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent notes and bullets.
Pages 11-4, 11-8 and 11-12 Indent notes and bullets.
Page 11-6 Add US values. Changed ’XS2’ to ’XS 2’ to conform
to annunciator callout. Indent note.
Page 11-13 Add space between PROT and repeater, to clarify
sentence. Indent bullets.
Page 11-14 Swap annunciators, to show true location. Updated
Pitot Heat art.
Sub-section 12 - Oxygen System
Page 12-9 Indent note.
Sub-section 13 - Lightning Systems
Page 13-2 Add ’Figure 6’ to Table of Contents. Add ’Table 4’ to
the end of EXTERIOR LIGHTING POWER
SOURCES in the Table of Content.
Page 4 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Pages 13-3 and 13-15 Add piece of art for locator.
Pages 13-7, 13-11, 13-12, 13-13 and Indent bullets and notes.
13-18
Page 13-14 Changed black and white art to colored art.
Sub-section 14 - Equipment and Furnishings
Page 14-7 Changed art to show correct annunciator location.
Page 14-8 Changed art. Add view of new switch.
Page 14-13 Changed 13.8 to 13.8" in artwork.
Page 14-14 Changed art.
Sub-section 15 - Emergency Equipment
Page 15-3 Indent bullets.
Page 15-4 Indent note.
Sub-section 16 - Water/Waste
Page 16-3 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent bullets.
Sub-section 17 - Avionics
Page 17-1 Add SWITCHES/ANNUNCIATORS page to TOC.
Pages 17-3, 17-14 and 17-16 Reprint for improved graphics.
Pages 17-4, 17-17 and 17-18 Indent bullets.
Page 17-5 Changed art to show correct annunciator location.
Page 17-6 Changed art, CVR MIKE, now with leader.
Page 17-10 Add re-bussing kit information.
Page 17-15 Corrected annunciator nomenclature, was GPWS
TERRAIN INHIBIT, now TERR INHIB. Minor format
change. Changed EGPWC to EGPWS in ’Self Test’
section. Added SWITCHES/ANNUNCIATORS sec-
tion. Indent notes.
Page 17-19 Corrected annunciator nomenclature, was GS
CANCEL, now GS INHIB. Indent bullets and note.
Page 17-20 Add additional altitude callouts. Indent bullets.
Page 17-21 Due to the addition of information, data moved to
next page.
Page 5 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Page 1-4 Reprint for improved graphics.
Page 1-6 Add note.
Sub-section 2 - Preflight
Pages 2-3, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-35, 2-36, Indent bullets and notes.
2-97 and 2-159
Pages 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-13, 2-15, 2-16, For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
2-37, 2-38, 2-41 thru 2-44, 2-47 thru ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent notes.
2-51, 2-53 thru 2-56, 2-59, 2-60, 2-73,
2-74, 2-77 thru 2-80, 2-83 thru 2-86,
2-88 thru 2-92, 2-94, 2-95, 2-96, 2-98,
2-99, 2-100, 2-102, 2-103, 2-105, 2-108,
2-109, 2-110, 2-111, 2-114 thru 2-117,
2-120, 2-121, 2-134, 2-135, 2-138
thru 2-141, 2-144 thru 2-147, 2-150
thru 2-153, 2-160, 2-161, 2-164 thru
2-167, 2-170, 2-171, 2-178, 2-179,
2-182 thru 2-185 and 2-187 thru 2-189
Pages 2-39, 2-40, 2-45, 2-46, 2-52, 2-57, For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
2-58, 2-75, 2-76, 2-81, 2-82, 2-87, 2-93, ex: 103° C or 98° F. Add comma to numbers 10,000
2-101, 2-104, 2-106, 2-107, 2-112, and greater.
2-113, 2-118, 2-119, 2-136, 2-137,
2-142, 2-143, 2-148, 2-149, 2-154,
2-155, 2-156, 2-157, 2-162, 2-163,
2-168, 2-169, 2-180, 2-181 and 2-186
Pages 2-63, 2-64, 2-69, 2-124, 2-125, Add comma to numbers 10,000 and greater
2-130, 2-131, 2-174 and 2-175
Pages 2-65, 2-66, 2-70, 2-71, 2-72, Reprint for improved shading.
2-126, 2-127, 2-132, 2-133, 2-176,
2-177 and 2-194 thru 2-197
Pages 2-200 and 2-201 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent notes. Changed 50lb/hr
to 50 lb/hr.
Sub-section 3 - Climb
Pages 3-1, 3-3 thru 3-7, 3-10 thru 3-21 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
and 3-24 thru 3-29 ex: 103° C or 98° F.
Pages 3-9, 3-23 and 3-30 Reprint for improved shading.
Sub-section 4 - Cruise En-Route
Page 4-1 Corrected altitude callout in TOC, two places, from
15.000 ft to 15,000 ft.
Page 4-3 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent bullets.
Page 4-9 Remove lines from table cells where not needed.
Page 6 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Page 4-59 Indent notes.
Sub-section 6 - Single Engine
Pages 6-1, 6-3, 6-10 thru 6-13 and 6-16 For conformity, changed temperature callouts,
thru 6-19 ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent bullets.
Page 6-4 Add period at end of sentence.
Page 6-8 Moved graphic number for conformity.
Page 6-9 Top line of graph redrawn.
Pages 6-21 thru 6-28 Reprint for improved shading.
Sub-section 7 - Unfactored Landing
Pages 7-3 and 7-4 Indent bullets and notes.
Page 7 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Page 8 of 9
SECTION & PAGE (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Page 2-51 Add standard US values. For conformity, changed
temperature callouts, ex: 103° C or 98° F. Indent
notes and bullets. Changed spacing for conformity.
Page 9 of 9
LOG OF REVISIONS
for
AIRPLANES EQUIPPED WITH COLLINS PRO LINE 21 AVIONICS
All Sections and Pages Original Issue, Refer to the List Of Effective Pages.
Page 1 of 1
Pro Line 21
Section - I
GENERAL
Table of Contents
Page
This Pilot Operating Manual (POM) consists of seven main sections and a supplements section which
provides information for the safe and efficient operation of the Hawker 800XP airplanes equipped with
Collins Pro Line 21 avionics.
NOTE: Main sections which are not divided into Sub-sections have the main section identifier at the
top of the page, i.e. this Section I - GENERAL with the page numbering being standard
sequential, i.e. Page 1,2,3,4,5 etc.
Main sections which are divided into Sub-sections also have the main section identifier at the
top of the page, i.e. Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION. However, the page numbering
consists of the Sub-section preceding the page number, i.e. for main Section III - SYSTEMS
DESCRIPTION containing Sub-section 1 MASTER WARNING SYSTEM, the page
numbering is 1-1, 1-2, 1-3 etc.
With each issue of a revision, a new List Of Effective Pages (LOEP) will be issued listing all the pages
and dates for the current standard of the Pilot’s Operating Manual. The LOEP does not include
Temporary Changes or pages introduced by other organizations without the involvement of Raytheon
Aircraft Company. Also, a new Log of Revisions will be issued which defines each new page and
description of changes.
All revisions incorporated into this manual will be accompanied by an Instruction Sheet, which may be
filed in the front of the manual or discarded after compliance.
Temporary Changes
These changes are printed on yellow paper and are issued to all airplanes. They provide information of
an urgent matter which requires incorporation into the POM in advance of the manual revision
procedure.
The changes made by the issuance of a temporary change will be incorporated into the main manual
at the time of the next manual revision with the temporary change being cancelled and removed from
the manual.
Upon issuance of a temporary change, a new LOG OF TEMPORARY CHANGES will be issued. This
log provides the current status of all temporary changes issued to the Pilot’s Operating Manual and shall
be filed in the front of the manual immediately following the LOG OF REVISIONS.
SUPPLEMENTS
All supplements applicable to this manual, approved by Raytheon Aircraft Company, are incorporated
in the back of this manual. These supplements will be issued with a LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS filed at
the front of the supplements.
SECTION 1 .................................GENERAL
SUPPLEMENTS
AIRPLANE GENERAL
The Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21 is a twin turbofan engine, low wing monoplane airplane, certified for
world-wide operation and intercontinental range by day or night.
The airplane is operated by two crew, Pilot and Copilot, and can carry up to fifteen passengers in a
"business express" configuration. The standard layout is an eight-seat executive configuration. A third
crew member may be carried to carry out in-flight attendants duties.
A Collins Pro Line 21 avionics system is installed with an intricate network of subsystems
interconnected and managed by the Integrated Avionics Processor System (IAPS). Avionics
information can be found in this Pilot’s Operating Manual, SECTION III, Sub-section 17 and the Collins
Pro Line 21 Avionics System Pilot’s Guide (P/N 523-0780409-001117).
Each turbofan engine has hydraulically-operated thrust reversers installed and each engine is
controlled by a digital electronic engine control unit backed up by a hydro-mechanical reversionary unit.
A single hydraulic system pressurized by engine driven pumps (one per engine) supplies power for
landing gear and doors, nose-wheel steering, wheel brakes, stall identification system, wing flaps,
airbrakes and thrust reverser functions. Back-up hydraulic supplies are provided to operate the wheel
brakes, stall identification, thrust reversers, lowering landing gear, and retraction or lowering of the flaps.
The main electrical services are supplied with 28 VDC from starter/generators, one starter/generator
installed on each engine. Emergency power is provided by batteries. Where AC power is required, it is
supplied by either engine driven alternators (208V 3-phase) or static inverters. A fluid anti-icing system
is installed along the leading edge of wings and tailplane. Hot air is used to keep the main engine air
intake and starter/generator cooling air intake free of ice.
• Stall vanes
A gaseous breathable oxygen system is installed for use by crew and passengers during emergency
conditions. The system also provides a therapeutic supply.
Fire detection and protection systems are installed for the main engines and for the APU. Overheat
detection is provided for the rear equipment bay.
Engine bleed air is tapped from the engines for the pressurization, air conditioning, rudder bias systems
and hydraulic reservoir pressure.
A gas-turbine APU may be installed to provide DC electrical power and air conditioning. For description
and operation of the APU (if installed), refer to the Airplane Flight, Section 7 - SUPPLEMENTS
Figure 1
General Dimensions
Fuselage
Overall length (including tail) ............. 51 ft 1.64 in ...........................15.59 m
Cabin
Length (including vestibule) ............... 21 ft 8 in ................................6.6 m
Head room......................................... 5 ft 9 in ..................................1.75 m
Width ................................................. 6 ft 0 in ..................................1.83 m
Aisle width ......................................... 1 ft 6 in ..................................0.41 m
Windows
Height ................................................ 1 ft 2 1/2 in ............................0.36 m
Width ................................................. 10 in ......................................0.25 m
Emergency Exit
Height ................................................ 3 ft 0 in ..................................0.91 m
Width ................................................. 1 ft 8 in ..................................0.51 m
Landing Gear
Track (Main gear)............................... 9 ft 2 in ..................................2.79 m
Wheel base........................................ 21 ft 1/2 in .............................6.41 m
Maximum nose wheel angle
(using cockpit control)........................ 45° each side
NOTE: With nose wheel steering disconnected the nose wheel is free to castor through 360 .
Mainwheel
Tire size............................................. 23 X 7.00-12, 12 Ply Tubeless
Tire pressure ..................................... 135 lb / sq in
Nosewheel
Tire size............................................. 18 X 4.25-10, 6 Ply Tubeless
Tire pressure ..................................... 100 lb / sq in
Speed Rating .................................... Dunlop Model DR 6385T Rated at 190 mph,
All Other Models Rated at 210 mph.
The following terms and definitions are used in this POM when describing locations or functions of
equipment or systems (see Figure 2).
Terms Definitions
Pilot The left side of the airplane looking towards the nose.
(No. 1) Side
Copilot The right side of the airplane looking towards the nose.
(No. 2) Side
Flight Compartment The accommodation for the flight crew, contained within the pressurized
area from forward of the vestibule to the front pressure bulkhead.
Vestibule The space leading from the main entry door, contained within the
pressurized area, bounded by the rear bulkhead of the flight compartment
and the forward bulkhead of the passenger cabin. Usually contains furnish-
ings such as galleys, wardrobes, luggage and other stowages.
Passenger Cabin The accommodation for passengers within the pressurized area from the
front cabin bulkhead to the rear cabin bulkhead.
Toilet Compartment The area between the rear bulkhead of the passenger cabin and the rear
pressure bulkhead. The area contains toilet and washbasin facilities on the
rear pressure bulkhead, and an avionics rack and rear baggage
compartment which is enclosed in a cabinet on the right wall of the
compartment.
Rear Baggage
The area above the aft avionics rack in the toilet compartment.
Compartment
On-Side Term to describe those controls, display devices and equipment of dual
provisioned systems, which are located in the flight compartment on the
same side as the pilot using them:
i.e. if a No.1 system fails, the Pilot can make a reversionary selection to
obtain the required data or power supply from the equivalent No. 2 system
for presentation on his on-side display device.
PILOT
CAPTAIN'S FIRST
COPILOTOFFICER'S
(NO. 1) SIDE (NO. 2) SIDE
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
OUTWARD OPENING
DOOR WITH INTEGRAL
STAIRS
VESTIBULE
AREA
PASSENGER
CABIN
TOILET
COMPARTMENT
PRESSURE DOME
M6365_0
NO. 1 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE HA00C
014725AA.AI
Figure 2
Definition of Areas
Section - II
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
Table of Contents
Page
GENERAL ..................................................................................................... 3
For operating limitations, refer to the FAA approved Airplane Flight Manual, P/N 140-590032-0005
Section 2 - LIMITATIONS
Section - III
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Sub-section 1
MASTER WARNING SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Page
GENERAL .......................................................................................................1-3
ANNUNCIATOR TYPES .................................................................................1-3
MWS ARRANGEMENT ..................................................................................1-3
REPEATER ANNUNCIATORS .......................................................................1-3
Figure 1 - Master Warning Annunciations and Controls ...........................1-4
SYSTEM OPERATION ...................................................................................1-5
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT .................................................................................1-5
ANNUNCIATION SEQUENCE........................................................................1-6
Table 1: Annunciation Sequence .............................................................1-6
TESTING .........................................................................................................1-7
DIM CONTROL FAILURE .....................................................................1-7
M W S MASTER WARNING LAMP FAILURE .........................................1-7
POWER SUPPLIES ........................................................................................1-7
ANNUNCIATORS WITH ASSOCIATED MWS REPEATERS ........................1-8
ELECTRICAL.........................................................................................1-8
ICE PROTECTION ................................................................................1-9
FUEL ....................................................................................................1-10
ENGINE FIRE WARNING ...................................................................1-11
DUCT OVHT REPEATER ANNUNCIATOR ........................................1-11
MWS ANNUNCIATORS - WITHOUT A REPEATER ...................................1-12
Table 2: M W S Annunciators - W ithout a Repeater.................................1-12
A master warning system (MWS) consisting of annunciation logic, displays and associated controls is
provided to alert or advise the crew to the status of the airplane systems.
ANNUNCIATOR TYPES
The annunciator captions are illum inated against a black background and are color coded as follows:
EMERGENCY
These indicate a hazardous fault condition which requires im m ediate flight
ENG 1 crew action and are accompanied by the flashing red M W S warning lamps.
FIRE
ABNORMAL
These indicate a fault condition which is not im m ediately hazardous and
MAIN AIR does not require urgent action by the flight crew. The M W S master warning
VALVE 2 lamps do not operate with this warning.
ADVISORY
These are advisory indications of system status and do not require any
AIR remedial action from the flight crew.
BRAKE
A main M W S panel with annunciators is located on the center instrument panel with a M W S DIM
variable control and a NORM/DIM OVRD switch located adjacent to the main M W S panel. A MW S D IM
FAIL annunciator is located on the copilot instrument panel above the PFD/MFD.
Two red master warning lamps, each with a push-to-cancel switch, are located on the glareshield, one
in front of each pilot. Additional annunciators are arranged in groups in the system areas of the
overhead roof panel. An ANNUN test button is located in the test section of the overhead roof panel.
REPEATER ANNUNCIATORS
The M W S panel also provides repeater annunciators which have an upward pointing arrow.
When illuminated, these annunciators indicate to the flight crew that an additional warning annuncia-
tor has illuminated on the overhead roof panel.
Typical Repeater Annunciator
ENG 1
FIRE
XS 1 XE XS 2
L SCREEN R SCREEN ALTR 1 ALTR 2 FAIL FAIL FAIL
OVHT OVHT FAIL FAIL
INV 1 STBY INV INV 2
Overhead Roof Panel FAIL ON FAIL
L VANE R VANE SIDE SCRN ICE
HTR FAIL HTR FAIL OVHT DETECTED
DUCT
ELECT FUEL PFD MFD MFD PFD
OVHT
ICE PROT FUEL STALL Pilot Instrument Panel Copilot Instrument Panel
SELECTED XFD TFR IDENT
Center Instrument
Panel
AIR BRAKE
Figure 1
Master Warning Annunciations and Controls
SYSTEM OPERATION
When a system status change or fault condition occurs, the appropriate annunciator illuminates at
maximum intensity.
In the event of a red warning, both MWS red master warning lamps will flash and if the red annunciator
is located on the overhead roof panel, the associated repeater annunciator illuminates with a steady
intensity. If the roof panel annunciator is amber, the repeater flashes.
NOTES:
1. A repeater annunciator will illuminate steady should associated red and amber
annunciators illuminate together.
2. When any annunciation is initiated, all previously dimmed annunciators will increase in
brightness.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Either pilot can acknowledge the warning by pushing either MWS red master warning lamp on the
glareshield with the following results:
• The brightness of the annunciator (and repeater where applicable) reduces to the level selected by
the MWS dimmer switch.
Should an additional system status change or failure occur, the relevant annunciator illuminates at
maximum intensity and any dimmed annunciator increases in brightness.
Subsequent dimming is achieved by pushing either MWS red master warning lamp. This low lighting
level is maintained until the system fault clears causing the annunciator to extinguish or until another
system status change or failure occurs.
White annunciators are always illuminated at the set dim level and do not cause an increase in
brightness of existing warnings to occur.
Illuminates steady at
WHITE dimmed intensity None
(as set on MWS DIM control)
MWS
REPEATER
MWS
Main Panel
Illuminates steady at
maximum intensity
Illuminates steady at
AMBER None
maximum intensity
Illuminates steady
WHITE at dimmed intensity None
(as set on MWS DIM control)
TESTING
Pushing the ANNUN test button on the overhead roof panel results in the following:
• All of the overhead and MWS panel annunciators, including white, illuminate at maximum intensity.
• The amber repeater annunciators will flash and the red repeater annunciators illuminate steady.
NORM MWS
ANNUN
MWS
DIM
FAIL
DIM OVRD DIM
The flight crew should set the NORM/DIM OVRD switch to the DIM OVRD position. This causes the
warning annunciator to illuminate at maximum intensity and the MWS DIM FAIL annunciator will
extinguish.
When the warning is acknowledged, the annunciator will remain at the maximum level of intensity.
POWER SUPPLIES
The MWS is powered from PE busbar via three circuit breakers located on panel DA-D:
• MWS TEST
The MWS dimming circuit is powered from a secondary busbar - MWS DIM bus.
ELECTRICAL
Overhead Roof Panel
BATT 1
CNTCTR
BATT 2
CNTCTR
GEN 1 BUS TIE GEN 2
FAIL OPEN FAIL
DC Power Section
XS 1 XE XS 2
FAIL FAIL FAIL
INV 1 INV 2
FAIL FAIL
AC Power Section
The illumination of any of the above electrical annunciators on the Overhead Roof Panel will be
accompanied by the illumination of the associated MWS repeater shown below:
Center Instrument
Panel
ELECT
The illumination of any of the above ice protection annunciators on the Overhead Roof Panel will be
accompanied by the illumination of the associated M W S repeater shown below:
Center Instrument
Panel
ICE
PROT
FUEL 1 FUEL 2
LO PRESS LO PRESS
The illumination of any of the above fuel The illumination of either of the above fuel
annunciators on the Overhead Roof Panel annunciators on the Overhead Roof Panel will
will be accompanied by the illum ination of the be accompanied by the illum ination of the
associated M W S repeater shown below: associated M W S repeater shown below:
FUEL
FUEL
XFD TFR
Center Instrument
Panel
ENG 1 ENG 2
FIRE FIRE
The illumination of either of the above fire warning annunciators on the Overhead Roof Panel Forward
Extension will be accompanied by the illum ination of the respective M W S repeater shown below:
ENG 1 ENG 2
FIRE FIRE
Center Instrument
Panel
DUCT OVHT REPEATER ANNUNCIATOR
Center Instrument
DUCT Panel
OVHT
This repeater illum inates on the M W S panel and directs attention to the DUCT TEMP indicator on the
Overhead Roof Panel ENVIRONMENTAL section.
APU M W S panel
REVERSER M W S panel
(if installed)
FIRE
CABIN HYD 1 or 2
M W S panel M W S panel
ALTITUDE LO PRESS
ENG 1 or 2 M W S panel
CMPTER
ENG 1 or 2 M W S panel
A/ICE
RUDDER M W S panel
BIAS
STALL M W S panel
IDENT
APU M W S panel
ON (if installed)
Flight Compartment
IGN ON Overhead Roof Panel
GENERAL.......................................................................................................2-5
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................2-6
Figure 1 - Engine Cutaway View ..............................................................2-6
FAN ..............................................................................................................2-6
COMPRESSOR SECTION ..........................................................................2-6
Low Pressure Spool N1 .........................................................................2-7
High Pressure Spool N2 ........................................................................2-7
COMBUSTION CHAMBER..........................................................................2-7
TURBINE SECTION ....................................................................................2-7
ACCESSORY DRIVE...................................................................................2-7
OPERATION...................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2 - Gas Flow During Engine Operation .........................................2-8
ENGINE INDICATING SYSTEM (EIS) ...........................................................2-9
N1 RPM DISPLAYS....................................................................................2-10
N1 REFERENCE DISPLAYS......................................................................2-11
ITT DISPLAYS............................................................................................2-12
N2 RPM DISPLAYS....................................................................................2-13
FUEL FLOW DISPLAYS ............................................................................2-14
OIL PRESSURE DISPLAYS ......................................................................2-14
OIL TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS ...............................................................2-15
ENGINE FIRE WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS............................................2-15
CLIMB ANNUNCIATIONS..........................................................................2-15
AUTOMATIC POWER RESERVE (APR) DISPLAYS .................................2-15
ENGINE SYSTEMS and COMPONENTS ....................................................2-16
ENGINE OIL...............................................................................................2-16
Oil Pump Assembly .............................................................................2-16
Figure 3 - Engine Lubrication System....................................................2-17
Oil Filter ...............................................................................................2-18
Oil Tank ...............................................................................................2-18
Fuel Heater..........................................................................................2-18
Air/Oil Cooler .......................................................................................2-18
Figure 4 - Engine Views .........................................................................2-19
Fuel/Oil Cooler ....................................................................................2-21
Oil Venting ...........................................................................................2-21
Low Oil Pressure Annunciators ...........................................................2-21
GENERAL
The airplane is powered by two Garrett AiResearch Model TFE 731-5BR-1H turbofan engines installed
in pods mounted on pylons; one each side of, and integral with, the rear fuselage.
Firewalls divide each pod into two fire zones which are ventilated by ram air; both zones incorporate a
fire/overheat warning system. The two shot fire extinguishing system discharges only into zone 1, the
forward zone.
For more information on the engine fire protection system refer to Sub-section 4, FIRE PROTECTION.
Hot air is bled from the engine to pressurize and air condition the airplane, to operate the rudder bias
system and for engine anti-icing. Each engine has a combined starter/generator and can be started
from either the airplanes batteries or an external power supply. Each engine has an AC alternator which
provides deicing to the pilot’s windshields.
• Fan
Engine power and fuel shut off controls for each engine are operated by separate thrust and high
pressure (HP) cock levers on the pilot’s central control pedestal with engine starting, ignition and antice
controls being located on the flight compartment overhead roof panel.
Indications of N1, N2, ITT, oil pressure, oil temperature and fuel flow are displayed on the pilot’s Multi
Function Display. Annunciators associated with the engine are on the main MWS and overhead roof
panel.
The engine is a two-spool-transonic-stage-compressor, front fan jet engine. It is a light weight modular
design for ease of maintenance. The simplicity of the design eliminates the need for variable geometry
inlet guide vanes. This minimizes the weight of the engine, the possibility of the inlet vanes icing up is
reduced and the noise is also reduced. Use of a reverse flow combustion chamber reduces the overall
length of the engine and provides a cool skin concept for the external surfaces of the turbine section.
Figure 1
Engine Cutaway View
FAN
The fan is an axial flow unit that moves large quantities of air into the bypass and core inlets. The bypass
section consists of the fan spinner support, fan rotor assembly, fan bypass stator, fan duct assembly
and the bypass fan support and shaft section. The fan is driven by the low pressure N1 spool through
the planetary gear section.
COMPRESSOR SECTION
Air enters the engine through the air inlet section located immediately aft of the fan bypass section and
continues on to the LP compressor where it is compressed and forced through the interstage diffuser
assembly to the HP compressor where it is further compressed and discharged into the combustion
chamber.
NOTE: A stage is one rotor (rotating blades) and one stator (non rotating vanes).
Each stage of the axial flow compressor utilizes rotating compressor blades to accelerate the air,
followed by static stator vanes which decelerate the air, converting kinetic energy into pressure. This
provides a steady rise in pressure through the compressor stages, without significant change to overall
velocity.
As in axial flow compressors, air is picked up and accelerated outwards towards the diffuser. When the
accelerating air reaches the diffuser its velocity is reduced, converting kinetic energy into pressure. The
high pressure spool also drives the accessory gearbox through a tower shaft and transfer gear
reduction system.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
The compressed air flows into a single reverse flow annular combustion chamber in the turbine section
where it is mixed with atomized fuel supplied by twelve duplex fuel nozzles. The twelve duplex fuel
nozzles consists of primary nozzles used for starting and secondary nozzles used in conjunction with
the primary nozzles for all other phases of engine operations.
The fuel-air mixture is ignited by the two igniter plugs located at the six and seven o’clock positions
within the combustion chamber. After the ignition cuts-out, combustion is self sustaining and the
combustion gases are then directed to the turbine by the transition liner. The hot gases pass through
both the high and low pressure turbines, driving both rotating compressor assemblies and then exiting
through the exhaust nozzles with the bypassed air.
TURBINE SECTION
The turbine section contains four (one high pressure, three low pressure) axial flow turbine wheels and
four stator assemblies. On leaving the turbine, the exhaust gases enter a mixer compound-thrust-nozzle
system, where they mix with the bypass air before discharging through a convergent-divergent nozzle.
The high pressure turbine rotor assembly is air cooled to allow an increased turbine inlet temperature.
ACCESSORY DRIVE
An accessory drive gearbox and transfer gearbox are driven from the high pressure N2 spool. The
transfer gearbox is driven by a vertical shaft and in turn drives the accessory gearbox through a
horizontal gearshaft.
The accessory drive gearbox provides shaft power for airplane accessories (hydraulic pump, starter/
generator and alternator) which are mounted on the forward face of the accessory gearbox. The fuel
pump, fuel control unit and oil pump are all mounted on the rear face of the accessory gearbox.
When the engine is operating, the single-stage fan draws air through the nacelle inlet duct. The outer
diameter of the fan accelerates a moderately large air mass at a low velocity into the full-length bypass
duct. At the same time, the inner diameter of the fan accelerates an air mass into the engine core.
The pressure of this air is increased by the LP compressor and directed to the HP compressor where
the air pressure is further increased and ducted aft to the combustor. A precise amount of this air enters
the reverse-flow combustor where fuel is injected by twelve spray nozzles.
The mixture is initially ignited by two igniter plugs and expanded through the turbine. The HP turbine
extracts enough energy to drive the HP compressor and the transfer and accessory gears. The LP
turbine extracts enough energy to drive the LP compressor, the planetary gear and the fan.
The remaining gas energy is accelerated aft through the exhaust pipe and joins the fan airflow from the
bypass duct to provide the total direct thrust.
Figure 2
Gas Flow During Engine Operation
The EIS provides full time displays of engine Fan RPM N1, ITT and a part time, pop-up or
pilot-selectable display of engine RPM N2, fuel flow, oil pressure and oil temperature on the left MFD.
Fuel quantity for each wing tank and ventral tank status are normally displayed on the right MFD. The
EIS also displays alerts and warnings for operation outside normal limits.
The digital read-outs for the engine parameters and the pointers for N1 and ITT will flash for 5 seconds
when they first turn yellow and stop flashing if they turn green (white for ITT) in less than the 5 second
time period. The digital read-outs and pointers will flash for 5 seconds when they first turn red, continue
to flash if they turn yellow within the 5 second period, but stop flashing if they turn green (white for ITT)
in that 5 second time period.
The part time engine parameters (N2, fuel flow, oil temperature, oil pressure and fuel temperature read-
outs and legends) are automatically displayed when an out of limit or engine miscompare condition
occurs.
The ENGINE button on the Display Control Panel (DCP) is used to manually control the display of the
part time engine parameters. The first push of the DCP ENGINE button removes the parameters,
provided that all read-outs are within normal operating limits. The last change by either pilot controls
the EIS on all currently enabled displays. Declutter is not allowed when an engine miscompare is active.
Two sources for N1, N2 and ITT exist for each engine. One is the Data Concentrator Unit (DCU) and the
other is the Engine Data Concentrator (EDC). The left DCU is the priority source for the left engine, and
the right DCU is the priority source for the right engine with the cross-side DCU being the secondary
source.
The EDC is the third priority source with automatic selection between data sources being provided. The
DCU is the source for fuel flow, oil pressure, oil temperature and engine fire warning data. The DCU is
the interface between the avionics and the airplane subsystems. The primary function of the DCU is
acquisition, concentration, and transmittal of analog and discrete engine data. The EDC provides partial
control of the respective engine when it is ON (active). In the event of loss of either EDC data, the
current declutter state remains until manually changed or an out of limit condition automatically calls up
the parameters.
Engine information normally appears only on the Multi-Function Display (MFD). If display reversion
switching causes the MFD to become a Primary Flight Display (PFD), the engine information remains
displayed on that MFD (now a PFD). When display reversion switching shuts off the MFD display, then
the engine information shows on the on-side PFD.
Normal scale range for the N1 portion of the scale is 20 to 100% with an overlimit scale to 110%. Gray
tick marks are at 20, 40, 60, 80 and 110%. There is a red radial tick mark at the 100% normal redline.
The N1 digital display appears below the N1 legend and pointer icon, to the left of the N1 indication. The
N1 digital display has a range of 0 to 110%.
The normal limit for N1 is 100% and the N1 pointer and digital read-out are green when N1 is within
100%. If N1 is between 100.1% and 103.0% (Transient Limit) for less than 5 seconds, the N1 pointer
and digital read-out turn yellow. If N1 exceeds 103.0% (Redline) or exceeds the Transient time limit, the
N1 pointer and digital read-out turn red.
The N1 pointer is removed and four yellow dashes and a decimal point are displayed for the digital read-
out if all sources of N1 are flagged.
The REFS menu on the PFD automatically selects N1 REF to OFF MODE upon initial power-up on the
ground and maintains the last selected state and last active value thereafter. The N1 REF FMS MAN
selection and manual N1 REF values are synchronized between the PFDs so when either pilot changes
the on-side controls, the N1 REF state/values on all displays are set the same.
When the REFS menu is appearing on the PFD, pushing the line select key, next to the N1 REF legend,
controls the N1 REF. The first push of the N1 REF key selects MAN mode and the flashing cyan colored
box appears around the last active manually set N1 REF value. The FMS legend becomes smaller and
white, while the MAN legend becomes larger cyan colored text.
The N1 REF value can now be changed using the MENU ADV knob on the DCP. The second push of
the N1 REF line select key removes the flashing box and places a solid box around the FMS MAN
legend.
Pushing the N1 REF line select key when MAN control is ON, reselects FMS control. The FMS legend
becomes the larger cyan colored text, the MAN legend becomes the smaller white text and the manual
N1 REF read-out is removed from the menu. The current valid N1 REF supplied by the FMS shows in a
magenta color beneath the FMS legend.
When MAN control is ON, pushing and holding the N1 REF line select key for more than one second
will select MAN control to OFF. The larger cyan colored MAN legend turns to smaller white text, the
manual N1 REF is removed and the cyan colored N1 read-out and bugs are removed from the N1
display.
When displayed, the N1 REF appears between the N1/ITT scales and consists of a 3 or 4 digit read-out
with a decimal preceding the tenths digit. A triangular N1 REF icon precedes the digital read-out. The
icon and read-out are cyan colored in MAN control.
The thrust limit legend TO, GA, MCT, CLB, CRZ and TGT immediately follow the N1 REF icon, with the
digital display beneath, and are magenta colored in FMS control.
The triangular N1 REF bug is positioned on the perimeter of each N1 scale with the apex of the triangle
at the point that corresponds with the N1 REF digital read-out. The bug is the same color as the digital
read-out and is removed when the read-out does not appear. In the FMS mode, each bug is placed at
the position corresponding to the lower of the two FMS inputs.
In FMS control, the N1 REF icon, thrust limit legend and digital read-out are placed in a yellow box and
the N1 REF value shows in yellow when:
• N1 thrust limit values from the FMSs differ by more than 1%.
• Data input from one FMS is reported invalid when airspeed is less than 50 KIAS.
The N1 miscompare annunciation will flash for 5 seconds when first displayed, then remains steady.
In FMS control, if neither FMS is sending a selected thrust limit or the N1 REF data from both FMS’s is
failed, not received or outside the N1 REF display ranges:
• The REFS menu FMS read-out and the thrust limit legend on the EIS display are replaced by three
magenta colored dashes.
ITT DISPLAYS
Ten thermocouples, two pairs of five thermocouples connected in parallel to create an averaging circuit,
are located in the gas path between the high pressure turbine and the first stage of the low pressure
turbine. These thermocouples measure the Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) and send signals to
the Engine Data Concentrator (EDC) and the fuel computer.
The ITT display indicates the temperature between the first and second turbine stages in °C. The ITT
display consists of a scale, pointer and digital read-out for each engine. The ITT and N1 share a scale
for the same engine.
The ITT scale range is 200 to 1100° C. The gray tick marks on the ITT scale represent 200, 400, 600,
800 and 1100° C. There is a red radial tick mark at the ITT Normal Limit, as listed in the following table,
for the respective Operating Condition. In order to present the Normal Limit at the same scale position
for all Operating Conditions, the scaling between 800° C and 1100° C changes slightly for each
Operating Condition. Therefore, a small ITT pointer movement may occur when transitioning between
Operating Conditions.
The ITT pointer is positioned at the ITT digital display value, except the ITT pointer only appears when
ITT is above 200° C. The ITT pointer is the same color as the digital display and flashes when the display
flashes. The ITT digital display appears below the N1 digital read-out, to the left of the N1/ITT indication
with a range of 0 to 1100° C.
The ITT digital read-out and pointer are white when ITT is within the normal limit and red when ITT is
above the normal limit.
If all sources of ITT are flagged or missing, the ITT pointer is removed and four yellow dashes with a
decimal point are displayed for the digital read-out. The following lists the ITT normal and redline limits
for engine start and engine operation.
RUN
APR - ARM ITT ≤ 978° C ITT ≥ 980° C
APR Not Active
RUN
APR - ARM ITT ≤ 996° C ITT ≥ 998° C
APR Active
N2 RPM DISPLAYS
N2 RPM appears in the top right corner of the display. N2 is a standardized display of engine RPM
measured against a fixed 100% value. The N2 displays consist of digital read-outs for each engine. A
gray N2 legend appears between the left and right digital read-outs. Display range is 0 to 120%.
The N2 digital read-out is green when N2 is within the normal limit, yellow when N2 is within the transient
limit and red when N2 is in the redline.
Four yellow dashes and a decimal point replace the N2 read-out if all sources of N2 are flagged or
missing. The following lists the normal, transient and redline limits for N2
A fuel flow volume sensor and fuel flow temperature sensor for each engine are interfaced with the
on-side Data Concentrator Unit. Four yellow dashes are displayed if fuel flow from all sources is flagged
or missing.
The oil pressure digital read-out is green when OP is within the normal limits, yellow when OP is within
the transient limits and red when OP is in the redline.
A single oil pressure sensor from each engine interfaces with its on-side Data Concentrator Unit. Three
yellow dashes are displayed if oil pressure from all sources is flagged or missing.
47 ≤ OP ≤ 55 OP ≤ 24
for less than 3 minutes or
or 47 ≤ OP ≤ 55
N2 ≥ 80% 38 ≤ OP ≤ 46
25 ≤ OP ≤ 37 for 3 minutes or longer
or
OP ≥ 56
The oil temperature digital read-out is green when the temperature is within the normal limits, yellow
when within the transient limits and red when in the redline.
A single oil temperature sensor from each engine interfaces with its on-side Data Concentrator Unit.
Three yellow dashes are displayed if oil temperature data from all sources is flagged or missing.
141° C ≤ OT ≤ 149° C
141° C ≤ OT ≤ 149° C for 2 minutes or longer
Altitude > 30,000 ft 0° C ≤ OT ≤ 140° C
for less than 2 minutes or
OT ≥ 150° C
The red FIRE legend appears in the lower center of the applicable N1/ITT scale. The FIRE legend
flashes for 5 seconds when first displayed, then remains steady. The FIRE legend will display for at least
5 seconds.
CLIMB ANNUNCIATION
Maximum Climb Thrust is set by adjusting the thrust levers until the green CLIMB annunciation appears
at the lower center of the N1/ITT scales. CLIMB shares the display location with the FIRE annunciation;
the FIRE annunciation takes priority over CLIMB.
APR appears above the ARM legend and will appear at any time except when the APR active
annunciation is displayed. The APR active annunciation consists of a green boxed APR legend in the
same location as the APR ARM annunciation. The box and APR legend flash for 5 seconds when first
displayed, then remain steady.
Control for the automatic power reserve is via an APR ARM and APR OVRD switch on the center
instrument panel.
• ENGINE OIL
• IGNITION
• FUEL CONTROL
• POWER CONTROLS
ENGINE OIL (Figure 3)
Oil under pressure lubricates the engine bearings and the transfer, accessory and planetary gearboxes.
The system consists of:
The scavenge pumps collect oil from the planetary gear assembly and the forward engine bearings, the
aft engine bearings, the transfer gearbox and the mid engine bearings, and the accessory drive
gearbox. A common discharge line connects the four scavenge pumps to the engine oil reservoir.
An adjustable pressure regulator in the pumps helps to provide a constant oil pressure by compensating
for changes in the airplane altitude.
A magnetic chip detector is on the aft housing of the pump. All oil scavenged from the engine flows past
the detector. The detector catches any magnetic particles present in the oil due to engine wear for
inspection purposes.
VENT
No 4 and 5 No 6
BEARINGS BEARING
BREATHER
PRESSURIZING
VALVE
TRANSFER
GEARBOX
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
ANTI-SYPHON
ORIFICE
PLANETARY GEARS
Nos 1, 2 and 3
BEARINGS
OIL TANK
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL & BYPASS
VALVES
AIR/OIL
P S S S S COOLERS (3)
COMMON
SCAVENGE
OIL PUMPS
CHIP DETECTOR
FUEL
IN
PRESSURE
REGULATOR FILTER
OIL
COOLER
BYPASS FUEL FUEL
FUEL HEATER T P OUT
IN
∆ P INDICATOR
FUEL
OUT
OIL PRESSURE
LEGEND INLET OIL SCAVENGE OIL SENSE LINE
HIGH PRESSURE OIL VENT LINE
Figure 3
Engine Lubrication System
Oil Filter
A filter is provided to remove impurities from the oil. The oil filter consists of a disposable element
enclosed in a metal housing on the right side of the accessory drive gearbox.
Engine protection against filter clogging is provided by an oil filter bypass indicator valve located
adjacent to the oil filter. The valve opens when the pressure drop across the filter is excessive to bypass
lubricating oil around the filter.
An integral differential ∆P pressure indicator on the valve visually flags a clogged filter condition before
bypassing occurs. A thermal lockout device on the ∆P indicator prevents actuation under cold oil
conditions although the bypass valve will bypass oil under these conditions.
Oil Tank
A 1.65 US gallon capacity oil reservoir is located on the right side of the engine fan bypass housing.
The reservoir has a liquid level sight gauge and a filler cap on the right side of the tank. A filler tube and
cap are located on the left side of the tank which allows for oil tank replenishing when access to the right
side is restricted. Viewing ports are provided on the right side of the engine. (Figure 4)
Fuel Heater
An externally mounted fuel heater is located on the left side of the engine. The fuel heater provides oil-
to-fuel heat exchanging to prevent ice formation in the fuel system from clogging the fuel filter and any
other components.
Fuel flow through the fuel heater is thermostatically controlled to provide the optimum operating
temperature. Excess oil pressure with cold oil is prevented by a pressure bypass valve.
Air/Oil Cooler
After oil leaves the fuel heater, it passes through the air/oil coolers in the engine bypass duct. The air/
oil cooler consists of three segments: one half segment and two quarter segments.
Each segment is a finned unit with oil lines running through it. Together the three segments form the
inner surface of the fan duct.
A temperature controlled integral bypass valve directs oil that is hotter than 65° C through the three
segments of the air/oil cooler. Air flowing through the duct cools the oil that passes through the cooler.
Below this temperature, the valves bypass the oil around the air/oil cooler.
If the heat exchangers become obstructed, the temperature control valve bypasses the oil around them.
After the oil leaves the air/oil coolers, the flow splits. Part of the oil flows to the engine bearing sumps
(HP rotor shaft), the transfer gearbox assembly and the accessory gearbox. The remaining oil flows
through the oil temperature regulator (fuel/oil cooler) and then on to the planetary gear assembly.
ALTERNATOR
COOLING AIR
EXHAUST
ALTERNATOR
COOLING AIR
EXHAUST
Figure 4
Engine Views
If the oil temperature exceeds 99° C the control valves open to route the oil through the cooler. From
the fuel/oil cooler, oil then lubricates the fan shaft bearings and the front LP spool bearings.
After travelling to all the main sump areas, oil then drains by gravity to the lowest point of each sump
and is then drawn back to the engine oil reservoir by the scavenge pumps.
Oil Venting
Vent lines interconnect the oil sumps to the oil tank assembly and the breather pressurizing valve. The
breather pressurizing valve provides an ambient vent for the oil system at low altitudes and at high
altitude increases the internal engine vent and tank pressure to ensure proper oil pump operation.
Center Instrument
Panel
OIL 1 OIL 2
and/or
LO PRESS LO PRESS
Normally, engine oil pressure holds the switch open. If the pressure drops below 23 PSI, the switch
closes to complete a circuit which will cause the respective annunciator to illuminate. Once the pressure
exceeds 25 PSI, the switch will open to break the circuit and extinguish the annunciator.
IGNITION
Each engine has an independent ignition system that consists of:
• Ignition Unit
• Igniter Plugs and Leads
• ENG IGNITION Switches
• IGN ON Annunciators
Ignition Unit
An ignition unit on the upper left side of the fan bypass housing is a high voltage, capacitor discharge,
radio noise-suppressed, intermittent sparking type unit that uses a 10 to 30 VDC power supply. The
ignition system receives power from the PE busbar. Each unit provides separate and independent
outputs of 18,000 to 24,000 volts to the igniter plugs.
During the engine start cycle, a micro switch on each HP fuel lever provides ignition unit activation once
the engine reaches 10% N2.
Once the engine reaches self-sustaining speed, the relays de-energize to remove power from the
ignition units. Manual operation of the ignition unit is through the ENG IGNITION switch in the ON
position. If required, the unit can be operated continuously.
Ignition Switches
Each engine has a two-position (ON/OFF) ENG IGNITION switch on the flight compartment overhead
roof panel. In the ON position, the switch will illuminate an IGN ON annunciator on the flight
compartment overhead roof panel and will supply the ignition unit with 28 VDC from the PE busbar
through the No. 2 start auxiliary relay.
The annunciator only indicates that power is available to the ignition unit. Verification of the igniter firing
requires the ENG IGNITION switch to be turned to the ON position and listening for two distinct snaps
in the engine area.
Overhead Roof Panel
ENG IGNITION
1 ON 2
IGN ON
OFF
Filter Bypass
The filter bypass valve allows fuel to bypass the filter if an excessive pressure drop across the filter
occurs. When an excessive differential pressure condition exists, an electrical pressure switch will
cause the respective annunciator on the overhead roof panel to illuminate, accompanied by a repeater
annunciator on the MWS panel.
Overhead Roof Panel
MWS Panel
ENG 1 ENG 2
and/or FUEL
FUEL FUEL
FUEL CONTROL
LEGEND UNIT
SUPPLY PUMP
DISCHARGE
LOW-PRESSURE
PUMP FUEL FEED
HYDRO-
HIGH-PRESSURE MECHANICAL
COLLECTOR PUMP FUEL
TANK METERING
UNIT
∆ P INDICATOR
PUMP
FILTER HIGH RELIEF
BYPASS PRESSURE
PUMP VALVE
ELEMENT
FUEL
TEMPERATURE
REFERENCE
BOOST
PUMP
THERMO-
STATIC
CAPSULE COLD
BYPASS
FILTER RETURN
HOT
ANTI-ICE
VALVE
OIL/FUEL HEATER
INTERSTAGE
PRESSURE TAP
(SAFETY CAPPED)
OIL OIL
Figure 5
Engine-Driven Fuel Pump Assembly
The thrust lever actuates one valve and the electronic engine computer actuates the other valve. If the
computer senses an ultimate overspeed condition, the computer closes the shutoff valve, fuel flow
stops, and the engine shuts down.
Each DEEC controls the engine acceleration and deceleration. Separate ENG CMPTR switches on the
flight compartment overhead roof panel allow automatic (AUTO) or overspeed protection (OVSPD
PROT) mode selection. Both DEECs receive 28 VDC from the PE busbar in the automatic mode.
Overhead Roof Panel
ENG CMPTR
1 AUTO 2
O
F
F
OVSPD PROT
During acceleration and deceleration, the DEECs provide governing, limiting and scheduling response
to the thrust lever and engine inputs. Inputs to each computer are:
If an overspeed occurs, the primary overspeed circuit arms an electronic switch which energizes the
overspeed solenoid that cuts fuel to the engine. This function is called the ultimate overspeed
protection.
A MANUAL/NORMAL switch on the front of the DEEC CASE (rear equipment bay) and the flight
compartment overhead roof panel ENG CMPTR switches control the overspeed protection.
Center Instrument
ENG 1 ENG 2
and/or Panel
CMPTER CMPTER
The DEEC compensates the engine operating parameters for different fuel types. Failure to adjust fuel
specific gravity increases the possibility of the engine surging and high turbine temperatures during
start, acceleration and deceleration.
Figure 6
DEEC - Engine Interface
The DEEC normally positions the surge bleed valve fully open for start and idle conditions and fully
closed for high RPM conditions. For transient RPM conditions, however, the DEEC modulates the surge
bleed valve in response to impending stall conditions. With the DEEC off or failed, the surge bleed valve
remains 1/3 open.
As the start sequence continues and the RPM increases, the fuel flow and pressure difference across
the divider orifice increases; fuel passes into the secondary lines that supply the fuel atomizers.
Fuel Nozzles
Each engine uses twelve duplex (primary and secondary) fuel nozzles on two manifold assemblies;
each manifold contains six duplex nozzles. Fuel swirls and breaks into microscopic droplets as it passes
through the atomizer orifice into the combustion chamber. The primary and secondary fuel nozzles
provide a finely atomized fuel spray pattern.
Fuel Heating
The fuel heater permits oil-to-fuel heat exchange to maintain the desired temperature and prevents ice
formation in the fuel system from clogging the fuel pump assembly fuel filter.
A portion of the engine fuel supply is diverted through the fuel heater by the thermostatically operated
anti-ice valve located in the fuel pump. An appropriate amber ENG 1 FUEL or ENG 2 FUEL annunciator,
located on the roof overhead panel and a repeater annunciator located on the MWS panel, will
illuminate when the temperature of the fuel in the associated fuel pump becomes excessive.
MWS Panel
ENG 1 ENG 2
and/or FUEL
FUEL FUEL
The fuel flow indicating system uses 28 VDC power from the PS1 and PS2 busbars. The left system
receives power from the PS1 busbar, and the right system receives power from the PS2 busbar.
With the DEEC failed and OVSPD PROT selected, or OFF selected, through the ENG CMPTR switch
on the overhead panel, the thrust lever directly controls the engine power through the fuel control
governor. The thrust lever positions are in relationship to the angle of rotation of the control shaft on the
FCU. The full aft (0°) position is the engine fuel cutoff position. The idle (or engine start) position is
forward at 20°. To move the fuel valve from idle to cutoff or from cutoff to idle, the HP fuel cock lever
must be lifted. The fuel valve has unrestricted travel from idle to full thrust.
Increasing power with the air brakes extended while the landing gear is down will complete a circuit that
sounds a warning horn. A mechanical locking device interconnects both thrust levers to prevent
simultaneous application of engine power above 60% N1 with the elevator gust lock installed. Although
one thrust lever at a time can be advanced to any setting.
A cam and spring at the OFF and ON positions of each HP fuel cock control lever mechanically lock the
levers in either position. Before moving the lever, the knob must be pulled out to unlock it. The lever
automatically locks once it reaches the OPEN or CLOSED positions.
Microswitches within each lever control power to the engine igniter units. In OFF, a circuit opens to
remove power to the igniter unit. In ON, the switch closes to supply power to the respective unit. A red
warning light is above the ON position of each HP fuel cock control lever. The light will illuminate in
combination with the fire warning system as a reminder to close the respective cock.
STOP BOLTS HP
(FULL) (IDLE) COCK
LEVER
Figure 7
Fuel Controls
Engine Synchronizer
The engine synchronizer provides synchronization of the engines. Using the three position ENG SYNC
switch, synchronization of either the low pressure fan N1 or the high pressure turbine N2 speeds can be
selected in the cockpit.
The left engine (No. 1) is the master engine and the right engine (No. 2) is the slave. The system
compares either the N1 or N2 speeds of the engines. The synchronizer processes speed signals from
each engine and provide a trim signal to the electronic engine computer of the slave engine to reduce
any speed difference.
Synchronization has limited authority and can occur only when speed differential is within the authority
range. The maximum authority range is 2.5% N2 at thrust setting midrange; authority range decreases
as engine speed increases or decreases from the thrust setting midrange. The synchronizer has no
effect at the full thrust settings.
The OFF position of the switch removes the DC power from the synchronizer; the N1 and N2 positions
select the spool that will be used for synchronization. Operation of the synchronizer requires both
engine computer switches to be in the AUTO positions.
With APR armed the synchronizer is inoperative. When a synchronizer is switched off, the N1 RPM
indication displays N1 RPM compensated for the thrust of the engine.
When the synchronizer is switched to N1 or N2, the N1 RPM indication displays true N1 RPM.
Power Supply
The engine synchronizer system uses 28 VDC from the PS1 busbar.
ENG SYNC
N1
N2
OFF
Air is bled from two stages of the engine compressor to provide supplies for:
Figure 8
Engine Bleed Air and Ventilation
ANTI-ICING
An ENG ANTICE ON-OFF switch, located on the overhead roof panel ice protection section, is provided
for each engine. With either or both switches selected to ON, an ICE PROT SELECTED annunciator
on the MWS panel will illuminate.
Overhead Roof Panel
ENG ANTICE
1 ON 2
MWS Panel
ICE
OFF
PROT
PE BUSBAR
MWS DIM BUS
ICE PROT
SELECTED
ENG ANTICE
TO ENGINE DIGITAL 1 ON 2
COMPUTER IDLE
2 SEC
SCHEDULE
DELAY
TO Pt2 and Tt2
HEATING CIRCUITS
OFF
ENG 1
A/ICE
PRESSURE
6 PSI
SWITCH
ANTI-ICING
VALVE
PICCOLO TUBE
FROM ENGINE HP BLEED
Figure 9
Engine Anti-icing System
Engine inlet anti-icing should be used in flight continuously during expected icing conditions.
When icing conditions do not exist, the inlet anti-icing should not be used above 50° F (10° C) ambient
conditions for more than 10 seconds.
If anti-icing is required during takeoff, it should be turned ON prior to setting take-off power.
Each switch controls a servo-operated anti-icing on-off valve. When ON is selected, the following events
occur:
• The anti-icing valve opens and high pressure air is bled from the HP compressor and ducted
forward to anti-ice the nacelle inlet cowl.
Prior to the opening of an anti-icing valve, or during any subsequent system failure, the pressure switch
will register a low pressure condition and the appropriate ENG A/ICE annunciator will be illuminated at
the MWS dim pre-set level.
Pilot Instrument Panel Copilot Instrument Panel
Center Instrument
Panel
ENG 1 ENG 2
and/or
A/ICE A/ICE
The annunciator will remain illuminated at the dim level until the nacelle anti-icing air supply rises above
6 psi and the pressure switch contacts change over. Then the annunciator extinguishes. A timer in the
circuit makes sure the annunciator will brighten to full intensity, should the pressure switch not operate
within 2 seconds. The time delay also inhibits nuisance flashing of the annunciator during normal
system operation.
Power Supplies
DC supplies for the engine anti-icing system are taken from the PE busbar. The supplies to the pressure
switch are routed via the main gear weight-on wheels switch relay network.
• One low pressure (LP) bleed port on the inboard side of each engine takes bleed air aft of the last
stage of the axial compressor.
• A high pressure (HP) bleed port takes air from downstream of the centrifugal compressor.
Each bleed air system contains check valves that prevent air from returning to the engines at low engine
speeds or during engine shutdown. The airplane uses LP bleed air for air conditioning, normal
pressurization, emergency pressurization and hydraulic reservoir pressurization. HP bleed air
supplements LP bleed air supplying these services at low power settings. The rudder bias system
receives power from the LP bleed air system only.
When armed, the APR system allows an automatic increase in engine performance in the event of an
engine failure or transient fault during takeoff, or during a go-around following a single engine approach.
There will be no increase in thrust if the ambient conditions are such that the engines are N1 RPM
limited (at normal rating). The APR system is powered from the PE busbar and consists of two
mechanically latching, push on/push off, control switches in the flight compartment plus an APR/
Sychronizer control unit in the rear equipment bay.
CONTROLS
Two control switches, the LH one labelled APR OVRD and the RH one APR ARM are mounted on the
pilots center instrument panel. The ARM switch has an APR ARMED white annunciator which will be
illuminated when the switch is pushed to arm the system and will not illuminate when the switch is
pushed again to disarm the system. The APR OVRD switch has an APR green annunciator which will
illuminate when the system is armed and triggered, either automatically by N2 difference or manually
by pushing and latching the OVRD switch.
Pilot Instrument Panel Copilot Instrument Panel
Center Instrument
Panel
APR
APR OVRD APR ARM
APR
APR ARMED
INDICATION
INDICATION RELAY 2
APR RELAY 1
APR
ARMED
AUTO
SYNCHRONIZER
SWITCH DISARMED
ENGINE RPM
← N2 → N1
OFF
ARMED OVRD
APR/SYNCHRONIZER
CONTROLLER
FUEL FUEL
COMPUTER COMPUTER
1 2
ENGINE 1 ENGINE 2
(MASTER) (SLAVE)
Figure 10
APR System
OPERATION
In both automatic and manual modes the engine fuel computers limit maximum takeoff power to the
APR rating although under normal conditions, the APR control unit electrically trims down the settings
to the lower normal ratings. When the APR is triggered the control unit allows the computers to reset to
the APR ratings; normal engine response to the thrust lever movement is retained.
When armed, APR is triggered automatically if the engine N2 signals, received from the synchronizer
and compared by the APR controller, differ by more that 5% N2.
Increase in thrust is obtained by allowing the engines to be run at higher operating limits; the N2 rotor
speed increasing approximately 0.75% (max) and the interstage turbine temperature (ITT) rising
approximately 18° C (max).
Automatic Mode
In auto mode the system functions in conjunction with the engine synchronizer system.
Manual Mode
When armed, to cater for an auto mode malfunction, the system may also be triggered by manual
selection of APR OVRD.
NOTE: There is a penalty in terms of engine life whenever an engine operates at APR levels - see
the Airplane Flexible Maintenance Schedule for further details. Therefore manual selection
of APR should only be made when it is essential to do so.
To cancel APR mode after manual selection, both the APR OVRD and APR ARM switches should be
delatched. If only the APR ARM switch is delatched, APR will be cancelled but will be triggered again
as soon as the APR ARM switch is pushed.
Failure Modes
Failure of electrical power to the APR/sychronizer controller will also result in both fuel computers
resetting to the APR ratings.
The synchronizer must be serviceable to supply N2 comparisons for the APR auto mode. Manual
APR OVRD is independent of N2 signals.
An engine fuel computer must be serviceable and selected to AUTO in order to respond to APR. Should
an engine computer fail, or is selected to manual, with APR armed, APR will be triggered in the other
engine if engine speed differences exceed 5% N2.
DESCRIPTION
The thrust reverser assembly consists of clamshell type doors which, when stowed, form the final
section of the engine exhaust nozzle. The reverser doors are held in the stowed positions by a latching
system until released by the sequenced actuation of a series of switches and relays.
Two fan flaps within each installation are used to reduce the temperature at the clamshell doors while
in reverse mode; these are stowed and deployed in conjunction with the clamshell doors. Each thrust
lever has a solenoid operated baulk arrangement which mechanically prevents selection of reverse
thrust until the reverser doors are fully deployed. Each reverse thrust selector lever has a stop to limit
the thrust obtainable at the full reverse thrust position.
REVERSER
Center Instrument
Panel
ARM
Pushing this switch initiates a sequence, which upon completion makes sure the thrust reverser is ready
for deployment. The white ARM annunciator will illuminate when the ready for deployment sequence
has been completed.
The white ARM annunciator will only illuminate when the following conditions are satisfied:
OFF
Power to the thrust reverser system is OFF and indicated by the illumination of this white annunciator.
UNLCK
An amber annunciator which illuminates if one or more thrust reverser door latches are not locked and
when the doors are moving or deployed.
REVRS
A green annunciator which illuminates when the thrust reverser doors are fully deployed. Each thrust
reverser is actuated through an independent and identical hydraulic sub-system powered from the
airplane’s main system. The two systems both share a common accumulator.
Thrust reverse levers are mounted in a piggyback configuration on the engine thrust levers and each
thrust lever provides control for stow, deploy and reverse thrust for its respective engine.
Each engine thrust lever has a solenoid-operated baulk (lockout) which mechanically prevents selection
of reverse thrust until the reversers are fully deployed. Each engine thrust lever also has a stop to
mechanically limit the obtainable reverse thrust when the thrust reverser lever is increased to its
maximum thrust position.
An automatic engine thrust lever retard system is incorporated in the event of a stow or deploy
malfunction.
• Upper and lower clamshell type doors located on the rear of each engine nacelle.
• Hydraulic actuators and associated linkages that position the reverser doors upon either stow or
deploy commands.
• Latches which hold the reverser doors in the stowed position until released by sequentially
actuated switches and relays.
• Fan flaps, located within each fan duct, assist in temperature reduction on the doors. They deploy
and stow in conjunction with the doors.
The complete sequence of operation to cycle the reverse thrust system from stowed to deployed and
return to stowed can be grouped into three main phases of initiate, deploy and stow.
Initiate
When the POWER switch is pushed, the ARM annunciator will illuminate and an isolation solenoid
energizes to make pressure available to the latch, deploy and stow solenoid valves if the following
conditions are met:
The thrust reverser doors will be driven to the overstow position, allowing the door latches to clear the
latch receptacle. As the latch switches operate and the doors unlock, the UNLCK annunciator will
illuminate.
NOTE: The tendency of the exhaust forces on the doors is toward deploy whenever the engine is
running. When engaged, the latches cannot be disengaged unless the overstow condition
can be realized.
When the unlatch switches operate, the stow solenoid is de-energized and the deploy solenoid
energized retracting the primary actuators to deploy the reverser doors and extend the fan flaps into the
engine bypass airstream. The UNLCK and REVRS annunciators will illuminate.
After initial deployment, the reverse thrust lever baulk is released and additional reverse thrust may be
commanded by pulling the levers toward maximum reverse. A mechanical stop is set at a
predetermined thrust setting.
A deploy command inhibits operation of rudder bias to prevent rudder movement due to asymmetric
thrust. The airbrake warning horn and the ELEV/AIL trim annunciator is also inhibited.
Stow
Moving the reverse thrust lever to the stow position de-energizes the stow/deploy relay and closes the
unlatched solenoid. Deploy power is removed from the latch switches, the stow valve solenoid is
energized and hydraulic power is routed to the close side of the primary actuator, closing the reverser
doors.
Fan flaps are spring-loaded closed and the engine thrust lever retard actuator is limited to IDLE. When
the reverser doors reach fully locked, stow pressure is removed.
The stow valve solenoid is energized and hydraulic power operates the primary actuator to close the
reverser doors. The fan flaps will return to the closed position under spring pressure from an internal
system. Pressure is applied to the thrust lever retard actuator to limit it to the idle position. When the
reverser doors reach the fully locked position, stow pressure is removed.
Pushing the POWER switch off removes hydraulic pressure from the deploy, stow and latch valves and
the pressure switch in the control selector valve.
Autostow
The stow sequence (autostow) will always be activated when at least one pair of door latches on the
same side of the reverser is not locked and a valid deploy signal is not present, irrespective of the
position of the POWER switch. If the POWER switch is off the reverser will stow.
SYSTEM SAFETY
A reverse thrust selector installed to each engine thrust lever is operable only when the associated
thrust lever is fully retarded to the engine idle position. Detents locate the selector in either the stow or
deploy positions. When on the ground, the reverser doors may be secured in either the stowed or
deployed positions by use of safety pins with flags attached.
PRESSURE
SWITCH T/R ACCUMULATOR
LATCH
ISOLATION
HYDRAULIC
STOW PRESSURE
CONTROL LINE FROM
(SELECTOR) AIRPLANE
TO OPPOSITE SYSTEM
VALVE T/R SYSTEM THERMAL PRESSURE
RELIEF RELEASE
VALVE VALVE
HYDRAULIC
RETURN LINE
DEPLOY TO AIRPLANE
SYSTEM
FAN FAN
FLAP FLAP
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
PRIMARY
ACTUATOR
INBOARD OUTBOARD FUEL
2 2 1 CONTROLLER
1
1 1
THROTTLE
RETARD
3 ACTUATOR
3 IDLE
DOOR LATCH ASSEMBLY POSITION
1. Latch Switch
2. Unlatch Switch
3. Latch Actuator
Figure 11
Thrust Reverser Operating Mode - Overstow and Latch
PRESSURE
SWITCH T/R ACCUMULATOR
LATCH
ISOLATION
HYDRAULIC
STOW PRESSURE
CONTROL LINE FROM
(SELECTOR) AIRPLANE
TO OPPOSITE SYSTEM
VALVE T/R SYSTEM THERMAL PRESSURE
RELIEF RELEASE
VALVE VALVE
HYDRAULIC
RETURN LINE
DEPLOY TO AIRPLANE
SYSTEM
FAN FAN
FLAP FLAP
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
PRIMARY
ACTUATOR
INBOARD OUTBOARD
FUEL
2 2 CONTROLLER
1 1
1 1
THROTTLE
RETARD
ACTUATOR
3 IDLE
DOOR LATCH ASSEMBLY 3
POSITION
1. Latch Switch
2. Unlatch Switch
3. Latch Actuator
Figure 12
Thrust Reverser Operating Mode - Deploy
Section III
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Sub-section 3
FUEL SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Page
GENERAL.......................................................................................................3-3
WING TANKS .................................................................................................3-3
Figure 1 - Wing Tank Crossfeed and Transfer..........................................3-4
FUEL TANK VENTING ................................................................................3-4
DRAIN VALVES ...........................................................................................3-4
REFUEL/DEFUEL FILLER POINTS ............................................................3-4
Figure 2 - Fuel Feed System ...................................................................3-5
Figure 3 - Refuel/Defuel System .............................................................3-6
Gravity Filler ..........................................................................................3-7
Pressure Refueling................................................................................3-7
Table 1: Pressure Refueling Quantities ...................................................3-7
FUEL PROBES and FLOAT SWITCHES ....................................................3-7
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS ...................................................................3-8
REFUEL/DEFUEL CONTROL and INDICATIONS ......................................3-8
ENGINE FUEL FEED SYSTEM......................................................................3-9
FUEL PUMPS ..............................................................................................3-9
JET PUMPS .................................................................................................3-9
FUEL PRESSURE SWITCH ......................................................................3-10
LOW PRESSURE COCKS and LEVERS ..................................................3-10
HIGH PRESSURE COCKS and LEVERS .................................................3-10
Fuel To Engine Cutoff .........................................................................3-10
AUXILIARY TANK TRANSFER ...................................................................3-11
WING TANK CROSSFEED and TRANSFER ..............................................3-11
FUEL XFD TFR ANNUNCIATOR ..............................................................3-12
FUEL FLOW INDICATIONS.........................................................................3-12
FUEL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR ...........................................................3-12
• A ventral fuel tank under the lower aft fuselage (if installed)
The system has both a wing tank to wing tank transfer capability, and a crossfeed capability from either
wing tank to one or both of the engines. A fuel transfer system permits fuel transfer from the auxiliary
ventral tank into either one or both of the wing tanks.
Jet pumps use motive flow action from electrical fuel pumps to draw fuel from the wings into the number
one compartment (aft center wing section). The electrical fuel pumps deliver pressurized fuel to the
engines. The fuel system has a gravity refueling and a pressure refueling/defueling capability.
For information on the engine fuel system components refer to Sub-section 2 ENGINES.
WING TANKS
Each wing is a sealed structure (wet wing) forming a tank which is divided into six anti-surge
compartments by spars allowing fuel to pass via stringers to the No. 1 compartment which acts as the
fuel reservoir.
With the fuel pumps operating, and the appropriate transfer selection made, fuel can be transferred
between the wing tanks, and from the ventral tank to the wing tanks.
NOTE: The engines cannot receive fuel directly from the ventral tank, the fuel from the ventral tank
must be transferred to the wing tanks first.
Fuel cross-feed and wing to wing transfer is controlled by a lever labelled WING FUEL/X-FEED/
TRANSFER located on the lower center console.
When the WING FUEL cock is moved to the center X-FEED position, the fuel cross-feed valve is
opened to connect both engine feed lines together. This allows either fuel pump to supply fuel to both
engines. Non-return valves prevent fuel being fed back into the tank with the inoperative fuel pump.
When cross-feeding the fuel is drawn from one wing tank only. This results in the wings becoming
progressively out of balance.
This is monitored on the left and right wing fuel contents indications displayed on the Copilot’s
Multifunction Display (MFD).
To correct any out-of-balance the WING FUEL cock is moved to the bottom TRANSFER position. The
inter-wing transfer valve opens in addition to the cross-feed valve (already opened) and transfer of fuel
from the heavy wing to the lighter wing takes place via the jet pump.
Figure 1
Wing Tank Crossfeed and Transfer
The ventral tank vents into the left wing tank through two vent float valves, non-return valves, a pipe and
a wing stringer.
DRAIN VALVES
One fuel drain valve and one water drain valve per wing fuel tank are located on the lower surface of
the center wing section. In addition a drain valve below the vent surge tank allows water checks or
complete draining.
A fuel drain valve and fuel tank water drain valve for the ventral tank is found on the lower forward
surface of the ventral tank.
WATER DRAIN
CHECK VALVE
SUCTION
FEED
STRAINER
AUX FUEL
2 3 4 TFR
5
During operation of the ventral tank
transfer valve (5) the AUX FUEL TFR
annunciator will illuminate on the
overhead roof panel.
6
TO APU
(if installed) PRESS PRESS
SWITCH VENTRAL TANK SWITCH
No 1 No 2
ENGINE ENGINE
FUEL 1 FUEL 2
LO PRESS LO PRESS
Figure 2
Fuel Feed System
Figure 3
Refuel/Defuel System
The ventral tank is gravity fueled through the ventral tank filler assembly, which is accessible through a
hinged door aft of the rear equipment bay door beneath the aft section of the right engine. The ventral
tank is gravity fueled in the same manner as the wing tank.
Pressure Refueling
A standard type 2 1/2 inch pressure refueling coupling is accessible through a hinged door recessed
into the ventral tank fairing at the rear right side of the airplane. The airplane fuel system accepts a
maximum refueling supply pressure of 50 psi.
Incorporated into the fuel system is a pressure reducing valve that reduces the refueling pressure within
the system to 25 psi. Restrictors limit flow rates into tanks and surge relief valves modulate transient
high pressures.
NOTES:
1. When gravity refueling is used the tank capacities will increase by 3 U.S. gallons
(11 Liters).
2. For airplanes without an external toilet servicing facility, the capacity of the ventral tank
will increase by 5 U.S. gallons (19 liters).
The fuel probes are positioned within the tanks so that between certain limits, the airplane attitude does
not effect the indicated contents. A high level/low level float switch in the ventral tank supplies fuel level
information to the Data Concentrator Unit (DCU) which is then indicated on the Copilot’s Multifunction
Display (MFD).
The left and right fuel quantity indications on the Copilot’s MFD display the quantity of fuel in each wing
tank. The fuel quantity indications display the actual usable fuel in level flight. The ventral tank fuel
indication receives fuel level information from the associated high level/low level float switch via the
DCU. The indication displays either FULL, EMPTY or a cross-hatch pattern, the cross-hatch pattern
indicating that the fuel level is between full and empty or that electrical power is off. The tanks also
contain a small amount of unusable fuel most of which may be drained together with any water content
from the tanks via the water/fuel drains.
PILOT'S CENTER
Center Instrument
INSTRUMENT PANEL
HAWKER 800XP Panel
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2000 FUEL
2000 FUEL 2000
2000 15
QTYLBS
QTY LBS 25
FLAPS
VENTRAL FULL 45
VENTRAL FULL
M6920_0
HA00C
016562AA
The engine feed system supplies positive pressure fuel from an electric fuel pump in the rear center
wing section to the engine driven pump in the engine fuel control. The wing tank transfer system allows
fuel balancing between the wing fuel tanks in flight and on the ground. The auxiliary transfer system
distributes fuel from the ventral tank in equal portions to the left and right wing tank systems.
Drain of the airplane batteries has been reduced on airplanes which have incorporated RAC Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641. Incorporation of this SB allows the display of fuel quantity on the pilot’s CDU
following the selection of the Refuel Control Panel POWER switch to ON. Selecting the airplane
batteries to ON (for these airplanes) is not required.
FUEL PUMPS
Two electrically operated fuel pumps, one per wing tank, located in the fuel reservoir (compartment
No. 1), supply fuel to their respective engines and also provide motive flow fuel to its associated jet
pumps. Non-return valves in the fuel pump outlets and the sides of the fuel pump reservoirs make sure
the direction of fuel flow is from the wing tanks to the engines. In the event of a single pump failure, a
cross-feed facility permits the operational pump to feed both engines.
Each fuel pump is controlled by a three position rocker switch on the flight compartment overhead roof
panel. The switch positions are: ON/OFF/EMERG. The normal operating position is ON, and power to
the pumps is taken from the PS1 busbar for the left pump and the PS2 busbar for the right pump.
When the EMERG position is selected both pumps are powered from PE busbar. Under normal
conditions, each fuel pump delivers fuel to its respective engine via a low pressure fuel cock.
Overhead Roof Panel
L PUMP R PUMP
ON ON
O
F
F
EMERG EMERG
Should both fuel pumps fail, fuel still gravity feeds into the fuel reservoir of each wing so that the engine
driven pumps can draw the fuel for operation under suction feed. Warning of pump failure is provided
by a FUEL 1 LO PRESS and/or FUEL 2 LO PRESS amber annunciator located on the overhead roof
panel. To alert the flight crew of these warnings, these annunciators are accompanied by a flashing
repeater annunciator located on the MWS panel.
FUEL 1 FUEL 2
and/or and FUEL
LO PRESS LO PRESS
JET PUMPS
Each fuel pump also supplies fuel to two jet pumps. One jet pump drains fuel from the wing manifold
stringers to maintain the wing reservoir full. It also makes sure a fuel supply is provided to the fuel pump
during momentary negative "g" conditions. The second jet pump forms part of the fuel transfer system
and induces a flow into the associated wing tank reservoir from either the opposite wing tank or the
ventral tanks, dependent on the transfer selection made.
The transfer system jet pumps also operate a scavenge system which continuously transfers fuel
between the center section beam and the fuel pump reservoirs to prevent water accumulation. Jet
pumps only operate when their inlets are completely submerged and when their associated fuel pumps
are on.
The pressure switch illuminates the FUEL 1 LO PRESS or FUEL 2 LO PRESS annunciators on the
overhead roof when the pressure drops below 6.5 (± .5) psi and extinguishes the annunciators when
the fuel pressure increases. The FUEL repeater annunciator, on the MWS panel, will also illuminate to
direct the flight crew’s attention to the overhead roof panel.
To operate, lift a hinged guard installed above the control levers before the levers are moved to the
closed (down) position. The LP COCK levers also incorporate a spring loaded knob to lock the lever in
either the open or closed positions.
NOTE: Closing the No. 1 LP COCK lever will also close the fuel supply to the APU (if installed).
Each shutoff valve opens or closes when the associated HP COCK control lever is moved up or down
respectively. The HP COCK levers incorporate a spring loaded knob to lock the lever in either the open
or closed positions. Opening the HP COCK lever during the engine start cycle initiates ignition.
AUX FUEL
TFR
With both fuel pumps operating, fuel transfers from the ventral tank to both wing tanks with jet pump
operation in approximately 10 minutes.
When only one fuel pump is operational, the fuel from the ventral tank can only transfer to the wing with
the operational fuel pump running. Under this condition the transfer process time may increase to over
18 minutes.
NOTE: To make sure the fuel in the ventral tank has been completely transferred, the AUX FUEL
TRANSFER lever should be left open for at least 2 minutes after the completion of fuel
transfer and the airplane has reached it’s cruising altitude.
If both fuel pumps are inoperative the fuel in the ventral tank cannot be transferred.
NOTE: Overweight landing procedure and inspection is required for any landing made with fuel in
the ventral tank.
Moving the AUX FUEL TRANSFER lever to the up position closes the ventral tank transfer valve and
the white AUX FUEL TFR annunciator will extinguish. Auxiliary fuel transfer process should begin as
soon as the indicated fuel in each wing reduces to 3300 lbs.
The WING FUEL position closes the crossfeed and transfer valves and allows fuel to feed from the left/
right wing tanks to the left/right engines respectively. The lever should be in this position for all normal
flight conditions.
The X-FEED position opens the crossfeed valve and allows fuel from either wing tank to feed one or
both engines. In the event of a fuel pump failure, the X-FEED position enables the operating fuel pump
to supply both engines.
The TRANSFER position opens the transfer valve and enables wing to wing fuel transfer. With the lever
in the TRANSFER position and a single fuel pump operating, fuel transfers from the opposite wing tank
to the wing tank containing the operating fuel pump.
FUEL
XFD TFR
Dual FUEL FLOW indications on the Pilot’s Multifunction Display (MFD) provide a visual account of the
fuel consumption rate. A flow transmitter on each engine sends a signal through the Engine Indicating
System and displays the fuel flow figures on the Pilot’s MFD.
46 PRESS 46
OIL
120 TEMP °C 125
M6920_0
HA00C
016562AA
A temperature bulb in the left engine fuel supply line is electrically connected to the outside air/fuel
temperature indicator on the upper left area of the center control pedestal. The indicator displays the
fuel temperature when the PUSH FUEL TEMP switch is pushed.
PUSH
OAT FUEL
TEMP
PUSH
Outside Air/Fuel
Temperature
Indicator A RUDDER BIAS B
GENERAL ......................................................................................................4-3
Figure 1 - Engine Fire Detection and Warning System
Component Locations.............................................................4-3
Each engine is divided into two zones for fire detection purposes. Each zone is equipped with a fire or
overheat detection element connected to a responder. When a fire or overheat is detected in a zone,
an audible and visual warning is initiated. Two twin-shot fire extinguishers are provided in the rear
equipment bay and are connected to each engine through tubing.
Figure 1
Engine Fire Detection and Warning System Component Locations
ENG
FIRE
FIRE
ENG 1 EXT ENG 2 EXT
ENG 1 ENG 2
1 FIRE FIRE 1
S BELL CANCEL S
H H
O O
T BELL BELL T
CNCLD CNCLD
2 2
EXT 1 EXT 2
FIRED 1 2 FIRED
OVERHEAT
The sensor acts as a fixed volume device filled with helium gas. When the average temperature in the
engine detection zone increases, the helium gas pressure rises in proportion. An alarm switch in the
responder is triggered when a pre-set average temperature is reached.
Both the overheat and fire detection functions are reversible. When the detected temperature reduces
to normal level, the warnings cease.
WARNINGS
The flight compartment engine fire, visual and audible, warnings are activated by the responder. The
sensor does not trigger false alarms if mechanical damage occurs to the sensor. Each pair of
responders is connected to:
• An associated HP cock red fire warning lamp (directly above the HP cocks).
The operation of the fire warning bell may be cancelled by pushing the relevant BELL CANCEL 1 or 2
switch/annunciator on the forward extension of the overhead roof panel. The white BELL CNCLD
annunciator, integral with the switch, illuminates.
TESTING
Each engine fire/overheat detector system is provided with an ENG FIRE warning TEST switch. These
switches are located on the TEST section of the overhead roof panel.
• FIRE legend will flash for 5 seconds and then remain steady in the lower center
of the applicable N1/ITT scale.
Engine fire extinguishant is supplied from two dual-head, single-shot extinguisher bottles located in the
rear equipment bay. The extinguishant is distributed from the bottles by tubing connected to twin high-
rate discharge nozzles mounted one on each engine pylon wall and located to discharge into the
associated engine bay.
Each extinguisher, via the dual extinguisher head, is piped to both engines which allows either one shot
of extinguishant per engine or two shots of extinguishant to a single engine, as necessary.
OPERATION
Discharge of each bottle is achieved by the firing of electrically operated cartridge units mounted in the
dual head of the bottles. Firing of the cartridges is controlled by two ENG EXT baulked selector
switches, one for each engine.
When either switch is selected to SHOT 1 or SHOT 2 the relevant cartridge fires and one bottle is
completely discharged into the appropriate engine. At the same time, adjacent to the selector switch,
an associated EXT FIRED transparent indicator fuse turns red.
NOTE: Figure 2 shows a fire occurred in No. 1 engine and extinguisher bottle 1 has been used
(shot 1).
The second bottle is still available for use, either in No. 1 engine (shot 2) or in No. 2 engine
(shot 1) should the need arise.
Two pressure relief discharge indicators, located on the fuselage below the left engine pylon, are
connected one to each bottle and are visible for walk around inspections. The indicators normally
display a green disc.
In the event of excessive pressure in the bottle, a safety disc ruptures to release the contents. The
released extinguishant flows to the discharge indicator and blows out the green disc to reveal a bright
red interior and the discharged bottle must be replaced before the next flight.
An overheat condition in the rear equipment bay is detected by six thermally-operated switches and
indicated by a single REAR BAY OVHT annunciator on the MWS panel.
Operation of one or more of the switches connects a supply to the annunciator and activates the MWS
master warning lamps which flash until acknowledged.
The airplane normally has three smoke detectors installed. The smoke detectors are located in the
forward baggage compartment, the aft baggage compartment and the toilet vanity.
If smoke is detected, a red REAR BAGG SMOKE annunciator on the MWS panel illuminates and the
MWS master warning lights flash until acknowledged.
FIRE
ENG 1 EXT ENG 2 EXT
ENG 1 ENG 2
1 FIRE FIRE 1
S BELL CANCEL S
H H
O O
T BELL BELL T
CNCLD CNCLD
2 2
EXT 1 EXT 2
FIRED 1 2 FIRED
ENGINE 1 - SHOT 2
ENGINE 2 - SHOT 2
EXTINGUISHER EXTINGUISHER
BOTTLE (FIRED) BOTTLE (UNUSED)
TWIN CHECK
VALVES CHECK TWIN
NOZZLES NOZZLES
VALVES
PRESSURE RELIEF
DISCHARGE INDICATORS
Figure 2
Engine Fire Extinguisher System
(depicts engine 1 warning and extinguisher 1, shot 1 fired)
A single portable hand-operated extinguisher, stowed on the flight compartment left bulkhead, provides
BCF extinguishant for fighting fires in the interior of the fuselage.
A second BCF extinguisher is located in the passenger cabin in a location determined by the cabin
layout.
• Electrical fires.
• The early stages of fires involving freely burning materials such as wood, paper and cloth.
The extinguishant is a charge of 1.5 kg of BCF (Halon 1211) propelled by a pressurized charge of dry
nitrogen. Operation of the extinguisher is controlled by a manual trigger. A safety catch is on the
mounting bracket to prevent operation of the trigger when the extinguisher is stowed. The extinguisher
is retained in the mounting bracket by a strap and fastener.
Releasing the trigger interrupts the flow and seals the nozzle to prevent any leakage of extinguishant.
NOTE: A re-charged extinguisher must be installed in the airplane once an extinguisher has been
completely or partially used.
Figure 3
BCF Portable Fire Extinguisher
GENERAL.......................................................................................................5-3
MAIN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.......................................................................5-3
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.............................................................5-3
MAIN SYSTEM ...............................................................................................5-4
FLUID STORAGE ........................................................................................5-4
POWER GENERATION...............................................................................5-5
High Pressure Relief .............................................................................5-5
Low Pressure Indication ........................................................................5-5
Hand Pump ...........................................................................................5-5
MAINTAINED PRESSURE PATHS .............................................................5-5
Thrust Reversers...................................................................................5-5
Wheel Brakes Emergency Path ............................................................5-6
Accumulators ........................................................................................5-6
NON-MAINTAINED PRESSURE PATHS ....................................................5-6
Figure 1 - Main Hydraulic System Components ......................................5-7
KEY TO FIGURE 2 ......................................................................................5-8
Figure 2 - Main Hydraulic System............................................................5-9
AUXILIARY SYSTEM ...................................................................................5-10
Figure 3 - Auxiliary Hydraulic System Components...............................5-10
Figure 4 - Auxiliary Hydraulic System ....................................................5-11
CONTROLS and INDICATIONS ................................................................5-12
FLUID STORAGE ......................................................................................5-12
OPERATION ..............................................................................................5-12
Figure 5 - Operation of Auxiliary Hydraulic System Selector Handle.....5-13
RESETTING THE MAIN SYSTEM.............................................................5-14
Hydraulic power is provided by independent Main and Auxiliary systems for operation of the following
services:
• Nosewheel steering
HYD OVHT Main MWS panel Hydraulic fluid overheat warning 90° C
Accumulator pressure
indicators Rear equipment bay Initial charge at 1000 psi
(main and wheel brakes)
Accumulator pressure
Rear equipment bay Initial charge at 1500 psi
indicators (thrust reversers)
Main reservoir contents level Parameters stated on label next to
Rear equipment bay
tube reservoir
Main reservoir air pressure
Rear equipment bay 0 to 30 psi is normal
gauge
FLUID STORAGE
System fluid is stored in a spherical shaped reservoir located in the rear equipment bay. Fluid contents
are displayed in a level indicator tube, integral with the reservoir.
Air, tapped from both engines is used to pressurize the reservoir to make sure a supply is fed to the
pumps under all flight conditions.
The air is supplied to the reservoir via check valves and a pressure reducing valve.
The reservoir has an inward and outward relief valve as well as a pressure gauge.
An on/off valve in each suction line is interconnected to the related HP cock lever. Isolation of the
hydraulic fluid supply is therefore simultaneous with engine shut-down. When an on/off valve is closed,
a closed-circuit via the valve provides a full volume supply to the pump for lubrication.
Each pump delivers fluid at a nominal pressure of 3000 psi via a low pressure switch, snubber and
check valve, to the pressure filter in the main delivery line to the airplane systems.
Should the pump delivery pressure rise above 3750 psi, the relief valve operates to pass fluid into the
return line.
Hand Pump
The Main system can be pressurized for ground servicing purposes by a hand pump located in the rear
equipment bay. The hand pump inlet is connected to the line from the suction filter. When operated, the
pump passes pressurized fluid through a check valve, into the main system.
The PMV shuts off if the pressure upstream of it falls to 2300 psi. This makes sure the pressure in the
main accumulator is sufficient for several operations of the stall identification system and operation of
the normal wheel brakes when landing.
Thrust Reversers
Fluid stored in the thrust reverser accumulator is prevented from leaking back to the main system by a
check valve.
Should the main system pressure fail, the check valve retains the pressure stored in the emergency
brakes accumulator. For details of the number of brake applications available using the fluid from the
accumulator, refer to Sub-section 8 LANDING GEAR.
Low pressure (below 2250 psi) in the path or accumulator is indicated by the illumination of the EMRG
BRK LO PRESS annunciator on the main MWS panel.
Accumulators
Three piston-type accumulators, each installed with a pressure indicator and a gas charging valve, are
located in the rear equipment bay. The piston separates charges of gas from the hydraulic fluid.
With no hydraulic pressure in the system, the main system and the emergency brake accumulators are
initially charged with nitrogen at 1000 psi.
The initial charge for the thrust reverser accumulator is 1500 psi.
ISOLATION VALVE
AIR BRAKE
ACTUATOR
AIR BRAKE
ACTUATOR
Figure 1
Main Hydraulic System Components
KEY TO FIGURE 2
7. Pressure transmitter
ON/OFF ON/OFF
VALVE VALVE
lubrication loop
EDP EDP (when HP cock
is closed)
1
HYD 1
3 3 HYD 2
LO PRESS LO PRESS
2 2
8
PRESSURE THRUST 9
FILTER REVERSER
ACCUMULATOR
THRUST
4 REVERSERS
LANDING
GEAR
AIRBRAKES
NOSE WHEEL 9
STEERING
EMERGENCY BRAKE
ACCUMULATOR
SPEED
7 CONTROL
RESTRICTOR
5 6
STALL IDENT’N
SYSTEM (STICK PUSH)
BRAKE PRESSURE
CONTROL GAUGE
VALVE
MAIN
ACCUMULATOR
TO BRAKE UNITS
Figure 2
Main Hydraulic System
The auxiliary hydraulic system provides an alternative source of hydraulic power for landing gear
lowering and flaps operation. The system is hand-operated, and when selected, is independent of the
main system.
NOTES:
1. Emergency lowering of the landing gear is available regardless of the setting of the
landing gear selector lever but the flaps must be selected to the required setting.
2. When using the auxiliary system, lowering of the landing gear always occurs before
operation of the flaps.
3. The system cannot be used to raise the landing gear.
4. Following the selection of the auxiliary system, it must be reset manually before the
main system can be used to operate the landing gear.
CAUTION: IF A SELECTION OF THE AUXILIARY SYSTEM HAS BEEN MADE FOLLOWING A MAIN
SYSTEM FAILURE, THE AUXILIARY SYSTEM MUST NOT BE RESET IN FLIGHT. IGNORING
THIS CAUTION COULD RESULT IN THE LANDING GEAR COLLAPSING ON TOUCHDOWN.
Figure 3
Auxiliary Hydraulic System Components
MWS PANEL
LEVEL DUMP
INDICATOR
VALVE
RESERVOIR
FILTER
FLAP CONTROL
UNIT
MAIN
SYSTEM
SHUTTLE
VALVE
NOSE
GEAR
ACTUATOR
KEY
AUXILIARY
SYSTEM
SHUTTLE
VALVES
MAIN
SYSTEM
SUCTION
MAIN
RETURN GEAR
ACTUATORS
Figure 4
Auxiliary Hydraulic System
CONTROL LOCATION
Left side of center instrument panel,
AUX HYD SYSTEM PULL selector handle
adjacent to FMS No. 1 display
EMERG HYD PUMP operating handle socket Pilot’s floorboard, adjacent to the center pedestal
AUX HYD LO LEVEL annunciator MWS main panel
Auxiliary reservoir contents level indicator tube Visible from nose gear bay
FLUID STORAGE
The fluid supply for the auxiliary system is contained in a 6.01 U.S. pints (2.84 liter) reservoir located
adjacent to the nose gear bay.
A float switch in the reservoir is connected to an AUX HYD LO LEVEL annunciator. The annunciator
will illuminate when approximately 0.6 U.S. pint (0.28 liter) of fluid has been drawn out of the reservoir.
A full reservoir provides sufficient fluid for at least one emergency lowering of the landing gear, and
followed by at least one extension of the flaps to the landing position.
OPERATION
Selection of the auxiliary system is by pulling the red-handled AUX HYD SYSTEM PULL selector
handle.
Prior to selection, the system valves are set for normal main hydraulic system operation, i.e:
• On/off valve - open to relieve fluid seepage from the Auxiliary system.
• Dump valve - set to connect Main system pressure and system return to the main and nose gear
lines.
• Shuttle valves - With no pressure in the auxiliary system, the shuttle valves close the auxiliary
system supply ports on the landing gear jacks, allowing main system pressure to operate the
jacks.
With the lever in the normal position, a baulk prevents operation of the auxiliary system hand pump.
The system is prepared for use by first inserting the rudder gust lock handle into the AUX HYD SYSTEM
hand pump socket and then firmly pulling the red-handled PULL handle. This action operates the
system valves as follows:
• On/off valve - closed to prevent the auxiliary system fluid passing to the return line.
• Dump valve - set to cut-off the main system pressure and remove any main system pressure in
the landing gear path by interconnecting the normal up and down lines of the main and nose gear
jacks to the return line.
Pulling the control lever also releases the baulk and permits operation of the hand pump. The control
lever is held in the selected position by a spring unit.
NOTE: Shortly after the commencement of emergency lowering, hand pump resistance decreases
(when the gear uplocks release) and the AUX HYD LO LEVEL annunciator is illuminated.
Selection of the flaps and operation of the hand pump will move the flaps to the required position.
Figure 5
Operation of Auxiliary Hydraulic System Selector Handle
NOTES:
1. With the main system pressurized normally, the setting of the AUX HYD SYSTEM PULL
control lever has no effect on flaps operation.
2. If a selection is made to demonstrate or exercise the auxiliary system, operation of the
flaps will be from the main system.
To reset the system, first make sure the LANDING GEAR selector lever is in the down position, then
push the AUX HYD SYSTEM PULL lever fully in. This action opens the on/off valve to vent fluid
pressure in the auxiliary system lines to the return. The shuttle valves move back to connect the main
system to the down side of the gear jacks.
With the on/off valve open the check valve prevents normal pressure from the main system return line
draining the auxiliary reservoir and the baulk is repositioned by the spring unit to prevent movement of
the hand pump socket.
The aileron, elevator and rudder are primary controls operated manually by cable-activated circuits from
dual ram’s-horn type control columns and adjustable rudder pedals.
Trim tabs are installed on the rudder, elevator and left aileron. The elevator trim tab may also be
operated by a servo motor which is controlled by the pilot using the electric trim switches or by the
autopilot and mach trim system.
The airbrakes, powered by the main hydraulic system, are selected by the AIRBRAKE selector lever,
which is labelled SHUT and OPEN with an infinite selection of intermediate positions. A third position,
labelled DUMP, is available after lifting the selector lever through a baulk at the OPEN position.
Wing flaps, which are hydraulically powered, are installed at the wing trailing edge. Labelled selection
positions are 0° (UP), 15°, 25° and 45° (FULLY DOWN). A lift dump position at 75° is available via the
airbrake DUMP selection.
Emergency lowering is available via the auxiliary hydraulic system. A flap position indication is displayed
on the Copilot’s Multifunction Display (MFD). A rudder bias system, powered by engine bleed air,
automatically applies opposite rudder to counteract the effect of asymmetric thrust resulting from a
single engine failure. A stall warning (stick shake) and identification system (stick push) is also provided.
(Refer to Sub-section 7 STALL WARNING/IDENTIFICATION)
Internal gust locks are provided to lock the control surfaces when the airplane is parked or moored. The
internal gust locks are also linked to a throttle baulk which prevents both throttles being advanced
beyond 60% N1 when the gust locks are engaged. A single throttle can be advanced to full power, but
the other throttle is then baulked at 55-60% N1. The gust locks are rated for wind gusts of up to 80 knots.
PRIMARY CONTROLS
A connecting rod interconnects the levers of each column. The left column lever is also connected to a
pulley drum. From the pulley drum a combination of cables and tie-rods operate a pulley in each wing,
which are connected to the aileron by levers and links. Each aileron control surface has a mass balance
weight installed to prevent flutter and a horn balance to reduce the aerodynamic loads felt by the pilot.
Primary stops, located at the left and right aileron inboard hinges, limit the aileron range of movement.
The stop bolt in the aileron hinge contacts a fixed stop in the wing structure and limits the upward
movement of the aileron.
Downward movement of the aileron is halted when the primary stop of the opposite aileron takes effect.
Secondary stops are located at the bottom of each control column.
Figure 1
Aileron Control System
The trim actuator is connected by a cable system to a trim handwheel mounted on the center control
pedestal, immediately below the rudder trim handwheel.
RUDDER TRIM
Center Control Pedestal
Top View
AILERON TRIM
• Both engine thrust levers are advanced to more than approximately 60% N1 power.
Movement of the rudder pedals is transmitted by connecting rods and a bell crank to a pulley drum
under the flight compartment floor. Cables transmit the movement of the pulley drum to a quadrant
installed at the bottom of the rudder torque tube. A spring strut connected to the lower portion of the
rudder torque tube provides a centering force at the extreme travel. An autopilot servo motor is also
connected to the base of the torque tube.
Primary stops are located at the rudder lower hinge to determine the range of movement in both
directions. Secondary stops are located at each rudder pedal assembly.
Figure 2
Rudder Control System
Figure 3
Rudder Trim System
RUDDER TRIM
Center Control Pedestal
Top View
AILERON TRIM
The engine bleed air system is interconnected to the struts in such a manner that each engine supplies
air to opposing sides of the strut pistons with a solenoid valve installed in each strut.
The solenoid valves are normally in the closed position when the RUDDER BIAS selector switches (A
and B) are set to their ON positions. Accidental operation of the switches is prevented by a guard on
each switch.
Should a leak occur in one supply line to a strut, the resulting loss of air would create an imbalance of
forces which would bias the rudder to one side.
The rudder bias switches are located in the upper left area of the center control pedestal immediately
above the elevator trim mechanical indication.
Selecting the RUDDER BIAS switch on the affected side to OFF, equalizes the pressures on both sides
of the strut. The strut on the good side then maintains a balance of forces on the rudder.
An amber MWS warning, RUDDER BIAS illuminates when either RUDDER BIAS switch (A or B) is set
to the OFF position.
Fuel
OAT Temp
PUSH Switch
OFF
(Switches shown with guard open)
Electric Heating
An electric heater muff on each strut makes sure ice will not prevent operation of the strut or solenoid
valve. Each muff has two elements which are supplied separately from the L and R PITOT/VANE HEAT
switches on the overhead roof panel. Each switch controls the power supply to one heating element of
each strut.
Pitot Vane
Busbar Circuit Breaker
Switch
Left PS1 RUD BIAS HEAT LH > DA-D E/8
Right PS2 RUD BIAS HEAT RH > DA-D F/8
OFF
Figure 4
Rudder Bias System
A stick shaker motor is attached to each control column and is operated by the stall warning system. A
stick pusher unit is connected to the elevator cable system to provide a positive push forward (pitch
down) at the onset of stall identification. The cable circuit also provides an input for the autopilot servo
unit.
Primary stops controlling the range of elevator movement are located on the middle hinge of each
control surface. Secondary stops are located at the pulley drums under the flight compartment floor.
Figure 5
Elevator Control System
Operation of the elevator moves the trim tab to give servo action. The autopilot servo motor is used to
provide pitch trim, mach trim and electric trim functions. The pitch trim and electric trim functions are
described more extensively in Sub-section 17 AVIONICS.
If necessary these functions can be overridden by arresting the movement of the elevator trim
handwheel, which turns as the automatic system applies trim via the servo.
ELEVATOR
TRIM
Elevator Trim Handwheel
NOSE DOWN
35
T.O.
C.G.% 25
15
• Both engine thrust levers are advanced to more than approximately 60% N1.
ELEV/AIL
MWS Panel Annunciator
TRIM
Figure 6
Elevator Trim System
Mach Trim
The Mach trim system is incorporated into the Integrated Avionics Processor System (IAPS) and uses
the same pitch trim servomotor as the manual electric trim and the auto electric trim systems. The Mach
trim system receives Mach number data from the air data computers and computes trim tab deflection
to increase longitudinal stability at Mach numbers above 0.75 Mach when the autopilot is not engaged.
Faults which render the system inoperative (fail passive) will result in a warning given by the MACH
TRIM FAIL annunciator coming on at the top right of the MWS panel.
NOTE: During initial airplane power up, the MACH TRIM FAIL annunciator may illuminate until the
autopilot system is engaged and disengaged. If the MACH TRIM FAIL annunciator does not
extinguish, there is a fault within the Mach Trim system.
FLAP SYSTEM
Interconnected slotted flaps are hydraulically powered from a single flap control unit and transmission
shafting. The flap control unit is normally supplied from the main hydraulic system but an independent
fluid supply from the auxiliary hydraulic system is available in the event of a main system failure.
The motor drives the transmission shafting to move the flaps in the selected direction. The motor is
stopped automatically should a control cable failure occur.
When the flaps reach the selected position, the hydraulic pressure is removed from the motor. Further
movement of the flaps is arrested and they are locked at the required angle. Friction devices prevent
the flaps moving away from the selected position in the event of hydraulic failure.
A synchronizing cable circuit is provided to prevent the occurrence of an asymmetric flap condition and
should one flap cease to move, the synchronizing circuit isolates the hydraulic supply to the flap motor,
the flaps stop moving and maintain the position attained at the moment of failure.
A flap servo baulk stops additional movement of the flap control unit input lever from the landing
position. The baulk is released and the lever moved to the lift dump position by an interconnection with
the airbrake control, when this is moved into the lift dump position.
Figure 7
Flap Control System
Pilot
Pilot’sInstrument
InstrumentPanel
Panel Co-pilot’s InstrumentPanel
Copilot Instrument Panel
M6920_0
HA00C
016562AA
A mechanical indication located adjacent to the thrust levers show the position of the flap selector lever
and the flap positions are marked against the corresponding gates of the slot in which the lever moves.
A warning horn sounds if the flaps are selected to the 25° or 45° positions when the landing gear is not
locked down. The flaps are controlled by a selector lever located on the right side of the center control
pedestal. The lever moves in a gated slot which corresponds with the following flap positions:
• 0° ............... UP
FLAPS
Mechanical
• 15° ............TAKE-OFF 0° Position Indication
25°
45°
Selector Lever
F
L
A
P
S
0°
15°
25°
45°
Power Supplies
The flap position indication is powered from PS1(a) busbar via circuit breaker FLAP POS (M/7) on panel
DA-D. The warning horn is powered from PE(a) busbar via circuit breaker HORN (K/1) on panel DA-D.
Emergency Operation
The flaps may be operated by means of the auxiliary hydraulic system. Using the auxiliary system the
flaps can be lowered to any pre-set position from 0° to 45°. Lift dump and airbrakes are not available.
The emergency flap selection is made using the normal flap control lever. Position indication is still
available as long as PS1(a) busbar is energized.
Control of the airbrakes is by means of an AIRBRAKE selector lever located on the center control
pedestal, immediately left of the thrust levers. The selector lever moves in a slot, which has a scale
marked with three positions of SHUT, OPEN and DUMP. The normal (flight and ground) operating range
is from the SHUT to the fully OPEN selections while intermediate positions are obtained by leaving the
selector lever at the required setting within the range.
AIR BRAKE
B
R
A
K HORN
ISOLATE
E
1 2
OPEN
Thrust Levers
Figure 8
Airbrake Control System
A system of cables run from the AIRBRAKE selector lever to a hydraulic selector valve mounted on each
airbrake actuator. Main hydraulic system pressure is utilized to operate the airbrakes through a
hydraulic actuator in each wing. To allow for control system failure, the selector valve is biased to the
SHUT position.
NOTE: There is no service available from the auxiliary hydraulic system for the airbrakes should the
main hydraulic system fail.
During the landing run, and the flaps selected to the 45° (Land) position, lifting the AIRBRAKE selector
and then moving it rearwards into the DUMP position automatically lowers the flaps from the 45° setting
to 75°, and also opens the airbrakes further to provide maximum drag.
AIRBRAKE
AIR BRAKE MWS Panel Annunciator
Power Supplies
The AIR BRAKE annunciator is powered from PS2(a) busbar via circuit breaker AIRBRAKE (L/2) on
panel DA-D.
• A third sensing channel, which utilizes pitot pressure from the right pitot head, static pressure from
the forward static plates and stall vent pressure from the left and right stall vents.
SYSTEM LOGIC
1. It is impossible for a stick push to occur before a stall warning (stick shake).
2. No single active fault of an SSU or relay can cause the operation of a stall valve or the associated
red STALL VALVE annunciator.
3. The autopilot is disengaged when a stall warning signal is initiated. This prevents the autopilot from
attempting to counteract the resulting stick shake operation or a subsequent stick push.
Three STALL switches are located in the TEST section of the overhead roof panel. Anti-icing heating of
the airflow sensor vanes is controlled from the PITOT/VANE HEAT switches.
Indication of failure of the vane heaters is provided by the two amber L and R VANE HTR FAIL
annunciators also located on the overhead roof panel and by the ICE PROT repeat annunciator on the
MWS panel.
There are no control switches, the stall warning part of the system becomes armed on takeoff
(no weight-on-wheels), while the stall identification part of the system becomes armed 6 seconds after
takeoff.
Angle of attack is derived from two electrically heated airflow angle sensor vanes mounted one on each
side of the forward fuselage. Electrical signals proportional to vane angle are sensed in the associated
Signal Sensor Unit which also receives inputs relating to flap angle. From the flap angle signal, the SSU
calculates the point of stall warning. When the vane angle corresponds to that point the SSU provides
an output to operate the stick shaker motor on each control column.
The stall warning system is inhibited while the airplane is on the ground with weight-on-wheels to
prevent wind gusts triggering false stick shaker operations. At takeoff, the system is armed and begins
monitoring the pitch attitude of the airplane.
Control of the hydraulic pressure to the stick pusher is via two independent stall valves (A and B),
connected in series and mounted integral with the stick pusher. Both stall valves must be open to
activate the unit.
STALL STALL
VLV A VLV B
OPEN OPEN M6950_0
HA00C
017045AA.AI
Figure 1
Stall Valve Annunciators
The output from one SSU energizes one stall valve, and an associated red STALL VLV (A or B) OPEN
annunciator is illuminated to indicate that the valve is being signalled to open (reference Figure 1).
The SSU uses the vane sensor and flap angle inputs to calculate the point of stall. The rate of increase
of vane angle may also modify the calculation, i.e. the point of stall being advanced when the rate of
increase is high dynamic stall (reference Figure 2).
When the vane angle agrees with the calculated point of stall, the SSU produces an output
(stall identification) to energize the associated stall valve and annunciator.
When a SSU produces a stall warning output, which is then followed by an identification signal, the
warning signal latches the stall identification relay for the same channel (reference Figure 3). A warning
signal from either channel will disconnect the autopilot and operate the stick shaker. The latch is
removed when the warning output ceases. This makes sure the stick push is maintained until the
airplane has reached a nose-down attitude well below the stall point.
28
FLAP 0° IDENT
26
FLAP > 0° IDENT
VANE ANGLE to HFD (Degrees)
24
FLAP 0° WARN
20
FLAP 45° WARN
18
16
14
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
VANE RATE - DEGREES/SECOND
Figure 2
Variation of Stall Identification Angle with Rate of Increase of Vane Angle
These pressures are sensed by a capsule operated stall detector, which is set to produce an output at
a point between the settings for the stall warning and identification signals from the SSUs.
The output from the third channel sensor energizes a relay which connects the stall identification output
from one channel’s SSU to the stall valve of the other channel. Thus, with the third channel output
activated, both stall valves A and B will open following a stall identification output from only one SSU,
thereby ensuring system integrity should a SSU fail.
HYDRAULIC
PRESSURE
SSU
VANE I WARN
ANGLE N
SENSOR P
U STALL
IDENT VALVE A
T PITOT
3rd CHANNEL PRESSURE
STALL VENT
STICK PUSHER
Figure 3
Stall Warning and Identification
Right Forward
Left Forward Static Vent Plate
S6
Static Vent Plate 6
Stall Ident
(Autopilot Disconnected)
V Right
Pitot
Stall
Detector P Head
S
P2
Pitot
Isolation
Valve
V
Stall
Detector P
P2
S
Stall Ident
3rd Channel
Left Right
Stall S6 Stall
Vent Vent
V1 V2
LEGEND
= Pitot Pressure = Pitot Drain
= Static Pressure = Static Drain
= Stall Vent Pressure = Stall Vent Drain
Figure 4
Stall System Pitot Static Block Diagram
Pilot’s Operating Manual Sub-section 7 Page 7-7
Revision A2: Nov, 2004 STALL WARNING/IDENTIFICATION
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM FAULTS and ANNUNCIATIONS
The duplication of the stall warning system makes sure a single passive fault cannot prevent a stick
shake occurring. Should an active fault develop, the faulty system can be isolated via the appropriate
circuit breaker.
The remaining good system will still operate both stick shaker motors. The stall identification system is
designed that a single active fault cannot give an inadvertent stick push, while making sure a single
passive fault would not prevent a push operation occurring, when required.
All annunciator warnings in the stall warning and identification system will also cause a repeater STALL
IDENT annunciator on the MWS panel to illuminate (reference Figure 5). The power to energize a stall
valve is routed via the identification relay of one channel and the warning relay of the other channel.
A monitoring circuit will cause an IDENT 1 or IDENT 2 annunciator (depending on the channel at fault)
to be illuminated after a 4 second time delay, if an identification signal from one SSU has been triggered
without a warning signal from the other SSU.
The IDENT 1 or IDENT 2 annunciators are part of the IDENT/INHIB switches provided for both pilots.
When an IDENT annunciator illuminates, either pilot can push the associated switch to inhibit the faulty
channel. The INHIB annunciator part of the switch will then illuminate. The third channel sensor,
together with the remaining SSU would provide a stick push operation when required.
MWS Panel
M6949_0
HA00C
017044AA.AI
Figure 5
System Fault Annunciators
The pilots may attempt to reset the failed channel by operating an INHIBIT RESET switch located on
the stall diagnostic panel (forward side of the Pilot’s bulkhead).
Should the channel fail again after reset, it should be inhibited and left in that condition for the remainder
of the flight.
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS ASYMMETRY
If asymmetry between the positions of the left and right weight-on-wheels relays exists for more than 4
seconds, then a SQUAT annunciator (Copilot’s group only) will illuminate.
If any of the above occur, an external relay causes a SSU annunciator to illuminate. If the weight-on-
wheels switch is in the flight condition, a magnetic indicator associated with the faulty SSU will display
white. The magnetic indicators are located on the stall identification diagnostic panel.
Stall identification
IDENT 1 (2) (3) IDENT #
channel 1 (2) (3) fault
STALL
IDENT
Signal Summing Unit fault SSU SSU
Weight-On-Wheels
SQUAT SQUAT
asymmetry
STALL
STALL VLV
Stall valve A (B) operating VLV #
A (B) OPEN
OPEN
ANGLE PREVENTIVE
NO
OF ATTACK ACTION TAKEN
INCREASING? BY PILOT
STALL VALVE A STALL VALVE B
AND
OPEN OPEN
YES
Figure 6
Stall System Flow Logic
The airplane has a hydraulically-powered retractable landing gear incorporating nitrogen charged shock
absorber struts and nose wheel steering. Each main gear has two wheels and retracts inboard into
wheel wells in the fuselage. Each main wheel well has a fairing attached to the landing gear and a
hydraulically-operated door.
The nose gear has two wheels which retract forward into a bay with hinged doors and a fairing on the
landing gear.
Hydraulic pressure is supplied from the main hydraulic system for the normal lowering and retraction of
the gear. An auxiliary hydraulic system is provided for lowering the gear should the main hydraulic
system or landing gear selection controls fail.
The gear position annunciators are located in a pyramid cluster on the center instrument panel to the
right of the master warning system panel.
GEAR POSITIONS
NOTE: The red GEAR annunciators are also illuminated when the gear selector lever is not in the
down position with landing gear locked down.
Gear Unlocked
• Red annunciators illuminated
Gear Locked Up
• Both green and red annunciators extinguished
N GEAR
N GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
Main Gear
Standby main gear downlock indication is provided by an independent circuit connected to green
L GEAR and R GEAR annunciators located on the right side console.
L GEAR R GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
Nose Gear
As the nose gear locks down, a mechanical post indicator extends from the top left of the center control
pedestal.
Fuel
OAT Temp
PUSH Switch
Nose Gear
Mechanical
Post Indicator A RUDDER BIAS B
The warning horn will also sound if the gear is not locked down and either thrust lever is closed to obtain
between 60% and 70% N1 RPM (nominal) with IAS below 150 kts. In this case, the warning horn can
be cancelled by a switch on the forward side of the LH thrust lever. The audible warning is repeated if
the second thrust lever is closed after a previous warning has been cancelled and not reinstated. The
warning horn system resets when IAS is greater than 160 kts.
PE BUSBAR
GEAR
WARN
CTL
LEFT THRUST LEVER < 70%N1, > 60% N1
HORN
When the airplane is on the ground, a solenoid-operated pawl engages to lock the landing gear selector
in the down position. At take-off, when the airplane weight comes off the wheels, the solenoid operates
to withdraw the pawl allowing the selector lever to be moved away from the LANDING GEAR DOWN
position. The pawl re-engages when the airplane lands.
The airplane has a LANDING GEAR BAULK OVRD PUSH button located next to the LANDING GEAR
selector lever. If the Baulk fails to disengage when the airplane is airborne, pushing the button
disengages the pawl. While the push button is pushed the landing gear selector can be moved to the
up position.
CAUTION: THE LANDING GEAR BAULK OVRD CONTROL COULD BE OPERATED WHEN THE
AIRPLANE IS ON THE GROUND. A WARNING THAT THE LANDING GEAR SELECTOR IS
NOT IN THE DOWN POSITION IS PROVIDED BY ALL RED AND GREEN GEAR POSITION
ANNUNCIATORS BEING ILLUMINATED AT THE SAME TIME.
CENTER
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
Figure 1
Landing Gear Selector and Baulk Override
With the weight of the airplane off the wheels, selecting LANDING GEAR up allows main hydraulic
system pressure into the gear up pipelines. This pressure operates hydraulic jacks, one on each main
gear, and one on the nose gear. Additionally, main pressure is routed via sequence valves and reversing
valves to operate the two main gear wheel well door actuators.
Subsequent LANDING GEAR down selection diverts main hydraulic system pressure to the gear down
pipelines.
• Main gear wheel well doors shut but do not lock up.
Main system pressure is dumped when the auxiliary hydraulic system is used to lower the landing gear.
In this case, the wheel well doors are pushed open by the extending main gear and remain open with
the gear locked down.
DOOR DOOR
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
SEQUENCE SEQUENCE
VALVE VALVE
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM SHUTTLE NOSE SYSTEM
VALVE GEAR SHUTTLE
ACTUATOR VALVE
AUXILIARY
NOTE: For Auxiliary Hydraulic System, HYDRAULIC
See Figure 6. SYSTEM
Figure 2
Landing Gear Hydraulic System
Each main oleo-pneumatic leg retracts inwards into a wheel well in the wing. The well is covered with
the gear up by a fairing hinged to the wing, and linked to the gear. Additional fairing is provided by a
wheel well door, hydraulically-actuated to shut when the gear locks up.
When the gear is selected down, the door opens until the gear locks down, then closes to cover the well.
Each main gear is stabilized in the down position by a side stay located between the leg and the main
wing structure. The side stay also forms the main locking component in both the extended and retracted
positions.
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS SWITCHES
Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) microswitch clusters are installed on the left and right gear. These switches
provide control function to various circuits when the airplane is airborne or on the ground.
The self-centering nose landing gear retracts forward, and is faired in the up and down positions by two
doors hinged to the nose structure and attached to the retracting mechanism. A small fairing attached
to the rear of the landing gear completes the closure of the bay when the gear is retracted.
The oleo-pneumatic leg is attached to a fitting on each side of the nose gear bay, and is stabilized in
the down position by a drag stay which also forms the main locking component in both the extended
and retracted positions. A spring strut maintains the drag strut in the locked position.
The nose gear leg incorporates an attachment for towing purposes. When this attachment is used, the
steering must be disconnected. A steering disconnect pin is located immediately under the towing pin
hole.
Access to the release strut when the doors are closed is via an aperture between the rear of the doors
and the gear leg. The strut assembly consists of a lower and upper strut. To latch the doors closed, the
upper strut telescopes into the lower and is retained by a hook engaging a pin. The hook is pivoted on
and off the pin by a lever which is retained in the closed position by a spring-loaded latch.
When the lever is open, or not latched closed, a microswitch illuminates the N GEAR red annunciator
to indicate the doors are either open or not correctly latched.
N GEAR
N GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
INDICATION OF NOSE GEAR DOORS
M6951_0
OPEN OR UNLATCHED HA00C
017046AA.AI
HYDRAULIC RETRACTION
ACTUATOR
DOOR
ACTUATOR
Figure 3
Main Landing Gear
HYDRAULIC
RETRACTION
ACTUATOR
STEERING
ACTUATOR
Figure 4
Nose Landing Gear
Figure 5
Nose Gear Doors Release Strut
POWER SUPPLIES
DC power distribution is as follows:
PE Busbar
Normal landing gear position annunciators (6)
PS1 Busbar
Landing gear lever lock solenoid
PS2 Busbar
Standby landing gear downlock annunciators (2)
The auxiliary hydraulic system is selected by pulling the AUX HYD SYSTEM handle. This action dumps
any pressure in the normal landing gear system lines to the reservoir and isolates the auxiliary system
from the main system return line.
It is not necessary to select the gear down in order to lower it. Operating the auxiliary system hand pump
directs hydraulic fluid to the gear actuators via lines independent of the normal extension circuit.
LOWERING SEQUENCE
• The nose gear uplock is released, the nose bay doors open and the gear extends.
• The main gear uplocks are released, the wheel well doors are unlocked and the main gear extends
pushing the doors open.
• As the nose gear locks down, the mechanical linkage closes the nose bay doors.
• When the main gear has locked down, the wheel well doors are left open.
Although it is not necessary to select the gear down when using the auxiliary system, it is recommended
to do so after the gear has locked down, to avoid the possibility of a subsequent retraction of the gear
when the airplane is on the ground. Selecting the gear down will also cancel the gear red annunciations.
The annunciations presented below are illuminated when the gear has been lowered via the auxiliary
system, but the selector lever has not been moved to the down position.
N GEAR
N GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
INDICATION OF NOSE GEAR DOORS
M6951_0
OPEN OR UNLATCHED HA00C
017046AA.AI
MWS PANEL
AUX HYD
LO LEVEL LANDING
GEAR
ON/OFF VALVE SELECTOR
LEVEL DUMP
INDICATOR VALVE
RESERVOIR
FILTER
FLAP CONTROL
UNIT
MAIN
SYSTEM
SHUTTLE
VALVE
NOSE
GEAR
ACTUATOR
SHUTTLE
VALVES
KEY MAIN
GEAR
AUXILIARY ACTUATORS
SYSTEM
MAIN
SYSTEM
SUCTION
Figure 6
Auxiliary Hydraulic System
Item Location
BRAKES (2) and SUPPLY combined hydraulic pressure Center instrument panel below the
indicator (Figure 8) MWS panel
MAIN WHEELS
The main landing gears each have two identical wheels with tubeless tires. Each wheel contains a
fusible plug which releases air from the tire in the event of excessive wheel heat.
Each pair of wheels is mounted on a staggered stub axle so that the outer wheel is slightly forward of
the inner wheel. During retraction, the gear twists to bring the inner wheel directly over the outer wheel.
This action permits the wheels to be stowed in a wheel well of the smallest possible size.
NOSE WHEELS
The nose landing gear has two identical wheels with tubeless tires rotating on a common axle.
WHEEL BRAKES
Normal System Operation
Main hydraulic system power is used to operate calliper-type disc brakes via Maxaret anti-skid units.
Master cylinders, operated by toe brake pedals through spring-struts, provide straight line and
differential braking during normal and emergency operation. With the WHEEL BRAKE lever fully
forward, main hydraulic system pressure, backed by the main accumulator, passes to a brake control
valve via a main reducing valve. The control valve, in response to movement of the master cylinders,
directs the related pressure through modulator units and Maxaret units to each brake unit.
An EMERGY position (first rearward notch) is marked in red. The WHEEL BRAKE lever is held in the
emergency position and in progressive parking positions by a pawl engaging into the notched rack. A
push button on the WHEEL BRAKE lever releases the pawl to permit movement of the lever from the
EMERGY or PARK BRAKE positions. The lever can be moved rearwards from NORMAL to EMERGY
without releasing the pawl.
Pressure, supplied by the emergency brake accumulator, is maintained at the brake units by a lever
mechanism which operates the brake control valve. A spring strut, initially loaded by the rearward
movement of the WHEEL BRAKE lever, operates to reset the control valve when the WHEEL BRAKE
lever is released to the NORMAL or EMERGY position.
Figure 7
Wheel Brake Lever
The BRAKE indications are electrically operated from pressure transmitters connected into the normal
supply lines to the brake units. The indicator also provides the main hydraulic system SUPPLY pressure
(lower indication).
BRAKE
PSI x 1000
2 2
1 1 EMERG
0
OFF
0 L R WHEEL
OFF
4
BRAKE
SUPPLY 0
3 1
2
Figure 8
Combined Hydraulic Pressure Indicator and Emergency Wheel Brake Annunciators
With the emergency system selected, the BRAKE indications continue to show normal system
pressure to the brakes (provided there is still pressure in this system) but do not show emergency
system braking pressure. WHEEL BRAKE EMERG annunciators with the legends L and R are provided
to the right of the combined indicator and provide an indication of applied pressure to each brake unit.
Each annunciator is controlled by a pressure switch connected into the emergency supply line to the
related brake unit. During brake pedal operation, the white annunciators are illuminated when the
applied pressure reaches 1000 psi and remain on until the pressure is released to below this value.
The WHEEL BRAKE EMERG annunciators also act as a reminder that the anti-skid facility is isolated
and that braking is direct.
PE Busbar
WHEEL BRAKE EMERG annunciators
PS1 Busbar
BRAKES applied pressure indicators
CAUTION: A STEERING DISCONNECT PIN MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE TOWING THE AIRPLANE.
(Refer to Section 6, Sub-section 1 - GROUND HANDLING)
OPERATION
Hydraulic pressure is provided from the main hydraulic system for operation of the nose wheel steering.
CAUTION: NOSE WHEEL STEERING IS NOT AVAILABLE WHEN THE MAIN HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS
LESS THAN 2300 PSI. THE AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CANNOT POWER THE
STEERING SYSTEM.
When the nose gear is locked down, nose wheel steering is available through a range of 45° left and
right of the center line. Steering is controlled from a handwheel located on the left-side console.
Rotation of the handwheel operates the selector valve input via cables and linkage. Movement of the
selector valve directs hydraulic pressure to either extend or retract the steering actuator. The nose gear
is turned in the required direction by the steering actuator.
When the required degree of turn has been reached, feedback through linkage connected to the
landing gear moves the selector valve input to a neutral position. The nose gear stops turning and the
selected angle is maintained. A steering on/off valve is operated by the nose gear mechanical
indication linkage. The on/off valve is only selected on when the nose gear is locked down. After lift-off
the nose gear is centered by the action of cams in the oleo strut.
The reason the handwheel must be free from obstruction during gear lowering is that the geometry of
the linkage from the handwheel to the selector valve causes the handwheel to rotate while the gear is
lowering or retracting. The handwheel must be free to turn and to find its neutral position again prior to
the gear locking down.
When the steering on/off valve is selected off, the steering actuator is isolated from the main hydraulic
pressure for the purpose of preventing the gear being turned and striking the wheel bay.
Figure 9
Nose Gear Steering System
The airplane utilizes both DC and AC systems with emergency systems available for certain instrument
and avionics requirements. The 28 VDC system uses a tied-busbar powered from engine driven starter/
generators and backed-up by batteries. A third starter/generator driven from the Auxiliary Power Unit (if
installed) is also available.
Power from the engine-driven generators and the APU generator is distributed by two essential busbar
systems, PS1 and PS2. In normal flight conditions the two PS busbars are tied in parallel by a bus tie
controlled by a BUS TIE switch, selected to CLOSE. Each generator circuit contains a voltage regulator
which stabilizes the busbars at 28 ± 0.75 VDC. With a generator on line, selecting the BUS TIE switch
to CLOSE connects the two PS busbars in parallel. A start busbar links the start power source (either
the ground supply contactor or the internal start contactor) with the individual engine 1 and 2 start
contactor or the APU start contactor. AC power is supplied through two systems, one using inverters,
the other engine driven alternators.
EXTERNAL POWER
A standard three pin 28 VDC external power receptacle is located at the right rear fuselage. For external
starts, a ground power unit capable of supplying 28 VDC with a minimum output of 42 kW (short term
capability of 28 VDC x 1500 AMPS) and having a limiter operating at 1100 AMPS must be used.
Overhead Roof Panel
EXT PWR
ON
OFF
External power is connected to the airplane busbars through a ground power contactor. Contactor
operation is controlled by the EXT PWR switch supplied from the third pin of the external power
receptacle. With external power available and the EXT PWR switch ON and the EXT BATT CHG switch
OFF, the No. 1 and No. 2 batteries are disconnected from the busbars. Selecting the BATT switch to ON
has no effect.
THE VESTIBULE ROOF LIGHT AND THE ENTRY LIGHT ARE CONNECTED VIA THEIR
SWITCHES DIRECTLY TO NO. 1 BATTERY AND WILL COME ON IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
POSITION OF THE EXT PWR, EXT BATT CHG OR BATT SWITCHES.
With the EXT BATT CHG switch ON, each battery is connected to its associated busbar (PS1 and PS2)
and charged from the external power supply. The external power cannot be paralleled with the airplane
generators.
BATTERY SUPPLIES
Two 24 VDC, 28 ampere-hour sealed lead acid main batteries, No. 1 and No. 2, are located in the rear
equipment bay. These batteries provide internal power for engine starting and also maintain essential
services in the event of a double generator failure.
NOTE: When the correct emergency drill is carried out together with prompt shedding of non-
essential loads, the batteries can maintain essential services for a minimum of 60 minutes.
In addition to the main battery supplies, three 24 VDC 4 ampere-hour sealed lead acid batteries Nos.
3, 4 and 5 are located in the rear equipment bay. These batteries provide electrical power for the
emergency lighting and essential services during emergency conditions.
Also, one 24 VDC 4 ampere-hour sealed lead acid battery No. 6 is located in the avionics shelf of the
aft cabin. This battery provides electrical power to the Electronic Standby Instrument System (ESIS) in
the event of a double generator failure and the output of the PE busbar being less than 21 VDC.
AMMETERS
Two ammeters are provided in the flight compartment on the overhead roof panel and provide generator
load and battery charge current. Display selection is by operation of push switches labelled AMPS BATT
and 0-40, located between the ammeters. The scale of 0-450A has a yellow segment from 300 to 400A,
and a red segment from 400 to 450A. Each ammeter normally indicates its related generator load.
When the AMPS BATT switch is operated, the battery charge currents are displayed.
If a low charge current (below 40A) cannot easily be read, the 0-40 push switch may also be operated
to select an ammeter range of 0-40A. Release of both switches will revert the ammeter displays to their
respective generator loads on the 0-450A scales.
140-590032-0007
ENG 2
ENG 1
OPERATING
Figure 1
SHUNT CONTACTOR ABORT CONTACTOR SHUNT
1 INT START 2
CONTACTOR
ELECTRICAL POWER
BATT 1 BATT 2
PE BUSBAR
Page 9-5
Pilot’s Operating Manual
VOLTMETER
A 0-40V voltmeter and selector switches are provided in the flight compartment on the overhead roof
panel. The voltmeter scale has a red segment between 32V and 40V. The voltmeter may display, by
selection on the switches, the voltage of the batteries (1 thru 6), busbars PE, PS1 or PS2. The positions
on the switches are labelled B1, PS1, PE, PS2, B2, XFER and B3, B4, B5, B6, OFF.
Overhead Roof Panel
DC VOLTS
20
10 30
111
40
v
DC
PE B5
PS1 PS2 B4 B6
B1 B2 B3 OFF
XFER
As a generator comes on-line, the associated battery contactor closes automatically and the charge
begins. The batteries may also be charged from an external power source by selecting the EXT BATT
CHG switch to ON.
Rates of charges should be monitored on the generator ammeters during external charging and when
the charge rate drops to less than 5 AMPS the EXT BATT CHG switch should be selected OFF.
During external charging, if the power supply voltage rises or falls beyond preset limits, the charging will
automatically terminate.
OFF
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
ENG 1 ENG 2
No. 1 No. 2 APU
STARTER STARTER STARTER
OPERATING OPERATING GEN
GEN GEN
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
CNTCTR BATT 1 BATT 2 CNTCTR
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 2
Ground Power Connected with External Battery Charge Switch ON
140-590032-0007 Section III Sub-section 9 Page 9-7
Revision A4: Sep, 2010 ELECTRICAL POWER
Pilot’s Operating Manual
BATT EMERG-ON-OFF switch
With no generators or external power supplying the busbars, selection of the BATT switch to ON will
connect both batteries in parallel to busbar PE via the emergency contactors.
When any generator comes on-line both emergency contactors remain closed. The generator fed PS
busbar is connected to its related battery to commence charging, by closure of the associated battery
contactor.
Both batteries may be charged from one generator by selecting the BUS TIE switch momentarily to the
CLOSE position.
EMERG selection energizes both emergency contactors via independent circuits and connects both
batteries to the PE busbar powering the essential services.
BATT
EMERG
ON
BATT 1
CNTCTR
BATT 2 OFF
CNTCTR
Selecting the switch to either BATT 1 or BATT 2 will open the associated battery contactor, to isolate
the battery from its charge source.
The relevant BATT CNTCTR annunciator will illuminate and the ELECT repeater on the MWS will flash.
BATT ISOLATE
BATT 1
BATT 1
NORM
CNTCTR
BATT 2
CNTCTR
BATT 2
BATT 1 or BATT 2 selection - annunciator illuminated and the repeater annunciator flashes
ELECT
MWS panel
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
ENG 2 No. 2
No. 1 ENG 1 APU
STARTER STARTER
STARTER OPERATING
OPERATING GEN GEN
GEN
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
CNTCTR BATT 1 BATT 2 CNTCTR
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS
PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 3
Battery Switch ON
Following an abnormal electrical condition, selecting the BUS TIE switch to OPEN splits the busbar
system into two single-channel busbars.
Overhead Roof Panel
BUS TIE
CLOSE
BUS TIE
OPEN
OPEN selection - annunciator illuminated
OPEN
CLOSE selection - annunciator extinguished
GEN 1 GEN 2
FAIL and/or FAIL
GEN 1 GEN 2
CLOSE CLOSE
TRIP TRIP
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
ENG 2 No. 2
No. 1 ENG 1 APU
STARTER STARTER
STARTER OPERATING
OPERATING GEN GEN
GEN
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS
PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 4
Normal Flight Conditions
Selecting the EXT PWR switch to ON with a suitable external power supply unit will energize all busbars
including the start busbar providing that internal start power has not been previously selected.
Operation of the START PWR push switch illuminates the PWR ON/PUSH FOR ABORT annunciator
and brings the start circuit to a state of readiness for ENGINE START switch selection. This push switch
operation also inhibits an internal start.
A warning horn will sound if the switch is operated and the LANDING GEAR selector is not in the down
position.
Overhead Roof Panel
ENGINE START
START
ENG 1 PWR ENG 2
PWR ON
OPERATING PUSH FOR OPERATING
ABORT
NOTES:
1. No. 1 avionics and other essential loads should only be used prior to engine starting.
2. No. 2 engine is started first and then its generator is used as detailed below.
At ENGINE START switch operation (ENG 1 or 2) the Generator Control Unit (GCU) initiates the start
cycle. Illumination of the OPERATING annunciator indicates completion of the start hold-on circuit,
allowing release of the ENGINE START switch.
With the start busbar connected to the starter/generator, the engine motors. When N2 RPM reaches
10% or more and N1 is indicating, the HP cock is selected open to supply fuel to the engine and also
energizes the igniter unit through the HP cock microswitch.
As the engine reaches self sustaining speed, the GCU initiates a start cut-off sequence. At cut-off, the
OPERATING annunciator extinguishes.
ABORT START
The starting sequence may be aborted at any time by a second operation of the START PWR switch.
This initiates a start cut-off sequence by removing the supply to the GCU and extinguishes the PWR
ON PUSH FOR ABORT and OPERATING annunciators.
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
CNTCTR BATT 1 BATT 2 CNTCTR
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 5
Internal Start with No. 2 Engine Selected
Selecting the BATT switch to ON energizes PE busbar and makes the battery power available at the
internal start contactor. Operation of the START PWR energizes the internal start contactors which
connect both batteries to the start busbar and brings the system to a state of readiness for ENGINE
START.
When the START PWR switch is operated the integral PWR ON PUSH FOR ABORT annunciator
illuminates and the generator fed busbars and both batteries are connected to the start busbar.
Pushing either ENGINE START switch (ENG 1 or 2) illuminates the OPERATING annunciator and
busbars PS1 and PS2, with the generator, will be disconnected from the start busbar. The engine starter
is then energized from the batteries.
PWR ON
OPERATING PUSH FOR OPERATING
ABORT
DC POWER GENERATION
Two 28 VDC starter/generators, one driven from each engine, serve as the primary source of power for
the airplane. The generators are self-exciting and each produce a rated power output of 9 kW when the
engine reaches self-sustaining speed. A third starter/generator, driven from the APU (if installed) is also
available. The output voltage of each generator is stabilized by an associated generator control unit
(GCU). The GCUs provide load equalization when the generator outputs are paralleled.
For engine starting, the generator operates as a starter motor powered by a 28 VDC ground supply, or
by the airplane main batteries connected in parallel. At starter cut-off, the generator control unit (GCU)
voltage regulator assumes control of the starter/generator field. Provided the quality of generator output
is satisfactory, an output from the GCU will close the generator line contactor (GLC) connecting the
generator to its associated busbar (PS1 or PS2). When the GLC closes, the related GEN FAIL
annunciator extinguishes.
NOTES:
1. Closure of the GLC is inhibited when busbar voltage is higher than generated voltage
and when EXT POWER is ON.
2. Should the generator have been previously tripped manually, it will require to be
manually reset.
NOTE: An attempt to reinstate an off-line generator can be made using the GEN CLOSE-TRIP
switch.
BATT 1
CNTCTR
BATT 2 XS 1 XS 2
CNTCTR FAIL FAIL
GEN 1 BUS TIE GEN 2 INV 1 STBY INV INV 2
FAIL OPEN FAIL FAIL ON FAIL
ELECT
MWS panel
Selection of the BATT switch to EMERG connects direct supplies from the batteries to the emergency
contactors to make sure they remain energized closed. These supplies also make sure the battery
contactors are opened, should they have failed to do so due to a fault in the automatic circuits. To
achieve the maximum time on battery power, it is necessary that load-shedding is carried out.
Refer to the Pilot Checklist - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES - for DOUBLE GENERATOR FAILURE.
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 6
Single Generator Failure
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
APU START
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 7
Double Generator Failure
The generator driven by the APU is rated at 28 VDC at 250 AMPS. When the APU is running, operating
the APU GEN switch, located on the APU control panel - vestibule panel inner face, to CLOSE and held
for 5 seconds causes the APU generator contactor to close. The electrical output of the APU is
connected to PS2 busbar and selecting the BUS TIE switch to CLOSE also connects the APU output
to PS1.
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
The GCU overvoltage protection circuit operates when the generator terminal voltage rises above 32.5
VDC. This opens the generator field and signals the GLC to open, disconnecting the generator from its
busbar.
- + +
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTACTOR
ENG 1 ENG 2
No. 1 No. 2 APU
STARTER STARTER STARTER
OPERATING OPERATING GEN
GEN GEN
APU START
BATT 1 BATT 2
EMERGENCY CONTACTORS PE 2
PE BUSBAR
Figure 8
APU (if installed) Generator On-Line
The illumination of the XE FAIL annunciator will also result in the red flashing MWS master warning
lamps on the glareshield to operate. The ELECT repeater annunciator will flash when any of the
following annunciators illuminate:
Overhead Roof Panel
ELECT
XS 1 XE XS 2
MWS panel FAIL FAIL FAIL
INV 1 STBY INV INV 2
FAIL ON FAIL
INV 1 STBY INV INV 2
START ARM START
100
80 120
111
60 140
v
AC
B5 XE
XS1 XS2
B4 B6
STOP OFF STOP
B3 OFF
XFER
The AC VOLTS indicator is calibrated to read from 50 to 150 VAC. Its face has a red segment from 50
volts to 100 volts and another red segment from 130 volts to 150 volts.
Voltage on busbars XS 1, XE and XS 2 may be displayed by selection of the associated voltmeter rotary
switch.
• Busbars XE and XS 2 will be supplied from XS 1 via the auto transfer circuit.
• The following annunciators will extinguish: XS 1 FAIL, INV 1 FAIL, XE FAIL and XS 2 FAIL. The
red MWS master warning lamps will also cease to operate.
• The XS 1, INV 1, XS 2 and INV 2 FAIL annunciators will illuminate, together with the ELECT
repeater.
NOTE: If the standby inverter fails while operating, the XE FAIL annunciator will illuminate and the
MWS master warning lamps will flash.
In the event of a single main inverter failure, the remaining main inverter output will be automatically
switched to supply all three busbars. If failure of both main inverters should occur, essential services
supplied from busbar XE will be maintained by the standby inverter.
PS 1 PE PS 2
STALL
VANE
HEAT
XE
XE FAIL
AUTO TRANSFER
XS 1 XS 2
XS 1 XS 2
FAIL FAIL
Figure 8
Inverter System Busbars - Simplified
Each alternator is controlled by an ALTERNATOR 1 or 2 ON/OFF switch located at the top of the ICE
PROTECTION section of the overhead roof panel.
Failure of an alternator is indicated by an ALTR 1 or 2 FAIL annunciator on the overhead roof panel.
Overhead Roof Panel
ALTERNATOR
1 ON 2
OFF
Bleed air is tapped from both engines and conditioned to acceptable temperature levels by an air
conditioning pack incorporating a three-wheel air cycle machine. Conditioned air is ducted to the flight
compartment and passenger cabin to provide ventilation, heating and pressurization. Temperature
levels, set manually, are automatically controlled.
Pneumatic controls automatically maintain required pressurization (cabin altitude) while manual
controls provide emergency selections of air conditioning and pressurization. On the ground,
conditioned air is supplied by the APU (if installed) and the air cycle machine when the main engines
are not running.
MIXING VALVE
The mixing valve regulates HP air (when it is demanded by LP air low pressure) and mixes the HP and
LP air supplies to maintain at the outlet of the valve a minimum pressure of 20 psi and limits the
temperature to approximately 270° C.
The amount of HP air used is dependent on the LP air pressure available. When the LP air pressure
falls to 30 psi, the HP valve is opened but the mixing valve does not mix any HP air into the system until
the LP air pressure falls to 22 psi and below.
The switch selections of CLOSE, LP and OPEN affect the system as follows:
LP
ON
CLOSE
Time delay units are incorporated in the open circuit of the MAVs to prevent an initial surge of air to the
cabin. The No. 1 MAV has a staggered open/delay logic control, and takes approximately 20 seconds
to reach the fully open position. The No. 2 MAV is fast acting but is delayed by 30 seconds before
running fully open in approximately one second.
The air cycle machine (ACM) consists of a three-wheel cold air unit (CAU), and primary and secondary
heat exchangers which are cooled by ram air. Excess water is removed by a water separator at the exit
from the ACM. To enhance the cooling performance this water is ejected back into the ram air flow
above the primary heat exchanger.
Pressure
Switch
Ram Air Inlet Water (Overspeed
injection protection)
Secondary
Heat Exchanger
Figure 1
Air Supply and Distrubution
The No. 1 MAV remains open and the maximum flow to the CAU is restricted by the venturi in the
No. 1 LP bleed duct.
Closure of the No. 2 MAV will be indicated by the MWS panel annunciator, MAIN AIR VLV 2 illumination.
NOTE: The illuminated MAIN AIR VLV 2 annunciator indicates that the position of the main air valve
No. 2 does not agree with the selection made on the MAIN AIR VLV 2 switch.
The closure of No. 2 MAV results in a decrease in system pressure. To avoid cycling of the valve, a latch
circuit maintains the closed signal. The system can be reset by selecting the MAIN AIR VLV 2 switch
to CLOSE, this action causes the MAIN AIR VLV 2 annunciator to extinguish. If the system pressure
has fallen, No. 2 MAV will subsequently open when the switch is selected OPEN.
The primary exchanger is cooled by ram air from an intake at the base of the fin. The cooled air from
the primary heat exchanger enters the CAU compressor, which raises its pressure and temperature
before it is cooled by the secondary heat exchanger. The secondary heat exchanger uses ram air as
the cooling medium.
From the secondary heat exchanger, the air is expanded and cooled through the turbine. The energy
extracted in this process is used to drive the compressor and the fan. The fan is used to draw cooling
air through the ram air system.
At the exit from the turbine, the air temperature is below dewpoint and water is condensed out in the
form of fog. To prevent the formation of ice, the temperature of the air before entry into the water
separator is controlled by the low limit temperature control system. The water separator extracts
approximately 2/3 of the water from the airflow.
The drained water is injected back into the heat exchanger cooling air to enhance the cooling capacity.
The temperature of the air down stream of the water separator is controlled by the cabin temperature
control valve.
NOTE: In extremely cold conditions the temperature at the inlet may drop as low as -8°C when cabin
temp is set to max cool (auto or manual).
In the unlikely event that freezing would occur at the water separator due to high humidity at
these cold temperatures, the bypass valve in the water separator would open and allow
continued flow.
The operation of the LLTCV is controlled by a low limit control sensor in the duct downstream of the
water separator. The low limit temperature control system operates independently of any other system
and can override cold selections made by the flight crew.
DUCT TEMPERATURE
A DUCT TEMP indicator is connected to a temperature sensor located in the duct downstream of the
silencer. This temperature may be considered as the cabin air inlet temperature.
Should the temperature be exceeded, a duct over temperature sensor, set at 115°C, will cause a DUCT
OVHT amber repeater annunciator to illuminate on the MWS panel, which draws attention to the DUCT
TEMP indicator located on the overhead roof panel.
The over temperature signal will also cause the cabin temperature control valve to be motored fully
closed. When the temperature in the duct falls, normal automatic control is restored and the DUCT
OVHT repeater annunciator extinguishes.
Overhead Roof Panel
DUCT TEMP
+50
0
100
DUCT MWS Annunciator Panel
°C OVHT
DUCT
Temperature of the air delivered to the cabin may be varied by the flight crew via selections on the
CABIN TEMP AUTO-MANUAL/COOL-HOT temperature selector. AUTO or MANUAL are the two
modes of operation for the cabin temperature system.
AUTO MODE
In the AUTO mode, the required temperature in the cabin is selected by positioning the selector be-
tween COOL and HOT. Temperature is not indicated on the temperature selector, however a full COOL
selection corresponds to 18.32° C (65° F), and a full HOT selection corresponds to 31.1° C (88° F).
A temperature controller using signals from the selector switch, a duct temperature sensor, and a cabin
temperature sensor unit, determines whether an increase or decrease of temperature is required.
Resulting signals from the controller cause the cabin temperature control valve to open or close
accordingly. A CABIN TEMP indicator, on the overhead roof panel, is connected to a temperature bulb
at the right forward cabin bulkhead position. An electrically operated fan draws air through a grill in the
cabin and across the temperature bulb and the cabin temperature sensor. The duct over temperature
limiting sensor and the low limit control system both remain operative in the MANUAL mode.
Overhead Roof Panel
CABIN TEMP
AUTO
20 30
10 40
0 50
°C
COOL HOT
CABIN MANUAL
MANUAL MODE
The MANUAL mode is selected by moving the CABIN TEMP selector through a detent to the MANUAL
spring-loaded center-off position. Holding the selector to either COOL or HOT (as required) directly
controls the position of the cabin temperature control valve. Releasing the CABIN TEMP selector to the
center-off position, stops the cabin temperature control valve in the attained position. The duct over
temperature limiting sensor and the low limit control system both remain operative in the MANUAL
mode.
NOTE: In extremely cold conditions the temperature at the inlet may drop as low as -8 C when cabin
temp is set to max cool (auto or manual).
In the unlikely event that freezing would occur at the water separator due to high humidity at
these cold temperatures, the bypass valve in the water separator would open and allow
continued flow.
Temperature controlled air enters the pressure cabin through a silencer, a non return valve and an
electrically operated two-way flood open/close valve, which is controlled by a CABIN FLOOD switch on
the overhead roof panel.
CABIN
FLOOD
OPEN
CLOSE
With FLOOD OPEN selected, all the conditioned air is supplied to a cabin flood flow outlet, at roof level
at the right rear of the passenger cabin.
With FLOOD CLOSE selected, the air supply to the cabin flood flow outlet is cut-off and temperature
controlled air is supplied to the cabin high level outlets and the flight compartment duct.
The auxiliary heating system supplies the flight compartment with a variable supply of hot air via a heat
augmentor in the main supply system. Control of the auxiliary system valve is by the F/DK VLV switch
on the overhead roof panel.
F/DK VLV
OPEN
CLOSE
The supply is tapped from upstream of the main air valve of No. 2 engine via a non return valve. If, while
the flight compartment auxiliary heating valve is open, an overheat of 115° C is detected in the outlet
duct, then the flight compartment auxiliary heating valve is closed, and remains closed until selected
manually open.
RAM AIR
Ram air from the dorsal air intake is used primarily as a cooling medium for the heat exchanger but it
can also be introduced into an unpressurized cabin for ventilation purposes. The cabin supply is ducted
from the ram air intake and fed into the cabin through an electrically operated ram air valve and a non
return valve, and into the flood flow duct.
The ram air valve is controlled by a micro-switch which operates when the DUMP VALVE lever is
selected fully OPEN.
The ram air passes through the CAU heat exchanger assisted by a fan driven by the CAU turbine, and
is ducted to atmosphere through a grille in the airplane skin. If the intake becomes obstructed, a spring
loaded door in the intake duct opens inwards to permit air from the rear equipment bay to enter the
intake and supply the CAU heat exchanger.
The recirculated air is also supplied to two further outlets in the flight compartment. The fan is controlled
from a CABIN FAN switch in the ENVIRONMENTAL section of the flight compartment overhead roof
panel.
CABIN
FAN
ON
OFF
INDICATOR
A triple pointer CABIN pressure indicator is located on the copilot’s instrument panel at the lower right
of the PFD. The three pointers are:
• A pointer with red and white diagonal hash marks which displays cabin differential pressure.
Center Instrument
Panel
Each outflow valve is operated by the differential between the cabin pressure and a reference pressure,
sensed from a CABIN CONTROLLER via a pneumatic relay.
Center Instrument
Panel
2 1
3
S ALT
26 24
N
28
C A BI
x 10 0 0
AC F T
FT
MIN
CABIN I
CONTROLLER
MAX
RATE
The CABIN CONTROLLER is located on the copilot’s instrument panel, right of the PFD. The controller
has two rotary selector knobs, one at the center and one offset at the bottom left.
The center knob controls the rotation of a dial with an outer and an inner scale. Both scales show
ALTitude graduated in FT x 1000. The outer displays the selected CABIN altitude. With a CABIN altitude
set, the inner scale shows the associated airplane altitude at a nominal cabin differential pressure of
8.55 psi. This will provide a 7500 feet cabin altitude at an airplane altitude of 41,000 feet.
The offset knob labelled RATE and marked with an arrow, is used to adjust cabin altitude rate of change.
The range is from approximately 2000 ft/min, with the knob set at MAX, to 50 ft/min with the knob set
at MIN. Setting the arrow vertically provides a rate of change of approximately 500 ft/min.
During automatic operation, cabin air passes through a filter into the pressure controller. The controller
is connected to ambient via two pneumatic relays and a venturi.
The pneumatic relays are connected to a single air jet pump. This pump, operated by engine bleed air,
ensures that the desired differential between the outflow valve reference pressure and cabin pressure
is maintained.
MANUAL CONTROL
Manual control of pressurization is achieved by operation of a shut-off valve and a needle valve. The
shut-off valve, labelled PRESSURIZATION CONTROL has two positions, NORMAL and GROUND
TEST. This valve is connected into the ambient bleed to the pressure controller. With NORMAL
selected, the bleed is open and automatic pressurization control is available.
Selecting GROUND TEST closes the controller ambient bleed; this causes the outflow valves to shut.
Subsequently, cabin pressure can be controlled by the needle valve labelled MANUAL CABIN
ALTITUDE CONTROL. This valve connects one of the outflow valves to ambient via a venturi in the
forward luggage bay.
Rotating the MANUAL CABIN ALTITUDE CONTROL valve between INCREASE and DECREASE,
adjusts the pressure differential required to operate the outflow valve and allows a desired cabin altitude
and rate of change to be attained.
With main engine(s) running and MAIN AIR VALVE(S) OPEN or with APU (if installed) running and APU
AIR OPEN, air conditioning is available on the ground by means of a fan-operated venturi. The fan is
electrically-operated and controlled by a PRESSN OVRD - AUTO switch via the landing gear lever lock
circuit.
With the airplane on the ground and AUTO set, the fan operates so the venturi reduces the reference
pressures and causes the outflow valves to open. Air circulates through the cabin with normal
temperature control available. On takeoff, the venturi fan switches off automatically; pressurization
control then operates from the normal pressure differentials. The OVRD position is used to switch off
the venturi fan in the event of auto mode failure, or to achieve cabin pressurization on the ground for
maintenance purposes.
Each outflow valve incorporates an inward relief facility. At a negative pressure differential of 0.5 psi the
outflow valves open to allow reverse flow, at ambient, to enter the cabin. In this condition, the cabin
altitude changes at airplane altitude rate of change irrespective of control settings. Also incorporated in
each outflow valve is a pressure relief valve.
The relief valve cracks open when cabin differential pressure exceeds 8.6 psi, to exhaust outflow valve
reference pressure. This causes the outflow valve to open and restrict the maximum cabin differential
pressure to 8.8 psi In this condition, normal pressurization control is inoperative.
CABIN ALTITUDE
(Roof Panel Test Area)
HORN
HORN
ISOLATE
FLAPS 15°
CABIN
ALTITUDE
Normal Datum
Pressure Switch
9300 ft ± 300 ft
CABIN
HIGH
DATUM
High Datum
Pressure Switch
14,000 ft ± 300 ft
A normal datum pressure switch operates and illuminates the CABIN ALTITUDE red annunciator on the
MWS panel. A warning horn sounds when the cabin altitude reaches 9300 ± 300 ft. The horn may be
silenced by pushing a HORN ISOLATE button on the left thrust lever knob. A CABIN ALT button, on the
TEST section of the overhead roof panel, is provided for checking the warning system.
NOTE: With flaps lowered beyond 15 °, the depressurization warning horn is electrically isolated.
A second pressure switch is installed to permit take-off and landing at airfields above 9000 ft elevation.
The high altitude datum pressure switch is controlled by an illuminated push button switch labelled
CABIN HIGH DATUM on the copilot’s instrument panel.
When the button is pushed and illuminated, the high altitude datum pressure switch controls the set-
point of the depressurization warning at 14,000 ± 300 ft.
When the push button is not operated and not illuminated, the normal datum pressure switch 9300
± 300 ft controls the set-point.
DUMP VALVE
A butterfly type dump valve on the right sidewall of the nose gear bay can be set between OPEN and
SHUT, by movement of a DUMP VALVE operating lever. The operating lever is located to the right of
FMS No. 2 display screen.
The dump valve is used in conjunction with the ram air supply, (DUMP VALVE lever fully OPEN), to
provide ventilation when the cabin is unpressurized in flight.
Page 10-16 Sub-section 10 Pilot’s Operating Manual
ENVIRONMENTAL Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Valve
Engine Bleed Low
Air Pressure
Fan Venturi Tube Port
Pneumatic Pneumatic
PRESSURIZATION
Relay Relay
CONTROL
MANUAL CABIN NRV NRV
ALTITUDE CONTROL
Absolute Air
Air Filter Pressure
Key
Assembly Regulators Cabin Pressure....................
Cabin Air
Venturi Rate Pressure.......................
Reference Pressure...............
Cabin Air
Inlet Regulated Vacuum.................
Outflow Outflow True Static Atmosphere..........
Low Pressure Safety Valve Safety Valve Control Pressure....................
Port
Figure 2
Pressurization System
GENERAL ................................................................................................11-3
SYSTEM OPERATION.............................................................................11-3
ROTARY-CUTTER ICE DETECTOR ....................................................11-4
WING SPOTLIGHTS .............................................................................11-4
Figure 1 - Ice Detection Components ................................................11-5
FLUID STORAGE..................................................................................11-6
Warning Annunciators.....................................................................11-6
POWER SUPPLIES...............................................................................11-6
Figure 2 - Airframe Ice Protection System........................................ 11-7
ENGINE BLEED AIR ANTI-ICING .......................................................... 11-8
Warning Annunciators.....................................................................11-8
Figure 3 - Engine Anti-icing System ................................................. 11-9
ICE PROTECTION - WINDSCREENS .................................................. 11-10
ELECTRICAL HEATING SYSTEM......................................................11-10
Figure 4 - Windscreen Electrical Heating ....................................... 11-11
POWER SUPPLIES.............................................................................11-12
PITOT, STATIC, RUDDER BIAS and
AIRFLOW ANGLE SENSOR HEATING ............................................... 11-13
OPERATION........................................................................................11-13
POWER SUPPLIES.............................................................................11-14
An airframe fluid ice protection system is provided for the leading edges of the wings and the horizontal
stabilizers. The system is controlled by a single timer switch. An audio warning is given when the system
switches off. Location of components in the vestibule area is shown in Figure 2.
Hot air is used to keep the main engine air intake and starter/generator cooling air intake free of ice with
electric heating provided for windscreens, pitot heads, forward static plates and stall vanes, rudder bias
struts and engine inlet temperature and pressure sensors Pt2 and Tt2.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A WING/TAIL ANTICE timer switch controls an electrically-operated pump for up to 10 minutes. When
initially selected, the first minute of operation is at a high flow rate, after which, the system reverts to
normal flow. If icing conditions still prevail or are expected, and therefore a further period of operation
is required, this should be selected before the timer switch reaches zero.
Using this procedure the system will remain on the normal flow rate, without first delivering a high rate
flow and therefore fluid will be conserved. When the timer switch returns to zero, the pump is de-
energized and a warning chime sounds via the airplane audio system.
Overhead Roof Panel
MINS
10 0
ANTICE ANTICE
LO PRESS LO QTY
MWS Panel
ICE
PROT
NOTE: At very low temperatures (-28° C or less) ice crystals can exist in the atmosphere, but do not
present a hazard. If the airframe ice protection system is used at these low temperatures, the
water/alcohol content of the fluid will evaporate, leaving solidified glycol which together with
the impinging ice crystals can give the appearance of ice. Use of the airframe ice protection
system, under these conditions, is not advisable.
Therefore, operation of the WING/TAIL ANTICE timer switch should be limited to the priming
procedures, and additional use in flight only when weather conditions warrant.
Fluid is fed from the head compensating valve to the three proportioning units, one located in each wing,
the other between the horizontal stabilizers. A check valve is incorporated in each proportioning unit
outlet to prevent back-flow when the system is inoperative. Each proportioning unit splits the main flow
down to the requirements of the individual distributor panels. This arrangement makes sure the fluid
supply is maintained to the remaining outlets should a pipe become disconnected.
At each distributor panel, fluid is fed through a metering tube into a cavity. From the cavity the fluid
passes through a micro-porous plastic sheet and through a titanium outer skin of greater porosity to
escape into the atmosphere. Airflow then causes the fluid to spread rearward over the wings and
horizontal stabilizer surfaces.
Power supplies to the ice detector are fed through the weight-on-wheels switch relay system and
controlled by an ICE DET AUTO-OVRD switch. With the switch selected to AUTO, the detector operates
when the airplane becomes airborne. Selecting the switch to OVRD by-passes the weight switch relay
so that the detector runs on the ground and in flight.
NOTE: The ICE DET switch should be selected to OVRD before taxiing in icing conditions.
The ice detector unit consists of an AC powered motor driving a serrated rotor which rotates in close
proximity to a fixed knife-edge cutter.
When ice forms on the rotor, the gap between the rotor and adjacent cutter is filled. The skimming action
of the cutter against the ice causes a rise in motor torque which rotates the motor slightly within its
mounting. Rotation of the motor actuates a microswitch which connects a DC power supply, via a time
delay relay, to illuminate an ICE DETECTED annunciator located on the overhead roof panel. The ice
warning is also indicated on the MWS by the illumination of the ICE PROT repeater annunciator.
The time delay relay maintains the ice warning signal during intermittent rises in motor torque. When
ice ceases to form, a spring returns the motor to the normal position, the microswitch opens and after
a delay (60 seconds) the warning is cancelled.
ICE DETECTION
SPOTLIGHT
(Same Right Side)
ROTARY-CUTTER
ICE DETECTOR
ICE
DETECTED
ICE DET
MWS Panel
LOGO/ICE AUTO
ICE
L
PROT
O
G
O
Figure 1 OVRD
Ice Detection Components
A tank filler cap is accessible from inside the airplane forward of the main entry door. After filling a
completely empty system, the vent valve, located below the tank filler, should be pushed for 10 seconds
to bleed the pump.
NOTE: The vent valve must not be operated while the pump is running.
Warning Annunciators
With the pump running, system low pressure is indicated by the illumination of an amber ANTICE LO
PRESS annunciator on the overhead roof panel and the MWS ICE PROT flashing repeater annunciator.
Overhead Roof Panel
ANTICE ANTICE
LO PRESS LO QTY MWS Panel
ICE
PROT
Fluid low quantity is indicated by the illumination of an amber ANTICE LO QTY annunciator on the
overhead roof panel and the MWS ICE PROT repeater annunciator flashing. When these warnings
occur, 30 minutes of fluid usage remains.
POWER SUPPLIES
Electrical power distribution to the equipment is as follows:
Figure 2
Airframe Ice Protection System
Air is bled from two stages of the engine compressor to provide supplies for:
• Airplane services
An ENG ANTICE ON-OFF switch, located on the roof panel ice protection section, is provided for each
engine. With either or both switches selected to ON, an ICE PROT SELECTED annunciator on the
MWS panel is illuminated.
Each switch controls a servo-operated anti-icing on-off valve. When ON is selected, the following events
occur:
• The anti-icing valve opens and high pressure air is bled from the HP compressor and ducted
forward to anti-ice the nacelle inlet cowl.
• Electrical power is supplied, via the fuel computer switch when set to AUTO, to the Pt2 and Tt2
sensor probe heaters located in the inlet.
• In flight, the engine digital computers are reset to a schedule that incorporates a raised idle rpm to
compensate for the effect on thrust.
• The temperature provided by the A panel windscreen heating film is raised from the normal setting
to ensure adequate anti-icing performance.
Warning Annunciators
With the ENG ANTICE switched ON, low pressure flow into the inlet cowl is detected by a pressure
switch set at 6 psi and indicated by the illumination of the MWS annunciators ENG A/ICE and ICE PROT
repeater. Full details of the bleed air anti-icing system are contained in Sub-section 2 ENGINES.
Overhead Roof Panel
ENG ANTICE
1 ON 2
MWS Panel
OFF
PE BUSBAR
MWS DIM BUS
ICE PROT
SELECTED
ENG ANTICE
1 ON 2
TO ENGINE DIGITAL
COMPUTER IDLE
2 SEC
SCHEDULE
DELAY
TO Pt2 and Tt2
HEATING CIRCUITS
OFF
ENG 1
A/ICE
PRESSURE
6 PSI
SWITCH
ANTI-ICING
VALVE
PICCOLO TUBE
FROM ENGINE HP BLEED
Figure 3
Engine Anti-icing System
The two forward facing curved windscreens ('A' screens) and the left and right forward sidescreens ('B'
screens) are anti-iced and anti-misted by electrical heating.
The two forward facing panels of the windshield each incorporate a gold film heating element. Power
supplies, from the alternator to the elements, are controlled by SCREEN HEAT ON-OFF switches (L or
R). With SCREEN HEAT ON, the panel temperature, detected by integral sensing elements, is
regulated by thermal controllers, one for each windscreen.
In the event of overheat occurring in a panel, a related SCREEN OVHT annunciator and the MWS ICE
PROT repeater annunciator will illuminate. At the same time, a relay operates to disconnect the power
supply to the overheating element.
When the airplane is on the ground or in flight without ENG ANTICE selected, the windshields are
heated to a lower temperature setting. In flight, with ENG ANTICE selected, the temperature is
controlled at a higher value.
OFF
SCREENHEAT
1 ON 2
SIDE SCRN
OVHT
OFF
MWS Panel
ICE
PROT
Figure 4
Windscreen Electrical Heating
PE busbar supplies:
• ALTR 1 (2) FAIL annunciators.
• SIDE SCRN OVHT annunciator MWS ICE PROT repeater annunciator SCREEN HEAT L ON/OFF
control PS2 busbar supplies.
Ice protection in the form of electrical heating is provided for the following:
• Two pitot heads, one located each side of the forward fuselage.
• Two forward static plates, one located each side of the nose section.
• Two airflow angle sensors, one located each side of the forward fuselage.
OPERATION
Each pitot head contains an electrical heating element controlled by a PITOT/VANE HEAT L or R ON-
OFF switch. Each switch also controls one element of a double element heating muff installed on each
of the two rudder bias struts.
L & R PITOT HTR FAIL annunciators illuminate with the MWS ICE PROT repeater annunciator flashing
whenever a PITOT/VANE HEAT L or R switch is OFF, or when both switches are ON and the current
draw by either pitot head element is insufficient.
A single ammeter and a L-R selector switch are provided. Selecting L or R connects the ammeter to the
associated pitot head heater circuit. With PITOT/VANE HEAT switched ON for at least 1 minute,
readings of between 5 and 10 amps indicate satisfactory operation of the pitot heaters only. Actual
power consumption depends on the ambient temperature. The rudder bias heaters are not connected
to the ammeter.
The left and right forward static plates are electrically heated. The electrical power supply to the heating
element of each static plate is via a relay controlled by the PITOT/VANE HEAT R switch, and the weight
switch relay system. Heating is only available when the airplane is in flight.
Ice protection for each airflow angle sensor is provided by a vane heater element, and a case heater
element. The case heater element is thermostatically controlled.
The power supply to the heater elements is 115 VAC, and is derived as follows:
(1) Two windscreen alternators on line: left sensor elements from No. 1 alternator - right sensor
elements from No. 2 alternator.
(2) One windscreen alternator off line and No. 1 and No. 2 inverters on line: elements of both sensors
from No. 2 inverter.
(3) One windscreen alternator off line, and either No. 1 or No. 2 inverter off line: elements of both
sensors disconnected.
The heating elements of each airflow angle sensor are controlled by an associated PITOT/VANE HEAT
L or R switch.
A vane heater failure is indicated by the lighting of an associated L or R VANE HTR FAIL annunciator,
and the MWS ICE PROT repeater annunciator.
0 15
v
PITOT AMPS
L R
PITOT/VANE HEAT
L ON R
L VANE R VANE
HTR FAIL HTR FAIL
L PITOT R PITOT
MWS Panel
HTR FAIL HTR FAIL
ICE
OFF PROT
POWER SUPPLIES
DC power supplies to the pump and chime unit are taken from busbar PS2. Supplies to the
ANTICE LO PRESS, ANTICE LO QTY annunciators and the MWS ICE PROT repeater
annunciator is taken from busbar PE.
The fluid contents indicator is supplied from busbar PE when the airplane is on the ground, and
busbar PS2 when in flight. Switching of power supplies is controlled by a weight-on-wheels
microswitch.
Two 750 liter oxygen cylinders (with provision for a third 750 liter cylinder) are mounted in the rear
equipment bay between frames 24 and 25. The cylinders are charged to 1800 psi and normally supply
oxygen to two quick-release sockets in the flight compartment, two therapeutic outlets and eight drop-
out mask units in the passenger cabin and one drop-out mask unit in the toilet compartment.
TAIL
750 LITER
OXYGEN
CYLINDERS
FRAME 24
VENT HOSE
SCREENS
BLANKING PLUG IF
SEALED BOX BLANKINGTHIRD
PLUG IF 3rd CYLINDER NOT INSTALLED
CYCLINDER
IS NOT
Figure 1
Oxygen Cylinder Assembly
An automatic shut-off valve is located in the oxygen box assembly (Figure 3) which will shut-off the
supply of oxygen should there be a rupture of the supply pipeline downstream of the valve. Provision
is made to install a regulator and quick-release socket in the forward vestibule cabinet for a third crew
member, a drop-out mask in the vestibule, and for additional drop-out mask units in the passenger
cabin depending on the number of seats.
Cylinder pressure is reduced to a nominal 70 psi by a pressure regulator incorporating a relief valve
operating at 90 psi. The pressure regulator has an integral grounding lug attached to two bonding leads
from the adjacent system piping.
The supply for the therapeutic outlets is taken directly from the pressure regulator. The drop-out masks
supply is taken from the pressure regulator through a baromatic valve and the passenger supply valve.
The baromatic valve automatically causes the masks to fall to the half-hang position at a certain cabin
altitude and can be operated manually to release the masks at any altitude.
750 LITER
OXYGEN CYLINDERS
750 LITER
OXYGEN
CYLINDERS
Figure 2
Oxygen System
The oxygen cylinders are charged through a charging valve in the oxygen box assembly which is
situated in the right hand rear fuselage between frames 24 and 25.
A contents indicator is mounted next to the charging valve. The charging supply passes through a line
filter and bursting disc assembly before joining the pipeline from the cylinders to the automatic shut-off
valve.
The automatic shut-off valve is also located in the oxygen box assembly and is provided to shut off the
oxygen supply should there be a rupture of the supply pipeline downstream of the valve.
All system piping is made from stainless steel or light alloy, except for hoses which connect the oxygen
cylinders, drop-out mask units, therapeutic outlets, and the mask quick-release sockets.
Figure 3
Oxygen Box Assembly
Oxygen from the storage cylinders is fed to the master SUPPLY valve on the flight compartment oxygen
panel on the left console.
Opening the master SUPPLY valve allows oxygen to flow to the contents indicator and the pressure
regulator, then, at 70 psi to the combined mask-regulators, therapeutic outlets and the baromatic valve.
1/2
1/4 3/4
EMPTY FULL
OXYGEN
OXYGEN
CONTENTS
PASSENGER SUPPLY
EMERGENCY
PU L L
SUPPLY
TEST
PULL TO OPERATE
PUSH FOR OFF ON
Figure 4
Flight Compartment Oxygen Panel on Left Console
Pre-Mod. 252939: The top of the cylinder is secured to the forward face of panel DA by a toggle
fastener.
Post-Mod. 252939: The cylinder is secured by a toggle fastener, and hinged bracket which covers
electrical power points on panel DA.
NOTE
GOGGLE STOWAGE ON
LEFT SIDE SIMILAR
MASK
STOWAGE
2nd FLASHLIGHT
OXYGEN
CYLINDER
HINGED OXYGEN
CYLINDER MOUNTING PANEL
PANEL DA
FORWARD
Figure 5
Portable Oxygen Smoke Set
Mask-Regulator
Under normal flight conditions the mask-regulator is selected to the —N“ position. At this setting the ratio
of oxygen to air increases with an increase in altitude until at approximately 30,000 feet, when 100%
oxygen is supplied.
Between 35,000 and 41,000 feet 100% oxygen at a positive pressure is automatically maintained.
However, 100% oxygen is available at any altitude when the mask regulator is selected to the 100%
position.
Turning the mask regulator knob to EMERGENCY provides a 100% oxygen supply under positive
pressure. The regulator can be functionally tested by setting the selector to the 100% position and
pushing the regulator knob to TEST position. The flow of oxygen can be checked by feel; the test can
be carried out with the mask in its stowage.
Figure 6
Oxygen Mask and Regulator (Mod. No. 25A025A)
NOTE: Headsets and hats must be removed before donning oxygen masks.
Figure 7
Smoke Goggles and Mask-Regulator
THERAPEUTIC SUPPLY
Oxygen for therapeutic use is available at two self-sealing outlets in the passenger cabin. These outlets
incorporate a check valve, spring-loaded against its seating and sealed by two sealing rings.
When the bayonet adapter of the therapeutic mask is inserted, the hollow probe of the adapter unseats
the check valve and enters the sealing rings. Oxygen then flows to the mask as shown by an indicator
integral with the mask hose.
The mask has a lightweight molded face-piece which can be held against the face with one hand. Metal
plates on either side of the base give it support and secure a filter. The mask supply hose assembly
consists of two hoses joined by the flow indicator. When the mask is in the stowed position, the flow
indicator is held in the carrier clip in the stowage box. In this position the check valve in the flow indicator
is held closed and prevents flow of oxygen.
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Figure 8
Passenger Oxygen Box Locations and Mask Stowage
Figure 9
Oxygen Mask Folding and Stowage
Particular lighting installations may vary from the standard installation. This section provides a typical
installation of interior and exterior lighting.
ENTRANCE LIGHTING
Entrance lighting is provided by a step light mounted on the rear face of the forward cabinet and a twin
light assembly mounted in the vestibule roof. Lights are installed in the main entry doorway top and
bottom step risers. Switching is by an ENTRY LIGHTS switch on an interior lighting control panel
located straight across from the entry door, left of the refuel panel.
ENTRY
LIGHTS
Refuel Panel
AISLE
(Shown Open)
LIGHTS
LIGHTING VEST
FIXTURES LIGHTS
BRT
UP
LIGHTS
DIM
GALLEY
MASTER
CABIN
LIGHTS
O’RIDE
Figure 1
Main Entry Doorway Lighting and Controls
The main instrument panel and glareshield panel lighting is provided by electroluminescent display
panels individually attached to the instrument panels and the glareshield.
The instrument electroluminescent display panels are controlled by the two rotary dimmer switches
located on the left and right glareshield side control panels and labelled INSTRUMENT PANEL -
PANELS. The glareshield side and upper electroluminescent display panels are controlled by the two
rotary dimmer switches located on the left and right glareshield side control panels and labelled
GLARESHIELD PANEL.
Floodlights and emergency lights are mounted on brackets in two places on each lower canopy rail and
in four places under the main instrument panel glareshield. The flood lights are controlled by a rotary
dimmer switch located on the left and right glareshield side control panels and labelled PANEL LTS -
FLOOD. The emergency lights are controlled by a three position switch on the left and right glareshield
side control panels and labelled PANEL LTS - EMERG/OFF/STORM.
The panel-mounted instruments have integral lights controlled by the two rotary dimmer switches
located on the left and right glareshield side control panels and labelled INSTRUMENT PANEL - INST.
The primary flight displays and the multi-function displays have integral lighting and are controlled by
the two rotary dimmer switches located on the left and right glareshield side control panels and labelled
INSTRUMENT PANEL - DISPLAYS.
Where a requirement for panel or instrument lighting is desirable and no integral lighting exists,
panel-mounted pillar lights are utilized. These are controlled by a rotary dimmer switch located on the
left glareshield side control panel and labelled PEDESTAL.
The pilot side console lighting is controlled by a rotary dimmer switch located on the left glareshield side
control panel and labelled CONSOLE - PANEL. The copilot side console lighting is controlled by rotary
dimmer switches located on the right glareshield side control panel and labelled CONSOLE - PANEL
and DIGIT.
The overhead roof panel lighting is provided by two electroluminescent display panels individually
attached to the rear and forward panels. The roof panel instruments have integral lights. The overhead
roof panels and instrument lighting is controlled by two rotary dimmer switches located on the right side
of the overhead roof panel labelled PANEL DIM and INSTR DIM.
NOTE:
FOR INDIVIDUAL INSTRUMENT CVR
PANEL ARRANGEMENTS MIKE
INCLUDING ELECTROLUMINESCENT CVR
MIKE
PANELS REFER TO CHAPTER 31
FD BARS
GLARESHIELD
<
FD BARS PANEL
ANNUN GLARESHIELD +
<
BRT PANEL
+ DIM
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANELS INST DISPLAYS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANELS INST DISPLAYS
CONSOLE
FLIGHT ANNUN PAD PANEL DIGIT
CONSOLE TEST STANDBY COMPASS
PANEL PAD MIC ATC
INTEGRAL LIGHT
LAMP KEY IDENT
ATC MIC
IDENT KEY PEDESTAL
CHARTLIGHT
LAMP CHART LAMP
CHART LIGHT
CHART PANEL LTS
FLOOD EMERG
PANEL LTS PANEL DIM OFF
EMERG FLOOD MASTER LIGHT SW STORM
OFF
STORM
INSTR DIM
PAD
PAD LAMP
LIGHT PAD
PAD LIGHT
LAMP
F
L
A
N
D
I
N
G
A
B
G
E
A
R
STORM
STORM LIGHT
LAMP STORM
STORMLAMP
LIGHT
INST PANEL
STORM
FLOOD LIGHT
LAMPS
Figure 2
Flight Compartment Lighting
CHART/WANDER
LIGHT SWITCH WANDER LIGHT
SOCKET
STORM LIGHT
SPOTLIGHT
PANEL DA SWITCH
Looking Aft
SPOTLIGHT
(DA PANEL LIGHTING)
Figure 3
Flight Compartment Bulkhead Lighting
SPOTLIGHT (Figure 3)
A bull’s-eye type spotlight, with universal mounting, is installed on the forward face of the flight
compartment left bulkhead with a control switch provided directly above. The primary use of the
spotlight is to light the inward face of panel DA. Electrical power is supplied from the PE busbar.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Electrical power for the flight compartment emergency lights, positioned on the lower canopy rail and
under the instrument panel glareshield, is supplied from the essential busbar PE. The emergency lights
provide the vital instrument panel fascia lighting and are controlled by the STORM-OFF-EMERG
switches mounted on the left and right glareshields, when selected to EMERG.
PS1 Busbar
Flood lights
Left pad light
Left and right glareshield side and upper display electroluminescent panels
Left, center and right main panel instrument lighting
E2B compass (NORM)
Center console pillar and panel lights
Center console instrument lighting
Overhead Roof panel lighting
PS2 Busbar
Storm lights
Right pad light
Overhead Roof panel instrument lighting
Left, center and right main instrument panel electroluminescent display panels
PE Busbar
Emergency lights
Chart lights
Spotlight
DA panel wander light
Annunciator Brt/Dim supply 1
Annunciator Brt/Dim supply 2
E2B compass (EMERG)
Dimmer Supply
Panel Lighting Service
(voltage) Busbar
Dimmer Supply
Panel Lighting Service
(voltage) Busbar
ANNUNCIATORS
The lighting intensity control for the MWS annunciators is provided by a dimmer and a switch located
on the center instrument panel. A MWS DIM FAIL annunciator is positioned at the top of the left
instrument panel. The MWS ANNUN test push switch is located on the test panel at the top of the
overhead roof panel and will illuminate most of the annunciators at full intensity. For details of the
operation of annunciators associated with the master warning system, refer to Sub-section 1 - MASTER
WARNING SYSTEM.
The lighting control of the MWS annunciators is by variable dimming effected by a rotary MWS DIM
control in conjunction with a NORM - DIM OVRD switch. Should the dimming circuit fail, resulting in loss
of light to the annunciator, the NORM - DIM OVRD switch may be selected to the OVRD position; this
effectively bypasses the dimming circuit and connects a 28 VDC supply direct to the annunciators. Both
power supplies are taken from the PE busbar.
The flight annunciator illumination intensity is controlled by the ANNUN BRT/DIM switch located on the
left side glareshield panel. This switch also controls the landing gear and wheel brake emergency
annunciator illumination levels.
An incandescent light strip is installed on the back of the upper shelf of the upper galley section and
controlled by the GALLEY UP LIGHTS switch on the galley switch panel. The galley work lighting is
provided by a twin fluorescent light assembly to illuminate the working surface and controlled by the
GALLEY WORK LIGHTS switch on the galley switch panel.
The circuit breaker panel is located in the galley circuit breaker compartment.
PULL OUT
WORK
SANDWICH SURFACE UTENSILS
TRAY
CONDIMENTS
DRAWER
MISC.
MISCELLANEOUS
STORAGE
STORAGE ICE / COLD
STORAGE
PLATES WASTE
WINE / SPIRITS
NAPKINS
STORAGE
BOWLS
SODA CANS
M6356_0
HA03C
014655AA.AI
Figure 4
Typical Galley
GENERAL LIGHTING
NOTE: For the position of lights and switches refer to Figure 1 or Figure 3 and for details of power
supplies refer to Table 1.
Passenger cabin general lighting is provided by left and right roof-mounted fluorescent tubes.
Two inverter/ ballast units provide momentary high voltage outputs to four power units to enable the
lights to become fully illuminated. The roof-mounted light installations each contain two fluorescent
tubes, one tube of each installation being supplied from the left-hand inverter ballast unit and the other
from the right-hand inverter ballast unit. This arrangement ensures continuity of lighting in the event of
failure of a lighting supply.
READING LIGHTS
An individual reading light and push switch is provided above each passenger position.
WARDROBE LIGHTING
The wardrobe interior lighting is provided by a twin light assembly positioned in the wardrobe upper
section. The lights are connected in parallel, supplied from the PS2 busbar, and controlled by an
illuminated push-switch mounted on the upper right hand section of the wardrobe.
VESTIBULE LIGHTING
Vestibule lighting is provided by a step light mounted on the rear face of the forward cabinet, and a twin
light assembly mounted in the vestibule roof and are controlled by the interior lighting control panel
VEST LIGHTS switch located left of the refuel panel.
PASSENGER NOTICES
FASTEN BELTS/NO SMOKING notices are installed in the passenger cabin forward and rear
bulkheads. Notice illumination is provided by integrally installed lights, controlled by a SEAT BELTS
ON-OFF switch and a three-position NO SMKG ON-OFF-AUTO switch. Both switches are located on
the flight compartment overhead roof panel and selection of either switch to ON, will illuminate the
appropriate part of the safety notices.
Notice illumination is accompanied by activation of an audio system chime unit. When selected, the NO
SMKG switch AUTO position will automatically illuminate the safety notices NO SMOKING characters
and operate the chime unit when the nose landing gear is locked down and the relevant busbars are
energized.
STANDBY LIGHTING
Electrical power for the passenger cabin and toilet standby lights is supplied from the essential busbar
PE. Two standby lights are installed in the passenger cabin roof and one in the toilet compartment.
PE Busbar
Cabin standby lights
Toilet standby lights
PS1 Busbar
Cabin floor lights (left-hand inverter)
Reading lights (left-hand inverter)
PS2 Busbar
Cabin flood lights (right-hand inverter)
Toilet lights
FWD and rear luggage bay lights
Reading lights (right-hand PSU's)
Battery 1 (in flight)
Vestibule roof light
Step lights
Refuel panel (DB) lights
Aisle lights
NOTE: With the landing gear microswitch in the GND position the following services are
supplied from Battery 1:
• Vestibule roof light.
• Cabin flood lighting. (right-hand inverter)
• Step lights.
• Toilet lights.
• Refuel panel lights.
• Aisle lights.
A three position switch, MAN-ARM-OFF, located on the flight compartment overhead roof panel,
controls the DC power from a forward and aft battery power supply.
The forward power supply provides lighting for the forward entrance door EXIT sign, floor lighting for the
entry way (in the aft base of the crew cabinet) and four cabin aisle lights. The aft power supply provides
lighting for the escape hatch area, over/under right wing, three cabin aisle lights, the L/H forward and
aft overhead cabin reading lights and the R/H two middle overhead reading lights.
An amber EMERG LTS OFF annunciator, adjacent to the emergency light switch, will illuminate anytime
the switch is in the OFF position and PE is powered.
A sonalert system warns the flight crew whenever the emergency lights switch is in the ARM or MAN
position and PE power has been interrupted or lost. The sonalert may be cancelled by pushing the
HORIZON WARN CANCEL button located on the pilot instrument panel.
The toilet compartment is illuminated by six fluorescent tubes mounted in the roof trim to provide a
concealed lighting effect when the main airplane power is turned on. Additional lighting is controlled by
switching on the toilet lighting control panel located above the mirror. Supply is from the PS2 busbar.
TOILET LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
Figure 5
Toilet Compartment
A roof-mounted twin-bulb tube is installed in the aft baggage compartment and is controlled by the
BAGGAGE LIGHTS switch on the toilet lighting control panel. One bulb of the aft baggage compartment
light is illuminated whenever the main toilet lights are on, the other is illuminated together with the toilet
bulb whenever the main cabin lights are on.
A light and socket are installed in the roof of the rear equipment bay to give general area lighting and
power supply for a plug-in wander light. Control of the switch is by manual selection to ON or OFF and
automatic selection to OFF when the door is closed. Two pillar lights supply light for the hydraulic tank
level indicators. Electrical 28 VDC supply to both the light and power point socket is taken from busbar
PE through an ON/OFF switch on the structure adjacent to the bay door hinge.
The dome/exit light is a dual bulb unit (one general purpose, one emergency) above the MED header
panel. The control is from VEST LIGHTS switch on the interior lighting control panel left of the refuel
panel.
ENTRY
LIGHTS
AISLE
LIGHTS
VEST
LIGHTS
BRT
UP
LIGHTS
DIM
GALLEY
MASTER Refuel Panel
(Shown Open)
CABIN
LIGHTS
O’RIDE
Figure 6
Interior Lighting Control Panel
CAUTION: THE 450 WATT LANDING LIGHTS MUST BE USED ONLY IN FLIGHT CONDITIONS, OR ONLY
BRIEFLY ON THE GROUND TO CHECK FUNCTIONING. THE TRANSPARENT PANEL WILL
SUSTAIN HEAT DAMAGE.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Forward Extension
LOGO/ICE STROBE NAV BEACON L LANDING R
L T
O A
G X
O I
Figure 7
Exterior Lighting Control Panel
STROBE
LIGHT
LANDING LIGHTS
RIGHT LOGO
TAXI LIGHT FLOOD LIGHT
LANDING LIGHT (if installed)
LEFT LOGO
FLOOD LIGHT
(if installed)
NAVIGATION LIGHT
(WHITE)
STROBE LIGHT
BOARDING LIGHT
WING ICE INSPECTION SPOTLIGHT
(Same Right Side)
Figure 8
Exterior Lighting
The strobe lighting system consists of three flashing white condenser discharge strobe lights, three
power supply units (PSU's 1, 2 and 3) and a STROBE light control switch. The control switch is located
on the flight compartment overhead roof panel forward extension labelled STROBE - OFF.
NOTE: Turn off strobe light when taxiing near other airplanes or when flying in fog or clouds.
Standard position lights must be used for all night operations.
A strobe light is installed in each wing tip, and one on the rear fuselage extremity. Each strobe light is
connected to its own power supply unit.
All three PSU's are installed in the passenger cabin left side below the passenger seating. In operation
the lights flash simultaneously at 60 flashes per minute (±5 FPM at the rated voltage).
The boarding light is controlled by a switch on panel DA and a second switch on the forward vestibule
cabinet, labelled ROOF/STEP. The supply is taken from battery No. 1 so that it may be switched ON
without selection of the BATTERY master switch.
PULSE LIGHT
The pulse light is a four channel electrical switching device which connects to the external lighting
system of the airplane. The system operates by flashing the landing and nose taxi lights 45 times per
minute in a variety of patterns. Thus, creating an illusion of exaggerated motion that other pilots can
immediately recognize and avoid.
The pulse light may be utilized any time the pilot desires, although it is recommended that the landing
lights are switched to steady rate (full time) when the airplane is within 200 feet AGL at night. The pulse
light should not be operated in clouds at night or in close proximity of other airplanes on the ground,
due to possible pilot disorientation.
The pulse light is powered by 24/28 VDC with an amp load no greater than 25 AMPS per channel or
600 WATTS per channel.
PE Busbar
Navigation lights
Left wing landing light
Left wing taxi light
Vestibule/ground lights
PS1 Busbar
Left and right wing inspection spotlights
Strobe lights
Right nose taxi light
PS2 Busbar
Right wing landing light
Right wing taxi light
Anti-collision beacons
Tailplane flood lights
Left nose taxi light
Battery 1
Boarding light
GENERAL ..................................................................................................14-3
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT .........................................................................14-3
CREW SEATS .........................................................................................14-3
Figure 1 - Crew Seat ...........................................................................14-4
3rd CREW MEMBER SEAT ....................................................................14-5
Figure 2 - 3rd Crew Member Seat .......................................................14-5
CREW CABINET AREA ..........................................................................14-5
Figure 3 - Flight Compartment ............................................................14-6
Figure 4 - Flight Compartment Main Instrument Panels......................14-7
Figure 5 - Flight Compartment Overhead Roof Panels .......................14-8
Figure 6 - Flight Compartment (looking aft).........................................14-9
Figure 7 - Flight Compartment Side Consoles ..................................14-10
Figure 8 - Flight Compartment Center Pedestal................................14-11
GALLEY ...................................................................................................14-12
Figure 9 - Typical Galley ...................................................................14-12
PASSENGER CABIN...............................................................................14-13
Figure 10 - Typical Interior Layout.....................................................14-13
SEATING ARRANGEMENTS ...............................................................14-14
Figure 11 - Passenger Right Side Console Control...........................14-14
Figure 12 - Typical 3 Seat Divan .......................................................14-14
CARGO and ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT........................................14-15
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT................................................................14-15
MAIN RADIO/AVIONICS COMPARTMENTS .......................................14-15
Figure 13 - Cargo and Accessory Compartments .............................14-16
TOILET COMPARTMENT .......................................................................14-17
Figure 14 - Typical Toilet Compartment ............................................14-17
Due to individual customer requirements, the equipment and furnishings may vary from the standard
installation. This Sub-section provides the typical installation of a flight compartment, vestibule area,
passenger cabin, galley, toilet compartment and cargo and accessory compartments.
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
Stowages for miscellaneous flight and airplane equipment are provided in the left and right consoles
and on the flight compartment rear bulkheads. A tray is mounted in the structure below the pilot's seat
and can be swung out where it spans the area between both pilots' seats.
CREW SEATS
Seat Height Adjustment
Two crew seats, the pilot's and copilot‘s, are installed in the flight compartment and are adjustable for
height, fore and aft travel. Each seat is equipped with Teleflex inertia-reel type shoulder strap assembly
and lap belt. A life-jacket is stowed in a container mounted beneath each seat.
When the seat height adjustment handle is pulled upward, the height lock pins are disengaged from the
holes in the height lock plates. Spring tension, supplied by the two bungee cords, causes the seat to
rise.
When the adjustment handle is released, the height lock pins engage with holes in the height lock plates
to retain the seat pan in the required position.
When the seat occupant uses the rudder controls of the airplane and thereby applies pressure to the
thigh pads, the spring tension is overridden and the crosshead slide tubes are pushed into the slide
housing allowing the thigh pad to move downwards. When the pressure on the thigh pad is relaxed, the
pad returns to its pre-set position.
Application of pressure on the backrest rotates the threaded nut and allows the strut to be pushed into
the recline unit. The spring is compressed and the backrest reclines.
When the control handle is released, the spring-loaded latch plate re-engages with the coarse threaded
nut and the backrest is locked in the required position. If the control handle is again pulled upward, and
pressure released from the backrest, the spring, which was compressed by the recline operation, re-
asserts itself, causing the threaded nut to rotate in the opposite direction.
The strut pushes on the backrest, which returns to an upright position and is locked upon release of the
control handle.
A slot in the barrel of the adjuster screw takes up any height adjustment and allows the armrest to align
parallel to the seat back. When fully folded, the armrest is pushed in towards the center of the seat,
reducing the seat width. The outboard armrest may be raised to an almost vertical position where it will
be held by a friction clutch until returned to the horizontal position by the occupant.
As the relay arms rotate, the lumbar cushion moves forward or backward in relation to the spine
structure. The up-down movement of the back cushion is controlled by a handwheel on the left side of
the seat. When rotated, the worm and wheel assembly causes rotation of a vertical shaft and a screw
at the top of this shaft causes the crossbar to be raised or lowered, moving the back cushion to the
desired position.
Figure 1
Crew Seat
The seat is installed by engaging the seat slides with the crew seat rails, then locating the locking pin
holes in the seat rails and the seat slides, and then locking the pins into position.
Figure 2
3rd Crew Member Seat
F
S
L
A
N
D
I
N
G
G
E
A
R
M5874
HA00B995504AA
Figure 3
Flight Compartment
STANBY
HORIZON PUSH TO INHIB STALL IDENT
PUSH TO INHIB STALL IDENT
HORIZON 1 2 FAULT 3
1 2 FAULT 3 WARN
MWS IDENT 1 IDENT 2 IDENT 3 STALL STALL
IDENT 1 IDENT 2 SSU IDENT 3 STALL STALL DIM VALVE B BAG
SQUAT VALVE A
VALVE A VALVE B FAIL INHIB INHIB INHIB OPEN FIRE
CANCEL OPEN
INHIB INHIB FLAP INHIB OPEN OPEN
CPWS
FLAP TERR
STANBY STANBY
HORIZON OVRD INHIB
HORIZON
HORIZON HORIZON
WARN ALT CABIN CABIN
GS CALLS WARN HIGH HIGH
DATUM DATUM
INHIB INHIB
CANCEL CANCEL CABIN
TEMP
N GEAR CPWS
CPWS CPIT CAB
N GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
+ -
VHF1 VHF2 HF1
PA HF2 MODE RADIO 1 1 2 3 A B C D E F G 1 2 3 A B C D E F G PANEL 1 VHF 2 1 HF 2
SELCAL
MIC SELECT
1 VOR/ILS 2 1 ADF 2 PA OFF CDU AHS ADC VHF1 VHF2 HF1
NORM
ON
RADIO 1
4 5 6 H I J K L M N 4 5 6 H I J K L M N
AIR BRAKE
(ACP) PA HF2
NORM 1 VOR/ILS 2 1 ADF 2 PA OFF
1 DME 2 1 MKR 2 REV REV REV OFF 7 8 9 7 8 9
O P Q R S T U O P Q R S T U
EMERG SLEW FAN RADIO 2 0/ +/ - V W X Y Z / 0/ +/ - V W X Y Z / 1 DME 2 1 MKR 2
NORM
V
0
NORM PHONE I/C CABIN BOOM-MIC PFD MFD FAIL ON RH TRANSFER AHRS
I
C
E TONE SPKR-
PUSH
VOX-
PUSH
FLT OXY-MIC
REV REV L R
RADIO 2
OFF CDU AHS ADC + - MODE V
0
I
NORM PHONE I/C CABIN
EMERG
BOOM-MIC
PFD MFD
R PFD SLEW
ENG
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (ACP) OAT SMOKE DETECT TEST LH
IN
RH
IN
CAT II
ENABLE REV REV SELECT
Figure 4
Flight Compartment
Main Instrument Panels
Pilot’s Operating Manual Sub-section 14 Page 14-7
Revision A2: Nov, 2004 EQUIPMENT and FURNISHINGS
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
TEST
1 3 1 1 F/DK VLV
OPEN
STALL ENG HP AIR ICE CABIN VMO
ANNUN FIRE OVHT DET ALT EGPWS MMO AOA SELCAL
2 2 2
STOP
1
ALTERNATOR
ON 2
ENGINE START EMERG BATT 1 CHG ON ON MAN
EMERG CLOSE
ENG 1 ARM ENG 2 EMERG A
LTS LTS R S/N 258577 AND AFTER
PWR ON ON
MASTER M
ON
OPERATING PUSH FOR OPERATING
ABORT
OFF
DETAIL A
OFF BATT 2 OFF OFF OFF
OFF DC POWER 0-40
AC POWER
P
L SCREEN R SCREEN ALTR 1 ALTR 2 ENG 1 ENG 2 REFUEL BATT 1
FAIL FUEL FUEL ON CNCTR AMPS AMPS AMPS
OVHT OVHT FAIL XS 1 XE XS 2
L VANE R VANE SIDE SCRN ICE AUX FUEL WING FUEL REAR BAY BATT 2 BATT FAIL FAIL
FAIL
HTR FAIL HTR FAIL OVHT DETECTED TFR XFD/TFR DOOR CNCTR INV 2
P INV 1 STBV INV
L PITOT R PITOT ANTICE ANTICE FUEL 1 FUEL 2 GEN 1 BUSTIE GEN 2 FAIL ON FAIL
IGN ON
FAIL FAIL LO PRESS LO QTY LO PRESS LO PRESS FAIL OPEN FAIL
GEN 1 BUSTIE GEN 2 DC VOLTS AC VOLTS INV 1 STBY INV INV 2 NO SMKG
WING/TAIL ANTICE ICE DET L PUMP R PUMP ARM AUTO
CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE START START
AUTO ON ON
VOLTS VOLTS
AMPS O OFF
F
F
PE B5 XE
PS1 PS2 B4 B6 XS1 XS2
TRIP OPEN TRIP STOP OFF STOP ON
PITOT AMPS OVRD EMERG EMERG ELECTRICAL PANEL
L R DIM
B1 B2 B3 OFF
F/DK VLV MAIN AIR VLV
SCREEN HEAT PITOT/VANE HEAT ENG ANTICE ENG IGNITION ENG CMPTR ENG SYNC CABIN XFER OPEN 2
1 OPEN
L ON R L ON R 1 ON 2 1 ON 2 1 AUTO 2 N1 CABIN CABIN FAN PRESSN
CABIN TEMP
FLOOD FLOOR ON OVRD DUCT TEMP AUTO
OPEN OPEN LP
O ON
F N2 INSTR
F TEMP TEMP DIM
CLOSE CLOSE
OFF OFF OFF OFF OVSPD PROT OFF COOL HOT
CLOSE CLOSE OFF AUTO MANUAL
Figure 5
Flight Compartment
Overhead Roof Panels
Page 14-8 Sub-section 14 Pilot’s Operating Manual
EQUIPMENT and FURNISHINGS Revision A2: Nov, 2004
WANDER
WANDER LIGHT STALL IDENT
STORM LAMP
STORM LIGHT PASSENGER OXYGEN
LAMP SWITCH
SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC PANEL
SUPPLY VALVE
HEADSET
SUB PANEL A
SUB PANEL D WANDER STOWAGE HOOK
WANDER LIGHT
SOCKET
LAMP SOCKET
ENTRY LIGHT
SWITCH
CRASH
AXE
Figure 6
TRAY
Sub-section 14
EQUIPMENT and FURNISHINGS
Flight Compartment (looking aft)
RADIO AND
ELECTRONIC
LIFE JACKET STOWAGE EQUIPMENT
SUN VISORS STOWAGE
RUDDER GUST LOCK/AUXILIARY
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM HANDPUMP WARNING HORN
HANDLE STOWAGE
V8636_1.AI
LIFE JACKET STOWAGE
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Page 14-9
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
AIR OUTLET
AIR OUTLET
AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL AUDIO SELECTOR PANEL
NAV / COMM
CVR-120 CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
MANUAL CABIN
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL
ALTITUDE CONTROL
INCREASE
GROUND
TEST
DECREASE
NORMAL
PITOT ISOLATION
ISOLATE
DEPRESS
TO OPERATE
L GEAR R GEAR NORMAL
A
M5900
HA00B995531AA
Figure 7
Flight Compartment Side Consoles
HANDLE S
Y
S
T
E
M
SMOKE
AIR BRAKES OAT WHEEL
PUSH
FWD BRAKE
FUEL
TEMP 1 2
ON ON ON
SOCKET FOR
EMERGENCY HYDRAULIC ELEVATOR OFF OFF O
TRIM A RUDDER BIAS B
HAND PUMP NOSE DOWN
35
ELEVATOR TRIM T0 25
SHUT
CG 1/2
A
15
HAND WHEEL I
R
B
R
A
K PAGE ADV
RUDDER TRIM NOSE UP
E
FLAPS
o LINE ADV
0
RUDDER TRIM
OPEN o CKLST
15
ON/OFF
o
25
o
45
AILERON TRIM
FLAPS
AUXILIARY FUEL
TRANSFER CONTROL H.P. COCKS
Figure 8
Flight Compartment Center Pedestal
The galley is located on the left side of the airplane aft of the entry door and consists of liquid containers,
hot cup, decanter rack, drain dish, ice drawer, glasses drawer, cold food box, hot meal oven, waste bin
and various drawers and cupboards.
Electrical supplies are provided to the oven, hot cup, hot beverage container, drain heater and
refreshment cabinet light. The drain dish is connected to an overboard drain. A heater is attached to the
drain pipe immediately inboard of the drain exit from the fuselage. Control of the galley functions is
provided by a galley switch panel located on the upper left of the galley.
PULL OUT
WORK
SANDWICH SURFACE UTENSILS
TRAY
CONDIMENTS
DRAWER
MISC.
MISCELLANEOUS
STORAGE
STORAGE ICE / COLD
STORAGE
PLATES WASTE
WINE / SPIRITS
NAPKINS
STORAGE
M6356_0
BOWLS HA03C
SODA CANS 014655AA.
Figure 9
Typical Galley
Figure 10
Typical Interior Layout
Forward
Figure 11
Passenger Right Side Console Control
A three-seat divan comprises a base assembly with seat cushions, back cushions and a safety lap/
shoulder belt assembly at each seat position. The base assembly is attached to the floor and sidewall
seat rails. The two outer back cushions are attached to the sidewall by velcro tape while the center back
cushion can be hinged forward to double as a table. Fixed arm rests are attached at both ends of the
base assembly with a small stowage compartment being provided in the divan base.
LAP/SHOULDER BELT ASSEMBLIES
M6357_0
HA03C
014656AA.AI
Figure 12
Typical 3 Seat Divan
Page 14-14 Sub-section 14 Pilot’s Operating Manual
EQUIPMENT and FURNISHINGS Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
CARGO and ACCESSORY COMPARTMENTS
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
A luggage compartment is installed in the vestibule area of all airplanes, with luggage retained within
the compartment by a zip fastened nylon net. The compartment is normally enclosed by a folding slat
type curtain.
A loading label, giving each compartments capacity and maximum floor loadings, is attached to the
interior trim panels.
Luggage Compartment
The radio compartment under the luggage compartment is concealed by trim panels which can be
removed for maintenance purposes.
Wing Fairing
Equipment in the wing fairing avionics rack is accessible by removing two panels on the fairing
underside.
Figure 13
Cargo and Accessory Compartments
The typical toilet compartment consists of a console assembly, flushing toilet with a fore and aft
positioned toilet services bulkhead. Access is provided to the rear baggage compartment and the
avionics compartment from within the toilet compartment.
The washbasin console is installed on the right side and incorporates washing facilities, provision for
toilet requisites and the filling point for the wash water tank.
The toilet service’s bulkhead forms the mounting structure for a hinged mirror (to provide access to an
avionics compartment/baggage compartment), an electric razor stowage socket and switch, an air
louver, mirror lamps and switch.
Electrical supplies to the razor socket are taken via a static inverter mounted in the avionics
compartment behind the hinged mirror. Water is pumped from a heated water tank below the wash
basin.
AIR LOUVER
Figure 14
Typical Toilet Compartment
• Flight compartment
• Crew Cabinet
• Passenger cabin
• Toilet compartment
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
The location, number of and composition of the emergency equipment varies according to the
furnishing options chosen and the floorplan.
The following, is a list of the emergency equipment and the typical compartments/areas in which
they are stored.
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
• Lifejackets: One beneath each crew seat.
• Portable Fire Extinguisher (BCF TYPE 34H): Secured to left bulkhead behind the pilot seat.
• Combination Oxygen Mask and Goggles: One above each side console.
VESTIBULE
• Third Crew Member Lifejacket: Stowed in the crew cabinet.
PASSENGER CABIN
• Lifejackets: One in a pocket under each fore and aft facing passenger seat. Three in 3 seat divan
under the forward two seat cushions.
• Protective Breathing Equipment: One in the underfloor document compartment between the crew
seats.
TOILET COMPARTMENT
• First Aid Kit: Stowed behind toilet backrest.
The ELT is a compact self powered emergency locating transmitter designed to activate
automatically under disabling emergency conditions, or manually from the cabin to summon assistance
in other than a disabling emergency condition. The system operates on the international distress
frequencies of 121.5 MHz, 243.0 MHz and 406.025 MHz. In operation, the ELT transmits a down sweep
audio tone at approximately three sweeps per second.
The transmitter is self powered by an alkaline battery and is mounted inside the tailcone. An impact
switch automatically activates the transmitter following a 5g nominal impact along the flight axis
of the airplane. Power output is 50 mW effective radiated power on each frequency.
Controls permit a remote test and reset with manual activation remotely or from the transmitter
mounted switch.
A three position, guarded switch is installed in the transmitter. For normal automatic operation, this
switch is set to the ARM position. The transmitter can be tested by setting the ARM-OFF-ON switch to
the ON position. This should be done with the antenna connected, and only within the first 5 minutes of
an hour for a maximum of three pulses (see FAA Advisory Circular No. 4313, Chapter 12, paragraph
21).
An ELT remote control switch, located on the left side of the copilot’s instrument panel, has three
positions which are placarded ON, ARM and RESET. The remote control unit switch has a guard to
prevent inadvertent activation. To operate, the switch lever is pulled up and pushed to the RESET or ON
position. To reset the transmitter impact switch in case of inadvertent activation, set the remote switch
to RESET and then back to ARM.
The tip of the remote control unit switch has a red light emitting diode. The LED will illuminate
continuously any time the ELT is transmitting. A slowly flashing red light indicates that the transmitter is
OFF or that the transmitter battery pack must be replaced. A quickly flashing red light indicates that the
remote control unit battery must be replaced.
NOTE: Whenever the transmitter is turned off, the remote will not sense the transmitter battery pack.
The remote will flash slowly to warn the pilot that the transmitter is incapable of sending a
rescue signal.
The PBE is installed for use by crew members in the event of fire or smoke from cabin furnishings or
equipment, other than from electrical/electronic sources, producing burning dripping plastic with toxic
fumes. The PBE gives breathing protection for a minimum duration of 15 minutes.
The PBE unit consists of a loose fitting double layered hood constructed of Teflon coated fiberglass
cloth with an overhood of Kynol fabric, a polysulfone housing assembly, a clear visor, an elastic
neoprene neck seal, a scrubber unit and a life support pack.
The PBE unit is stored in a sealed fire retardent polyethylene case which is located in the underfloor
document compartment between the crew seats.
When the Pull To Actuate ring is removed from the unit, chemical decomposition occurs within the solid
state oxygen supply (generator) liberating O2 which is fed through the primary flow nozzle of the venturi.
This creates a gas flow from the hood through the scrubber unit, which removes excess moisture and
particulates, which is then mixed with the low pressure oxygen in the venturi and fed back into the hood.
Any surplus gas is vented from the hood through a vent valve, which is installed in the scrubber unit.
SOLID STATE
OXYGEN SUPPLY
PULL TO ACTUATE (GENERATOR)
RING
RELIEF
VALVE
HOOD
OXYGEN
VENTURI NOZZLE FLOW
TO HOOD
HOOD
EXHALATION
GAS FLOW
FILTER
VENT SCRUBBER M6358_0
VALVE HA03C
014657AA.AI
Figure 1
Protective Breathing Equipment
The water and waste system consists of a basin with heated running water located in a lavatory at the
rear of the passenger cabin and an electrically flushing toilet with external servicing facilities.
WATER SYSTEM
Wash water is stored in a 2.3 gallon heated water tank with a water pump controlled by operation of the
faucet.
• The high-level switch contacts are closed when the tank is full and open immediately the float starts
to fall.
• The low level switch contacts open when the minimum water level (just above the elements) is
reached to isolate water heater power supplies preventing overheating of the elements.
Electrical power for the water pump is normally provided from busbar PS2 through the GALLEY
POWER and TOILET WASH WATER switches on the galley switch panel. For ground operation, the
system may be connected to the No. 1 battery through the ROOF/STEP light switch selected to the ON
position. Pushing the drain button allows the basin contents to drain away to a heated overboard drain
mast.
With the heated water tank, the water temperature is thermostatically controlled to approximately 100°
by factory setting and cannot be adjusted. The water tank has a spigot and tube assembly located on
the front face of the tank to deliver the water to a cup or glass.
When the GALLEY MASTER switch on the interior lighting control panel is pushed, the galley busbar
is connected to the PE busbar and indicated by the illumination of a small LED in the top left corner of
the switch. This provides a power supply, via circuit breakers, for the galley electrical equipment.
REFUEL PANEL
PULL OUT
WORK
SANDWICH SURFACE UTENSILS
TRAY
CONDIMENTS
DRAWER
MISC.
MISCELLANEOUS
STORAGE
STORAGE ICE / COLD
STORAGE
PLATES WASTE
WINE / SPIRITS
NAPKINS
STORAGE
BOWLS
SODA CANS
Figure 1
Galley Master Switch and Typical Galley
Operation of the flushing system is by a PRESS TO FLUSH timer button on the vanity unit. Electrical
power is normally provided from PS2 busbar and selection of the ROOF LIGHT switch (panel DA, top
inboard face) or the ROOF/STEP LIGHT switch (forward vestibule cabinet, rear face) to ON connects a
battery No. 1 supply to the coil of the entry lights relay.
Operating the PRESS TO FLUSH timer button will connect the power supply to the motor-driven
flushing pump and rotating filter for approximately 8 seconds. Flushing liquid cascades in a thin curtain
over the complete inner surface of the toilet bowl from the flushing channel surrounding the upper rim
of the bowl. Waste is carried directly to the tank and prevented from re-entry by means of a restrictor in
the bottom of the bowl. Flushing liquid is filtered out of the tank through a self-cleaning rotary filter and
pumped up to the flush channel (reference Figure 4).
VIEW OF TYPICAL
LAVATORY
M6359_0
HA03C
014658AA.AI
Figure 2
Typical Toilet Compartment
DRAIN VALVE
ASSEMBLY
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION
BOWL
MOTOR-PUMP
-FILTER
CARTRIDGE
ASSEMBLY
GROUND FLUSH
INLET
M6360_0
HA03C
014659AA.AI
Figure 3
Typical Toilet with External Servicing Facility
DETAIL A
Figure 4
Toilet Ground Servicing
This Sub-section provides general information of the systems with expanded information on the
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS). For expanded information on other avionics
systems components and operating procedures, refer to the Hawker 800XP Collins Pro Line 21
Avionics System Pilot’s Guide, P/N 523-0780409-001117.
TEST
1 3 1 1
STALL ENG HP AIR ICE CABIN VMO
ANNUN FIRE OVHT DET ALT EGPWS MMO AOA SELCAL
2 2 2
Figure 1
Push-To-Test Panel
The system consists of four 8" X 10" color composite Adaptive Flight Displays (AFD). These AFDs are
provided as two Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and two Multifunction Displays (MFD).
Each PFD displays airplane attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical speed, flight guidance system
annunciations and navigation data on a single integrated display. The PFD also provides engine or fuel
and flaps display information when selected in reversionary mode.
The upper region of the PFD is used to present the basic "T" instruments, an Attitude Director Indicator
(ADI), altitude scale, airspeed scale and vertical speed scale. Flight guidance system mode information
displays in the area above the ADI.
The lower region of the PFD is used to present a Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) with a full compass
rose or partial compass arc, as selected by the pilot. Map format is available in revisionary mode.
Weather radar or EGPWS information can be overlaid on the partial arc format or map format. The
space to either side of the HSI format is used to present a lateral navigation data field, a weather radar
mode field, EGPWS mode field, system messages and selected menus.
The area along the bottom of the PFD is used to present radio tuning, time and temperature displays.
Normal control, reversion and warning annunciations are also presented. In the case of a failed AFD,
either the PFD or the MFD can be manually reverted to a composite MFD/PFD format. This format
presentation includes Engine Indicating System (EIS) displays across the top of the format and the
basic "T" information presented below.
Line select keys are provided on each side of the displays and are used to control the basic display
formats. The bezel mounted line select keys along with the Display Control Panel (DCP) and Flight
Guidance Panel (FGP) provide primary pilot interface to control the PFD and MFD. Control of the radar,
NAV sources and bearing pointers is through the DCP and the PFD line select keys. Control of the
course, preselect heading, altitude and speed references is through the Flight Guidance Panel (FGP).
The DCPs are located on the glareshield panels directly above the respective PFD/MFDs they normally
control. The DCP, when combined with the line select keys on the PFD, provides control of the Weather
Radar, NAV source, bearing pointers, V speeds, BARO Minimums (Barometric Altitude-based Minimum
Descent Altitude) and RA Minimums (Radio Altitude-based Decision Height Minimums).
Command of the Flight Guidance System is accomplished by using the lateral and vertical mode select
switches, VS/pitch wheel, autopilot switches, FD switches and various control knobs of the FGP along
with the yoke mounted synchronization (SYNC), autopilot disconnect (AP DISC), and go-around (GA)
switches.
Attitude reference, heading reference, airspeed reference, vertical speed reference and VS pitch
reference are also controlled from the FGP.
The CDUs are used to control the Radio Sensor System (RSS) and provide integrated control of several
combinations of airplane communications (including a normal means of radio tuning) and navigation
radio subsystems.
STANBY
HORIZON PUSH TO INHIB STALL IDENT
PUSH TO INHIB STALL IDENT HORIZON 1 2 FAULT 3
1 2 WARN
FAULT 3 MWS STALL
IDENT 1 IDENT 2 IDENT 3 STALL
STALL STALL DIM SQUAT VALVE A VALVE B BAG
IDENT 1 IDENT 2 SSU IDENT 3
FAIL INHIB INHIB OPEN FIRE
VALVE A VALVE B CANCEL INHIB OPEN
INHIB INHIB FLAP INHIB OPEN OPEN
CPWS
FLAP TERR
STANBY STANBY
HORIZON OVRD INHIB
HORIZON
HORIZON ALT HORIZON CABIN CABIN
WARN GS WARN
CALLS HIGH HIGH
DATUM DATUM
INHIB INHIB
CANCEL CANCEL CABIN
TEMP
N GEAR CPWS
CPWS CPIT CAB
N GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
L GEAR R GEAR
PA
MIC SELECT
VHF1 VHF2 HF1
HF2
NORM
NORM REV REV REV
RADIO 1 4 5 6 H I J K L M N 4 5 6 H I J K L M N 1 VOR/ILS 2 1 ADF 2 PA OFF
1 DME 2 1 MKR 2
OFF AIR BRAKE
7 8 9 O P Q R S T U 7 8 9 O P Q R S T U NORM
EMERG SLEW FAN RADIO 2
1 DME 2 1 MKR 2
V
NORM PHONE I/C CABIN BOOM-MIC PFD MFD FAIL ON 0/ +/ - V W X Y Z / 0/ +/ - V W X Y Z / RH TRANSFER AHRS
+ -
0 EMERG
I
C
E TONE SPKR- VOX- FLT OXY-MIC
REV REV L R
RADIO 2
OFF CDU AHS ADC
MODE V
0
NORM PHONE I/C CABIN BOOM-MIC
PUSH PUSH I
Figure 2
Main Instrument Panels
P/N 140-590032-0007 Section III Sub-section 17 Page 17-5
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
AVIONICS
Pilot’s Operating Manual
L
A
N
D
I
N
G
G
E
A
R
BARO MENU ADV TILT RANGE
PUSH PUSH
PUSH
MENU AUTO
STD
SET TILT
Collins
MWS
F CVR
MIKE
S FD BARS
<
GLARESHIELD
PANEL
+
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANELS INST DISPLAYS
CONSOLE
PAD PANEL DIGIT
MIC ATC
KEY IDENT
PANEL LTS
FLOOD EMERG
OFF
STORM
CVR
MIKE
F MWS
FD BARS
S
ANNUN GLARESHIELD
<
BRT PANEL
+ DIM
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PANELS INST DISPLAYS
CONSOLE
PANEL PAD
ENGINE REFS NAV / BRG RADAR GCS
ATC MIC
IDENT KEY PEDESTAL
M5877/2
DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL HA00B995508AA
Figure 3
Glareshield Control Panels
Page 17-6 Section III Sub-section 17 P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
AVIONICS
Pilot’s Operating Manual
FLIGHT GUIDANCE SYSTEM (FGS)
The FGS provides autopilot and dual flight guidance functions by utilizing two identical computers, three
primary servos, a pitch trim servo and a flight guidance panel.
The Flight Guidance Computers (FGC) receive Attitude Heading System (AHS) data directly from the
Attitude Heading Computer (AHC) to provide independent flight guidance computation while operating
together to provide 3-axis autopilot, pitch trim, Mach trim and yaw damper functions.
The two FGCs apply differential autopilot command drive to each primary servo to move the airplane
elevator, aileron and rudder control surfaces.
The AHS supplies attitude, stabilized magnetic or free gyro heading and linear acceleration data to the
Flight Guidance System, Electronic Flight Instrument System, Integrated Avionics Processor System
and Weather Radar System.
The AHCs are functionally and physically isolated from each other and replace the conventional vertical
gyro, directional gyro, three rate gyros, and three linear accelerometers. The AHS has two operational
modes, slaved and Directional Gyro (DG) mode.
The FMC is a lateral and vertical navigator used by the autopilot to fly a programmed flight plan and
provides coupled VNAV, NAV-to-NAV capture, navaid data base storage and several control/planning
functions.
The Data Base Unit is a data loader used primarily to load monthly data base updates to the FMC and
to load and download maintenance data from the MDC maintenance computer.
The EIS consists of four Data Concentration Units (DCUs). Two units are wired as DCUs and two units
are wired as Engine Data Concentrators (EDCs).
The DCUs transfer airplane sensor information (analog fuel flow, strut status, etc.) to the IAPS
concentrators while transferring caution/warning advisory information from the Flight Control
Computers to the annunciators. The EDUs also provide redundant engine data to the displays.
Mode Description
The basic weather detection mode. Depicts areas of precipita-
WX tion with four different colors, determined by reflectivity
(Weather) Mode strength.
The system interrogates Mode C and Mode S transponders in nearby aircraft and a computer analyzes
their replies to identify potential and predicted collision threats. The system advises the pilot when to
climb, descend or maintain altitude to avoid passing too close to the threat aircraft.
Resolution maneuvers between aircraft equipped with TCAS II are automatically co-ordinated by the
use of Mode S data link communication. The system provides two types of flight compartment displays
to the EFIS and aural alerts to the airplane audio system.
Figure 4
Component Locations
The system consists of two Audio Control Panels (ACP) which command two digital audio control
amplifiers and an audio interphone amplifier for signal processing. The ACPs also command a
passenger speaker amplifier which provides the Seat Belt and No Smoking sign chime tones and also
allows the flight crew to address the passengers. An aural warning generator is installed which provides
aural warnings to both digital audio control amplifiers.
The power supply for No. 1 ACP is provided by the PE busbar through the AUDIO 1 CTL circuit breaker.
The power supply for No. 2 ACP is provided by the PS2 busbar through the AUDIO 2 CTL circuit
breaker.
For aircraft with KIT 149-3410 installed, the power supply for No. 1 and No. 2 ACPs are provided by the
PE busbar through the AUDIO 1 CTL and AUDIO 2 CTL circuit breakers.
HF Radio Transmissions
Hawker Beechcraft Corporation considers the following indication fluctuations to be normal and
acceptable providing that the indications return to a normal reading when the HF radio transmission
ceases (the interference should be noted by the Flight Crew, but it is not considered to be detrimental
to flight safety):
• Fuel quantity indications may increase, depending on frequency set and amount of fuel
in the tanks.
• Flight deck or cabin indications/indicators (i.e. oil temperature, oil pressure, flap position,
cabin/duct temperature and OAT, etc.).
• N1 indications.
• N2 indications.
• ITT indications.
• No fluctuations are permitted in navigational indications (i.e. VOR, LOC, GPS, Glide Slope, etc.)
except as permitted in the Airplane Flight Manual Section 2 - LIMITATIONS.
SELCAL
1 VHF 2 HF MIC SELECT
OFF
OFF PA
HF VHF1
VHF2 VHF2
1 VOR/ILS 2 ADF
VHF1 HF
PA OFF
OFF
1 DME 2 1 MKR 2 PA
NORM Standard ACP Installation
EMERG
NORM PHONE I/C AUTOCOM BOOM-MIC
M8504_0.AI
SELCAL
1 VHF 2 1 HF 2 MIC SELECT
OFF
HF2 PA
HF1 VHF1
VHF2 VHF2
1 VOR/ILS 2 1 ADF 2 Optional ACP installation
VHF1 HF1
PA HF2
based on requested
OFF
NORM
Optional Customer Equipment
1 DME 2 1 MKR 2 PA
M8503_0.AI
Figure 5
Audio Control Panel (ACP)
P/N 140-590032-0007 Section III Sub-section 17 Page 17-11
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
AVIONICS
Pilot’s Operating Manual
ACP Operation
Control Function
Control Function
Microphone Jacks
There are two identical microphone jack assemblies which are mounted by the left and right side
consoles. They are used to interface the pilot’s headset and microphones with the airplane
communication and navigation systems. A stowage boot and microphone jack are also provided on
each pilot’s control yoke for operation and stowage of the hand mic.
The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning Computer (EGPWC) combines data input from the
Integrated Avionics Processor System (IAPS) and the Global Positioning System (GPS) into a flight
profile which is analyzed with regard to radio altitude. Depending on the flight mode, airspeed and
absolute altitude, the computer generates voice and visual cautions and warnings based on pre-
programmed values and airplane performance specifications.
The EGPWC receives inputs from the Angle of Attack (AOA) and Stick Shaker Margin with other
discrete inputs to calculate the minimum safe altitude. The EGPWC also has Envelope Modulation and
Aural Declutter. The Envelope Modulation is an automatic feature which tailors the operation of the
EGPWS at certain locations to reduce nuisance warnings and/or give added protection. The Aural
Declutter feature reduces the repetition of the warning messages.
EGPWS Features
The EGPWS system has 7 operating modes, all of which are controlled by switching logic based upon
radio altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, landing gear, flap position and terrain closure.
The EGPWC can detect and warn of both increasing and decreasing performance windshears and also
compute the Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF) when the airplane is on approach, using high resolution
terrain database grids.
The TCF is usually computed at 700 ft Above Ground Level (AGL) until the airplane is within 15 nautical
miles (nm) from the airport. The TCF then slopes over the next 3 nm from 700 ft AGL to 400 ft AGL.
This level extends from 12 nm to 4 nm from the airport. The TCF then slopes from 400 ft AGL to 0 ft to
let the airplane land. Adjacent to the runway the TCF alert envelope is limited to a minimum of 245 ft
AGL.
The Terrain Awareness Display (TAD) gives an image of the surrounding terrain on the Weather Radar
screen using green, yellow and red dots in differing densities. This display is generated by the EGPWC
which compares the terrain data to the position and altitude of the airplane, if no terrain data is available
the area is colored magenta.
When a "CAUTION TERRAIN" alert is generated, approximately 60 seconds before a potential conflict,
areas within ± 90° of the airplane track which enter the terrain caution envelope are shown as solid
yellow areas.
When a "TERRAIN TERRAIN PULL UP" warning is generated, approximately 30 seconds before a
potential conflict, areas of terrain within ± 90° of the airplane track which enter the terrain warning
envelope are shown as solid red areas.
15NM
12NM
4NM
400 700
30
M6914_0
TCF ALERT ENVELOPE HA00C
016398AA
Figure 6
Terrain Clearance Floor Alert Envelope
245 FT
CONVENTIONAL TCF
CONVENTIONAL TCF
BIAS FACTOR
BIAS FACTOR
700' AGL 45§
400' AGL RUNWAY
TERRAIN TERRAIN
4 NM 12 NM 15 NM
245 FT
M6915_0
HA00C
016399AA.AI
Figure 7
Improved Terrain Clearance Floor Envelope
NOTE: The basic EGPWS modes 1-6 and windshear mode 7 remain active when the Terrain
Awareness Alerting is manually inhibited.
Peaks and obstacles are two supplemental features of TAD. Peaks provides additional terrain display
features for enhanced situational awareness, independent of the airplane’s altitude. This includes digital
elevations for the highest and lowest displayed terrain and additional elevation (color) bands.
The obstacles feature utilizes an obstacle database for obstacle conflict alerting and display. EGPWS
caution and warning visual and audio alerts are provided when a conflict is detected. Also, when TAD
is enabled, obstacles are graphically displayed similar to terrain.
A Runway Field Clearance Floor (RFCF) feature is also included. This is similar to the TCF feature
except that RFCF is based on the current airplane position and height above the destination runway
using Geometric Altitude (in lieu of Radio Altitude) and provides improved protection at locations where
the surrounding terrain is significantly lower than the runway. Reference Figure 8 for a depiction of the
Runway Field Clearance Floor Envelope.
Geometric Altitude is a computed pseudo-barometric altitude, based on the GPS altitude, which is
designed to reduce or eliminate altitude errors resulting from temperature extremes, non-standard
pressure altitude conditions and altimeter miss-sets.
Self Test
The EGPWS performs a self test each time power is applied to the computer and when manually
selected. Any failures during the self test are annunciated to the pilots both visually and aurally.
Switches/Annunciators
Annunciators and switches (external to the EGPWS) control and annunciate the status of the various
modes of the EGPWS. There are four switches/annunciators located on the Center Instrument Panel
between the pilot’s and copilot’s MFD. Refer to Figure 2. Located in the overhead control panel is the
EGPWS TEST pushbutton. Refer to Figure 1.
1. EGPWS TEST — Not a light. Momentary push button to initiate system self-test.
2. FLAP OVRD — Background illuminates white when flap warnings disabled. Alternate action button
to override or restore mode 2 and mode 4 flap warnings.
3. GS INHIB — Background illuminates white when glideslope is inhibited. Momentary push switch
to inhibit or restore glideslope mode 5 warning.
4. TERR INHIB — Background illuminates white when terrain display is inhibited. Pressing the TERR
INHIB switch inhibits TAD and TCF alerting and display, including Obstacles and Peaks when
enabled. This is used when position accuracy is inadequate or when operating at airports not in
the database. Neither loss nor inhibiting TAD/TCF effects the basic GPWS functions (modes 1-7).
5. ALT CALLS INHIB — Background illuminates white when altitude call outs inhibited. Momentary
push switch to inhibit mode 6 altitude callouts.
5.0NM
(1.5 + KRF) NM (OUTER LIMIT)
KRF
FIELD RFCF
ELEVATION ALERT AREA
RUNWAY
END
(NO LOWER LIMIT)
RFCF ALERT ENVELOPE
5500
5000
4500
4000
RWY
3000
2500
1500
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DISTANCE TO CENTER OF RUNWAY (NM) M6916_0
HA00C
016400AA.AI
Figure 8
Runway Field Clearance Floor Envelope
If the airplane flight profile goes into the alert envelope, the EGPWS
PULL UP annunciator illuminates and the "SINKRATE" voice warning is
heard. If the airplane flight profile goes into the warning envelope, the
PULL UP annunciator stays on and the voice warning changes to a
continuous "PULL UP".
Upon going out of the Mode 1 envelope, the voice message stops and
the PULL UP annunciator extinguishes.
MODE 2 This mode is active for all phases of flight and airplane configurations.
Terrain Closure Rate The Mode 2 warning envelope changes with airplane speed and
Warning configuration and has two sub-modes:
• Mode 2A is active when the flaps are in any position other than
landing and the airplane is not on the glideslope centerline.
• Mode 2B is active when the flaps are in the landing position or when
ILS is in use and the airplane is on the glideslope with less than 2
dots deviation.
When the airplane flight profile goes into either the Mode 2A or 2B
envelope, the PULL UP annunciator illuminates and the "TERRAIN
TERRAIN" voice warning sounds. After the "TERRAIN TERRAIN"
warning, one of three results will occur:
2. If the flight profile stays in the warning envelope and the flaps or gear
are not in the landing configuration, a continuous "WHOOP
WHOOP" tone and "PULL UP" message is heard until the airplane
goes out of the Mode 2 warning envelope.
3. If the flight profile stays in the warning envelope and the flaps and
gear are in the landing configuration, the "TERRAIN TERRAIN"
message continues until the airplane goes out of the Mode 2
warning envelope.
Upon going out of the Mode 2 warning envelope, the voice messages
stop and the PULL UP annunciator extinguishes.
If the airplane flight profile goes into the Mode 3 warning envelope, the
PULL UP annunciator illuminates and the "DON’T SINK" voice warning
sounds. The PULL UP annunciator stays on and the "DON’T SINK"
message continues until the airplane gets a positive rate of climb.
Upon going out of the Mode 3 warning envelope, the voice messages
stop and the PULL UP annunciator extinguishes.
MODE 4 This mode is active when the radio altimeter indicates 30 ft AGL or
Alert To more. Modes 4A and 4B alert the flight crew to insufficient terrain
Insufficient Terrain clearance during cruise and approach. Mode 4C alerts the flight crew to
Clearance insufficient terrain clearance during takeoff or go-around.
• Mode 4A is active when the landing gear is UP, and the EGPWS is
in the approach mode. If the airplane flight profile goes into the
Mode 4A warning envelope at less than 190 kts, the PULL UP
annunciator illuminates and the continuous "TOO LOW GEAR"
warning sounds.
If the flight profile goes into the Mode 4A warning envelope at more
than 190 kts, the "TOO LOW TERRAIN" warning sounds and the
PULL UP annunciator illuminates.
Upon going out of the warning envelopes, the voice warnings stop and
the PULL UP annunciator extinguishes.
If the airplane flight profile goes into the alert envelope, the soft
"GLIDESLOPE" warning sounds and the GLIDESLOPE annunciator
illuminates.
If the airplane flight profile goes into the warning envelope, the loud
"GLIDESLOPE" warning sounds and the GLIDESLOPE annunciator
illuminates.
Upon going out of the Mode 5 alert or warning envelope, the voice
messages stop and the GLIDESLOPE annunciator extinguishes.
If the airplane bank angle exceeds the maximum allowable bank angle
above 150 ft AGL, the "BANK ANGLE BANK ANGLE" voice warning
sounds with a ¾ second pause between the warnings. Upon rolling
back below the maximum allowable bank angle the voice messages
stop.
"BANK ANGLE BANK ANGLE" will sound again if the roll attitude
increases by 20%. When the roll attitude increases to 40% above the
first callout angle "BANK ANGLE" sounds continuously.
MODE 7 This mode is active for windshear detection during takeoff mode from
Windshear Detection rotation to 1500 ft AGL or if the airplane is reconfigured for landing. The
mode is also active for windshear detection during approach or
go-around modes when the radio altitude is between 1500 ft and 10 ft
AGL. The EGPWS can detect both increasing performance windshears
(e.g. increasing headwind, decreasing tailwind, updraft), as well as
decreasing performance windshears (e.g. decreasing headwind,
increasing tailwind, downdraft).
The pitot-static system pressure lines and components are shown in a block diagram on Figure 1.
PITOT HEADS
Two pitot heads are mounted, one on each side of the fuselage nose and provide independent supplies
of pitot pressure to the following:
Static 5 (S5)
• Air Data Computer No. 1
Static 6 (S6)
• Air Data Computer No. 2
• Stall Detectors
STATIC VENTS
Static vents are provided on each side of the aft fuselage (static vents 8 & 9, reference Figure 1). These
static vents are respectively connected and provide static pressure to the following:
Static 8 (S8)
• Electronic Standby Instrument System (ESIS) Air Data Unit
Static 9 (S9)
• Cabin Differential Pressure Indicator
• Additional Equipment Connections
With the valve in the NORMAL position, P2 pitot pressure is supplied from the right pitot head to all relevant
instruments and equipment.
Operating the valve from NORMAL to ISOLATE maintains P2 pitot pressure to the Air Data Computer
No. 2 and the ESIS Air Data Unit but isolates the stall detectors and any additional equipment (reference
Figure 1).
STALL VENTS
A stall vent is mounted under each wing and interconnected by pressure lines to the two stall detectors
(reference Figure 1).
S6
No. 1 No. 2
Left Air Data Air Data Right
Pitot Computer Computer Pitot
Head Head
ESIS
Air Data Unit
S9
S8 P2
P1
Stall Ident P2
(Autopilot Disconnected)
Pitot
Isolation
V
Valve
Stall P2
Detector P P2
S Connections for
Additional Equipment
S9
S6
Left Rear
Static Vents
S9 Right Rear
9 Static Vents
V S8
S8 8
8 Stall
Detector P S9
9
Left S Right
Stall Stall Ident Stall
Vent 3rd Channel Vent
V1 V2
LEGEND
= Pitot Pressure = Pitot Drain
= Static Pressure = Static Drain
= Static Pressure = Stall Vent Drain
Figure 1
Pitot Static System Block Diagram
Pilot’s Operating Manual Sub-section 18 Page 18-5
Revision A2: Nov, 2004 PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section III - SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
Section - IV
FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
Table of Contents
Page
SUB-SECTION 1 - GENERAL...........................................................................1-1
SUB-SECTION 2 - PREFLIGHT........................................................................2-1
SUB-SECTION 3 - CLIMB.................................................................................3-1
P/N 140-590032-0007
Revision A5: Feb, 2012
Page 1
Pilot’s Operating Manual
This Sub-section contains general speed and atmospheric data. It also contains ceiling data giving the
relationship between maximum altitude and maximum weight. It also contains relationships between
true Mach number, true airspeed and true outside air temperature with indicated values of airspeed,
altitude and temperature.
The true Mach number on the graph differs slightly from the indicated Mach number by the magnitude
of the position error given in Sub-section 5.05 of the Airplane Flight Manual.
It also provides ceiling data which will give maximum altitude for a given weight or weight for a given
altitude.
Data for buffet margins is provided in the Airplane Flight Manual Sub-section 5.05, Figure 5.05.7.
45
40
35
30
ALTITUDE - thousands of feet
I SA
25
+40
I SA
+30
C
I SA
+20
C
I SA
20
C
+10
I SA
C
ISA
-1 0
IS A
15
C
-2 0
I SA
-30
C
I SA
C
-4 0
I SA
10
C
-50
ISA
C
-6 0
C
M7015_0.AI
Figure 1
ISA Temperatures
Page 1-4 Sub-section 1 Pilot’s Operating Manual
GENERAL Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
DETERMINATION OF SPEED and TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
Figure 2 allows true values of Mach number, airspeed, and outside air temperature to be determined
from indicated values of airspeed, altitude and temperature.
The true Mach number obtained will differ from indicated Mach number by the magnitude of the position
error given in Sub-section 5.05 of the Aircraft Flight Manual.
The chart assumes zero instrument error. In practice, the allowable tolerances on the altimeter and
combined speed indicator are such that there may be discrepancies of up to 0.01 Mach number or 3
knots airspeed in instrument readings. This should be considered when using the charts and the
tabulated cruise enroute data in Sub-section 4.
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual for maximum altitude limitation.
Figure 2
Speed and Temperature Correction
Page 1-6 Sub-section 1 Pilot’s Operating Manual
GENERAL Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
CEILING DATA
Table 1
MAXIMUM CRUISE ALTITUDE
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA °C
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT lb MAXIMUM CRUISE ALTITUDE ft
27,000 40,600 40,400 39,800 39,100 38,300 37,400 36,400 34,300
26,000 41,000 41,000 40,600 39,900 39,000 38,100 37,100 35,400
25,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,700 39,800 38,700 37,700 36,400
24,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,600 39,500 38,400 37,100
23,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,400 39,200 38,000
22,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,000 38,800
21,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,800 39,600
20,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 41,000 40,500
NOTE: These weights and altitudes are determined by either the maximum altitude of 41,000 ft,
or by a 200 ft/min rate of climb limit at M = 0.7.
Table 2
MAXIMUM CRUISE WEIGHT
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA °C
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
CRUISE
MAXIMUM CRUISE WEIGHT lb
ALTITUDE ft
35,000 26,400
36,000 25,500
37,000 26,100 24,100
38,000 26,100 24,600 22,900
39,000 25,900 24,600 23,200 21,700
40,000 26,700 25,900 24,800 23,500 22,000 20,600
41,000 26,400 26,300 25,400 24,700 23,600 22,300 20,700 19,300
NOTE: These weights and altitudes are determined by either the maximum altitude of 41,000 ft,
or by a 200 ft/min rate of climb limit at M = 0.7.
NOTE: These weights and altitudes are determined by either the maximum altitude of 41,000 ft,
or by a 200 ft/min rate of climb limit at M = 0.7.
The data in this Sub-section allows the determination of total time and fuel required, using one of the
three standard procedures:
• High speed
• Intermediate
• Long Range
Definitions and terms used for referring to the various phases of the flight are illustrated on Figure 1.
A method for pre-flight planning of time and fuel required is provided in a worked example in this Sub-
section. The data necessary to perform the calculations can be found throughout this Sub-section.
The Diversion Time and Fuel data may also be used for short sectors.
CLIMB
CRUISE
DESCENT
Figure 1
PREFLIGHT
Sub-section 2
1500 ft 1500 ft
1000 ft 1000 ft
DESTINATION ALTERNATE
NOT TO SCALE
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
Page 2-5
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
FUEL LOADING PLAN and WORKED EXAMPLE
The following plan, recommended by Raytheon Aircraft Company, is provided together with a worked
example illustrating its use in pre-flight planning.
1. Permissible weights
3. Flight plan
4. Fuel summary
5. Loading check
A copy of the Fuel Loading Plan, arranged for convenience on one side of a sheet, is presented on the
following page. This sheet may be copied by operators for their own use.
Part 1 PERMISSIBLE WEIGHTS lb Part 3B FLIGHT PLAN Weights lb Part 4 FUEL SUMMARY
(from AFM) Times min and fuels lb Approach, 10
Zero Fuel Weight 5 Taxi-in
Permissible
APR ‘ON’ 1 Approach fuel 10
Take-off Weight Diversion 11
Taxi-in fuel
Holding 12
Permissible DESTINATION 2 Diversion Arrival Weight
Additional Reserves (if required)
Landing Weight ALTERNATE Diversion fuel
3 11 Sector 13
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 4 Weight at end of Hold
Taxi-out
Holding fuel for min.
at altitude. 12 TOTAL FUEL REQUIRED 15
DATA
The data used for the worked example is listed below:
Since there are no obstacles the permissible take-off weight will be the lowest of:
From AFM Sub-section 5.15 for departure airfield it can be seen that the WAT and tire speed limits at
both flap settings are greater than 28,000 lb.
From AFM Sub-section 5.50, the maximum weight for a landing field length of 4350 ft = 21,500 lb.
Permissible landing weight at the destination is therefore the lowest of these three weights,
i.e. 21,500 lb.
Part 1 of the FUEL LOADING PLAN can now be completed as shown below:
DESTINATION 21,500 2
Permissible Landing Weight
ALTERNATE 22,350 3
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 18,450 4
Operating Weight
A typical Operating Weight is defined in the Weight and Balance section of the AFM and consists of the
Basic Weight stated at the beginning of the Weight and CG Schedule plus the following items:
All fluids
Lifejackets and dinghies (if carried)
Food and Drink
Passenger Service items
Crew with Manuals and Baggage
The typical Operating Weight corrected for any known variations to the above items may be 16,100 lb.
Passengers
The standard weight allowance is 170 lb per passenger.
4 x 170 = 680 lb
Baggage weight may be weighed or estimated= 120 lb
Zero Fuel Weight, the sum of Operating Weight, Passengers and baggage = 16,900 lb. This is less than
the Maximum Zero Fuel Weight of 18,450 lb 4 already obtained from the AFM.
The FMS may be used to calculate the Zero Fuel Weight, using the procedure given below:
1. Select the FUEL page 1 which is the fuel and weight entry page. This will display the EMPTY WT
used for the last flight.
2. Enter number of passengers at the PAX line and the baggage weight at the CARGO line.
3. The ZERO FUEL WEIGHT (ZFW) is automatically calculated based on these three prior entries.
An approximate still air speed is first determined and then knowing the actual distance, wind and mean
speed, the equivalent distances may be obtained from the (EQUIVALENT STILL AIR DISTANCE) tables
in this section.
For this example we shall use the High Speed Procedure data for ISA conditions (an acceptable
approximation to ISA+5° C) and an approximate arrival weight of 16,900 lb + 2000 lb = 18,900 lb.
This gives a Sector time for 1900 nm of about 270 minutes at the highest achievable cruise altitude of
39,000 ft.
In this case we shall choose an altitude of 15,000 ft on the basis of the approximate rule of assuming
10,000 ft altitude per 80 nm of diversion distance.
This makes sure that cruise distance will be at least half the total distance.
(A lower diversion fuel could be achieved by assuming climb to a higher altitude and a shorter cruise)
From this section (Diversion Time and Fuel) for an arrival weight of 17,000 lb and 15,000 ft cruise
altitude, we see that time is 28 minutes for a diversion distance of 120 nm.
If we use the conservative rule of assuming 50% actual tailwind component or 150% headwind
component, then ground speed will be 30 kt less than this.
= 120 x 257
227
= 136 nm
NOTE: This fuel may be reduced by 30 lb because the airfield at start of diversion is at 2000 ft
altitude.
Holding fuel flow at 5000 ft, ISA, at mean weight, of say, 18,100 lb equals 1110 lb per hour (antice off).
NOTE: At this point any other reserves may be added if required i.e. a second approach allowance,
or en route allowance etc. Destination arrival weight will include these extra reserves.
Sector time and fuel for the ESAD of 1814 nm should be read from this section (High Speed Procedure)
for temperatures and arrival weights above and below those required. The Interpolation “scratchpad”
portion of the FUEL LOADING PLAN is provided to facilitate interpolation.
Interpolation “scratchpad”
ISA Time 254 Time 260 ISA
Arrival wt Arrival wt
Fuel 7040 Fuel 7182
17,000 20,000
ISA +5 C Time 254 Time 260.5 ISA +5 C
17,000 Fuel 6733 Fuel 6919 20,000
ISA +10 C Time 254 Time 261
ISA +10 C
Arrival wt Arrival wt
Fuel 6426 Fuel 6655
17,000 20,000
NOTE: This fuel may be reduced by 30 lb because the departure airfield is at 2000 ft altitude.
Parts 3B, 4 and 5 of the FUEL LOADING PLAN can now be completed.
Part 3B - FLIGHT PLAN Weights (lb) Times (min) and Fuels (lb)
Zero Fuel Weight 5 16,900
Approach Fuel 100 10
Taxi-in Fuel 50
Diversion Arrival Weight 17,050
Diversion Fuel 711 11
1
ACTUAL TAKE-OFF WEIGHT 25,114 28,000
Should equal: 14
When a Sector or Diversion is to be flown in other than zero wind conditions it will be necessary to
estimate an Equivalent Still Air distance (ESAD) for purposes of determining the fuel required.
ESAD values may be determined from the tables in this Sub-section, or calculated from the formula:
• Airspeed is the cruise true airspeed or the mean still air sector speed in knots.
The Tables in this sub-section give ESAD values over a range of sector distances for headwinds and
tailwinds of up to 160 knots. Data is provided for true air speed values of 350, 400 and 450 knots.
Cruise true air speeds may be determined from Figure 2 in Sub-section 1 - GENERAL (Speed and
Temperature Correction) or the sector distance may be divided by the still air sector time read from the
tables (High Speed, Intermediate and Long Range Procedures) of this Sub-section i.e.:
Wind speed (irrespective of component) > 10% of airplane speed and either:
ESAD should be increased above the values read from the table or calculated from the formula by the
following amounts:
Wind Speed
Airplane True Air Speed ≤ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
A typical pre take-off allowance is 100 lb for start and taxi-out, but considerably more may be needed
at some airfields. Pre takeoff fuel must be allowed for when calculating the total fuel required, but it is
not included in the take-off weight.
NOTE: Take-off weight plus pre take-off fuel must not exceed the maximum ramp weight.
• Circuits 2000 lb/hour approximately, with flaps 15° and landing gear extended.
The Sector fuel tables are based on take-off and landing at sea level.
If take-off is made from a higher airfield then sector fuel may be reduced by 15 lb per 1000 feet airfield
altitude. This allows for the shorter climb to cruise altitude and the corresponding longer cruise, giving
the same sector distance.
RESERVE FUEL
DIVERSION
Diversion fuel can be read from the tables (Diversion Time and Fuel) of this Sub-section .
These include an allowance of approximately 50 lb (varying with weight) which may be used to cover a
discontinued approach and climb to 1000 ft. The minimum distance shown in the table for a given
altitude may consist only of take-off, climb, and descent with no appreciable cruise. It will sometimes
be possible to use this altitude for a diversion but it may be necessary to plan for a lower altitude.
Diversion at cruising altitude should be dealt with by adding the appropriate diversion air distance to the
sector air distance before entering the sector fuel table.
HOLDING
Holding fuel for any required period is calculated from the fuel flows in Sub-section 2 - PREFLIGHT
(Holding Fuel Flow). Allowance is made in the table for the increase in drag due to flying circuits using
25° bank.
A typical holding allowance at the alternate is 30 minutes at low altitude or 45 minutes higher up. This
will in most cases be sufficient to cover landing at the alternate, but an additional approach allowance
may be added if required.
NOTE: A go-around must not be attempted with less than 400 lb of fuel in the tanks.
EN ROUTE ALLOWANCE
A contingency allowance, usually in the form of a percentage of sector fuel, may be added to the
reserves. A typical figure is 5%.
ICING CONDITIONS
• Climb - The effect of climbing through a 10,000 feet icing layer is to increase the normal climb time
by up to 1.5 minutes. The effect on sector fuel and time does not exceed 50 lb or one minute.
• Cruise - Fuel flow is increased by approximately 100 lb/hr up to 25,000 feet and by approximately
150 lb/hr at higher altitudes.
• Descent - The penalty in fuel for descending through a 10,000 feet icing layer is 100 lb. There is
no significant effect on distance.
350 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1200 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
50 92 83 76 70 67 65 63 60 58 56 55 53 51
100 184 167 152 140 135 130 125 121 117 113 109 106 103
150 276 250 228 210 202 194 188 181 175 169 164 159 154
200 368 333 304 280 269 259 250 241 233 226 219 212 206
250 461 417 380 350 337 324 313 302 292 282 273 265 257
300 553 500 457 420 404 389 375 362 350 339 328 318 309
350 645 583 533 490 471 454 438 422 408 395 383 371 360
400 737 667 609 560 538 519 500 483 467 452 438 424 412
450 829 750 685 630 606 583 563 543 525 508 492 477 463
500 921 833 761 700 673 648 625 603 583 565 547 530 515
550 1013 917 837 770 740 713 688 664 642 621 602 583 566
600 1105 1000 913 840 808 778 750 724 700 677 656 636 618
650 1197 1083 989 910 875 843 813 784 758 734 711 689 669
700 1289 1167 1065 980 942 907 875 845 817 790 766 742 721
750 1382 1250 1141 1050 1010 972 938 905 875 847 820 795 772
800 1474 1333 1217 1120 1077 1037 1000 966 933 903 875 848 824
850 1566 1417 1293 1190 1144 1102 1063 1026 992 960 930 902 875
900 1658 1500 1370 1260 1212 1167 1125 1086 1050 1016 984 955 926
950 1750 1583 1446 1330 1279 1231 1188 1147 1108 1073 1039 1008 978
1000 1842 1667 1522 1400 1346 1296 1250 1207 1167 1129 1094 1061 1029
1050 1934 1750 1598 1470 1413 1361 1313 1267 1225 1185 1148 1114 1081
1100 2026 1833 1674 1540 1481 1426 1375 1328 1283 1242 1203 1167 1132
1150 2118 1917 1750 1610 1548 1491 1438 1388 1342 1298 1258 1220 1184
1200 2211 2000 1826 1680 1615 1556 1500 1448 1400 1355 1313 1273 1235
AW10C790-1
350 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1200 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
49 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 37 36 34 50
97 95 92 90 88 85 83 81 80 78 74 71 69 100
146 142 138 135 131 128 125 122 119 117 112 107 103 150
194 189 184 179 175 171 167 163 159 156 149 143 137 200
243 236 230 224 219 213 208 203 199 194 186 179 172 250
292 284 276 269 263 256 250 244 239 233 223 214 206 300
340 331 322 314 306 299 292 285 278 272 261 250 240 350
389 378 368 359 350 341 333 326 318 311 298 286 275 400
438 426 414 404 394 384 375 366 358 350 335 321 309 450
486 473 461 449 438 427 417 407 398 389 372 357 343 500
535 520 507 494 481 470 458 448 438 428 410 393 377 550
583 568 553 538 525 512 500 488 477 467 447 429 412 600
632 615 599 583 569 555 542 529 517 506 484 464 446 650
681 662 645 628 613 598 583 570 557 544 521 500 480 700
729 709 691 673 656 640 625 610 597 583 559 536 515 750
778 757 737 718 700 683 667 651 636 622 596 571 549 800
826 804 783 763 744 726 708 692 676 661 633 607 583 850
875 851 829 808 788 768 750 733 716 700 670 643 618 900
924 899 875 853 831 811 792 773 756 739 707 679 652 950
972 946 921 897 875 854 833 814 795 778 745 714 686 1000
1021 993 967 942 919 896 875 855 835 817 782 750 721 1050
1069 1041 1013 987 963 939 917 895 875 856 819 786 755 1100
1118 1088 1059 1032 1006 982 958 936 915 894 856 821 789 1150
1167 1135 1105 1077 1050 1024 1000 977 955 933 894 857 824 1200
AW10C790-2
350 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1250 - 2500 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
1250 2303 2083 1902 1750 1683 1620 1563 1509 1458 1411 1367 1326 1287
1300 2395 2167 1978 1820 1750 1685 1625 1569 1517 1468 1422 1379 1338
1350 2487 2250 2054 1890 1817 1750 1688 1629 1575 1524 1477 1432 1390
1400 2579 2333 2130 1960 1885 1815 1750 1690 1633 1581 1531 1485 1441
1450 2671 2417 2207 2030 1952 1880 1813 1750 1692 1637 1586 1538 1493
1500 2763 2500 2283 2100 2019 1944 1875 1810 1750 1694 1641 1591 1544
1550 2855 2583 2359 2170 2087 2009 1938 1871 1808 1750 1695 1644 1596
1600 2947 2667 2435 2240 2154 2074 2000 1931 1867 1806 1750 1697 1647
1650 3039 2750 2511 2310 2221 2139 2063 1991 1925 1863 1805 1750 1699
1700 3132 2833 2587 2380 2288 2204 2125 2052 1983 1919 1859 1803 1750
1750 3224 2917 2663 2450 2356 2269 2188 2112 2042 1976 1914 1856 1801
1800 3316 3000 2739 2520 2423 2333 2250 2172 2100 2032 1969 1909 1853
1850 3408 3083 2815 2590 2490 2398 2313 2233 2158 2089 2023 1962 1904
1900 3500 3167 2891 2660 2558 2463 2375 2293 2217 2145 2078 2015 1956
1950 3592 3250 2967 2730 2625 2528 2438 2353 2275 2202 2133 2068 2007
2000 3684 3333 3043 2800 2692 2593 2500 2414 2333 2258 2188 2121 2059
2050 3776 3417 3120 2870 2760 2657 2563 2474 2392 2315 2242 2174 2110
2100 3868 3500 3196 2940 2827 2722 2625 2534 2450 2371 2297 2227 2162
2150 3961 3583 3272 3010 2894 2787 2688 2595 2508 2427 2352 2280 2213
2200 4053 3667 3348 3080 2962 2852 2750 2655 2567 2484 2406 2333 2265
2250 4145 3750 3424 3150 3029 2917 2813 2716 2625 2540 2461 2386 2316
2300 4237 3833 3500 3220 3096 2981 2875 2776 2683 2597 2516 2439 2368
2350 4329 3917 3576 3290 3163 3046 2938 2836 2742 2653 2570 2492 2419
2400 4421 4000 3652 3360 3231 3111 3000 2897 2800 2710 2625 2545 2471
2450 4513 4083 3728 3430 3298 3176 3063 2957 2858 2766 2680 2598 2522
2500 4605 4167 3804 3500 3365 3241 3125 3017 2917 2823 2734 2652 2574
AW10C790-3
350 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1250 - 2500 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
1215 1182 1151 1122 1094 1067 1042 1017 994 972 931 893 858 1250
1264 1230 1197 1167 1138 1110 1083 1058 1034 1011 968 929 892 1300
1313 1277 1243 1212 1181 1152 1125 1099 1074 1050 1005 964 926 1350
1361 1324 1289 1256 1225 1195 1167 1140 1114 1089 1043 1000 961 1400
1410 1372 1336 1301 1269 1238 1208 1180 1153 1128 1080 1036 995 1450
1458 1419 1382 1346 1313 1280 1250 1221 1193 1167 1117 1071 1029 1500
1507 1466 1428 1391 1356 1323 1292 1262 1233 1206 1154 1107 1064 1550
1556 1514 1474 1436 1400 1366 1333 1302 1273 1244 1191 1143 1098 1600
1604 1561 1520 1481 1444 1409 1375 1343 1313 1283 1229 1179 1132 1650
1653 1608 1566 1526 1488 1451 1417 1384 1352 1322 1266 1214 1167 1700
1701 1655 1612 1571 1531 1494 1458 1424 1392 1361 1303 1250 1201 1750
1750 1703 1658 1615 1575 1537 1500 1465 1432 1400 1340 1286 1235 1800
1799 1750 1704 1660 1619 1579 1542 1506 1472 1439 1378 1321 1270 1850
1847 1797 1750 1705 1663 1622 1583 1547 1511 1478 1415 1357 1304 1900
1896 1845 1796 1750 1706 1665 1625 1587 1551 1517 1452 1393 1338 1950
1944 1892 1842 1795 1750 1707 1667 1628 1591 1556 1489 1429 1373 2000
1993 1939 1888 1840 1794 1750 1708 1669 1631 1594 1527 1464 1407 2050
2042 1986 1934 1885 1838 1793 1750 1709 1670 1633 1564 1500 1441 2100
2090 2034 1980 1929 1881 1835 1792 1750 1710 1672 1601 1536 1475 2150
2139 2081 2026 1974 1925 1878 1833 1791 1750 1711 1638 1571 1510 2200
2188 2128 2072 2019 1969 1921 1875 1831 1790 1750 1676 1607 1544 2250
2236 2176 2118 2064 2013 1963 1917 1872 1830 1789 1713 1643 1578 2300
2285 2223 2164 2109 2056 2006 1958 1913 1869 1828 1750 1679 1613 2350
2333 2270 2211 2154 2100 2049 2000 1953 1909 1867 1787 1714 1647 2400
2382 2318 2257 2199 2144 2091 2042 1994 1949 1906 1824 1750 1681 2450
2431 2365 2303 2244 2188 2134 2083 2035 1989 1944 1862 1786 1716 2500
AW10C790-4
400 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1350 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
50 83 77 71 67 65 63 61 59 57 56 54 53 51
100 167 154 143 133 129 125 121 118 114 111 108 105 103
150 250 231 214 200 194 188 182 176 171 167 162 158 154
200 333 308 286 267 258 250 242 235 229 222 216 211 205
250 417 385 357 333 323 313 303 294 286 278 270 263 256
300 500 462 429 400 387 375 364 353 343 333 324 316 308
350 583 538 500 467 452 438 424 412 400 389 378 368 359
400 667 615 571 533 516 500 485 471 457 444 432 421 410
450 750 692 643 600 581 563 545 529 514 500 486 474 462
500 833 769 714 667 645 625 606 588 571 556 541 526 513
550 917 846 786 733 710 688 667 647 629 611 595 579 564
600 1000 923 857 800 774 750 727 706 686 667 649 632 615
650 1083 1000 929 867 839 813 788 765 743 722 703 684 667
700 1167 1077 1000 933 903 875 848 824 800 778 757 737 718
750 1250 1154 1071 1000 968 938 909 882 857 833 811 789 769
800 1333 1231 1143 1067 1032 1000 970 941 914 889 865 842 821
850 1417 1308 1214 1133 1097 1063 1030 1000 971 944 919 895 872
900 1500 1385 1286 1200 1161 1125 1091 1059 1029 1000 973 947 923
950 1583 1462 1357 1267 1226 1188 1152 1118 1086 1056 1027 1000 974
1000 1667 1538 1429 1333 1290 1250 1212 1176 1143 1111 1081 1053 1026
1050 1750 1615 1500 1400 1355 1313 1273 1235 1200 1167 1135 1105 1077
1100 1833 1692 1571 1467 1419 1375 1333 1294 1257 1222 1189 1158 1128
1150 1917 1769 1643 1533 1484 1438 1394 1353 1314 1278 1243 1211 1179
1200 2000 1846 1714 1600 1548 1500 1455 1412 1371 1333 1297 1263 1231
1250 2083 1923 1786 1667 1613 1563 1515 1471 1429 1389 1351 1316 1282
1300 2167 2000 1857 1733 1677 1625 1576 1529 1486 1444 1405 1368 1333
1350 2250 2077 1929 1800 1742 1688 1636 1588 1543 1500 1459 1421 1385
AW9C185-1
400 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1350 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
49 48 47 45 44 43 43 42 41 40 38 37 36 50
98 95 93 91 89 87 85 83 82 80 77 74 71 100
146 143 140 136 133 130 128 125 122 120 115 111 107 150
195 190 186 182 178 174 170 167 163 160 154 148 143 200
244 238 233 227 222 217 213 208 204 200 192 185 179 250
293 286 279 273 267 261 255 250 245 240 231 222 214 300
341 333 326 318 311 304 298 292 286 280 269 259 250 350
390 381 372 364 356 348 340 333 327 320 308 296 286 400
439 429 419 409 400 391 383 375 367 360 346 333 321 450
488 476 465 455 444 435 426 417 408 400 385 370 357 500
537 524 512 500 489 478 468 458 449 440 423 407 393 550
585 571 558 545 533 522 511 500 490 480 462 444 429 600
634 619 605 591 578 565 553 542 531 520 500 481 464 650
683 667 651 636 622 609 596 583 571 560 538 519 500 700
732 714 698 682 667 652 638 625 612 600 577 556 536 750
780 762 744 727 711 696 681 667 653 640 615 593 571 800
829 810 791 773 756 739 723 708 694 680 654 630 607 850
878 857 837 818 800 783 766 750 735 720 692 667 643 900
927 905 884 864 844 826 809 792 776 760 731 704 679 950
976 952 930 909 889 870 851 833 816 800 769 741 714 1000
1024 1000 977 955 933 913 894 875 857 840 808 778 750 1050
1073 1048 1023 1000 978 957 936 917 898 880 846 815 786 1100
1122 1095 1070 1045 1022 1000 979 958 939 920 885 852 821 1150
1171 1143 1116 1091 1067 1043 1021 1000 980 960 923 889 857 1200
1220 1190 1163 1136 1111 1087 1064 1042 1020 1000 962 926 893 1250
1268 1238 1209 1182 1156 1130 1106 1083 1061 1040 1000 963 929 1300
1317 1286 1256 1227 1200 1174 1149 1125 1102 1080 1038 1000 964 1350
AW9C185-2
400 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1400 - 3000 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
1400 2333 2154 2000 1867 1806 1750 1697 1647 1600 1556 1514 1474 1436
1450 2417 2231 2071 1933 1871 1813 1758 1706 1657 1611 1568 1526 1487
1500 2500 2308 2143 2000 1935 1875 1818 1765 1714 1667 1622 1579 1538
1550 2583 2385 2214 2067 2000 1938 1879 1824 1771 1722 1676 1632 1590
1600 2667 2462 2286 2133 2065 2000 1939 1882 1829 1778 1730 1684 1641
1650 2750 2538 2357 2200 2129 2063 2000 1941 1886 1833 1784 1737 1692
1700 2833 2615 2429 2267 2194 2125 2061 2000 1943 1889 1838 1789 1744
1750 2917 2692 2500 2333 2258 2188 2121 2059 2000 1944 1892 1842 1795
1800 3000 2769 2571 2400 2323 2250 2182 2118 2057 2000 1946 1895 1846
1850 3083 2846 2643 2467 2387 2313 2242 2176 2114 2056 2000 1947 1897
1900 3167 2923 2714 2533 2452 2375 2303 2235 2171 2111 2054 2000 1949
1950 3250 3000 2786 2600 2516 2438 2364 2294 2229 2167 2108 2053 2000
2000 3333 3077 2857 2667 2581 2500 2424 2353 2286 2222 2162 2105 2051
2050 3417 3154 2929 2733 2645 2563 2485 2412 2343 2278 2216 2158 2103
2100 3500 3231 3000 2800 2710 2625 2545 2471 2400 2333 2270 2211 2154
2150 3583 3308 3071 2867 2774 2688 2606 2529 2457 2389 2324 2263 2205
2200 3667 3385 3143 2933 2839 2750 2667 2588 2514 2444 2378 2316 2256
2250 3750 3462 3214 3000 2903 2813 2727 2647 2571 2500 2432 2368 2308
2300 3833 3538 3286 3067 2968 2875 2788 2706 2629 2556 2486 2421 2359
2350 3917 3615 3357 3133 3032 2938 2848 2765 2686 2611 2541 2474 2410
2400 4000 3692 3429 3200 3097 3000 2909 2824 2743 2667 2595 2526 2462
2450 4083 3769 3500 3267 3161 3063 2970 2882 2800 2722 2649 2579 2513
2500 4167 3846 3571 3333 3226 3125 3030 2941 2857 2778 2703 2632 2564
2550 4250 3923 3643 3400 3290 3188 3091 3000 2914 2833 2757 2684 2615
2600 4333 4000 3714 3467 3355 3250 3152 3059 2971 2889 2811 2737 2667
2650 4417 4077 3786 3533 3419 3313 3212 3118 3029 2944 2865 2789 2718
2700 4500 4154 3857 3600 3484 3375 3273 3176 3086 3000 2919 2842 2769
2750 4583 4231 3929 3667 3548 3438 3333 3235 3143 3056 2973 2895 2821
2800 4667 4308 4000 3733 3613 3500 3394 3294 3200 3111 3027 2947 2872
2850 4750 4385 4071 3800 3677 3563 3455 3353 3257 3167 3081 3000 2923
2900 4833 4462 4143 3867 3742 3625 3515 3412 3314 3222 3135 3053 2974
2950 4917 4538 4214 3933 3806 3688 3576 3471 3371 3278 3189 3105 3026
3000 5000 4615 4286 4000 3871 3750 3636 3529 3429 3333 3243 3158 3077
AW9C185-3
400 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1400 - 3000 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
1366 1333 1302 1273 1244 1217 1191 1167 1143 1120 1077 1037 1000 1400
1415 1381 1349 1318 1289 1261 1234 1208 1184 1160 1115 1074 1036 1450
1463 1429 1395 1364 1333 1304 1277 1250 1224 1200 1154 1111 1071 1500
1512 1476 1442 1409 1378 1348 1319 1292 1265 1240 1192 1148 1107 1550
1561 1524 1488 1455 1422 1391 1362 1333 1306 1280 1231 1185 1143 1600
1610 1571 1535 1500 1467 1435 1404 1375 1347 1320 1269 1222 1179 1650
1659 1619 1581 1545 1511 1478 1447 1417 1388 1360 1308 1259 1214 1700
1707 1667 1628 1591 1556 1522 1489 1458 1429 1400 1346 1296 1250 1750
1756 1714 1674 1636 1600 1565 1532 1500 1469 1440 1385 1333 1286 1800
1805 1762 1721 1682 1644 1609 1574 1542 1510 1480 1423 1370 1321 1850
1854 1810 1767 1727 1689 1652 1617 1583 1551 1520 1462 1407 1357 1900
1902 1857 1814 1773 1733 1696 1660 1625 1592 1560 1500 1444 1393 1950
1951 1905 1860 1818 1778 1739 1702 1667 1633 1600 1538 1481 1429 2000
2000 1952 1907 1864 1822 1783 1745 1708 1673 1640 1577 1519 1464 2050
2049 2000 1953 1909 1867 1826 1787 1750 1714 1680 1615 1556 1500 2100
2098 2048 2000 1955 1911 1870 1830 1792 1755 1720 1654 1593 1536 2150
2146 2095 2047 2000 1956 1913 1872 1833 1796 1760 1692 1630 1571 2200
2195 2143 2093 2045 2000 1957 1915 1875 1837 1800 1731 1667 1607 2250
2244 2190 2140 2091 2044 2000 1957 1917 1878 1840 1769 1704 1643 2300
2293 2238 2186 2136 2089 2043 2000 1958 1918 1880 1808 1741 1679 2350
2341 2286 2233 2182 2133 2087 2043 2000 1959 1920 1846 1778 1714 2400
2390 2333 2279 2227 2178 2130 2085 2042 2000 1960 1885 1815 1750 2450
2439 2381 2326 2273 2222 2174 2128 2083 2041 2000 1923 1852 1786 2500
2488 2429 2372 2318 2267 2217 2170 2125 2082 2040 1962 1889 1821 2550
2537 2476 2419 2364 2311 2261 2213 2167 2122 2080 2000 1926 1857 2600
2585 2524 2465 2409 2356 2304 2255 2208 2163 2120 2038 1963 1893 2650
2634 2571 2512 2455 2400 2348 2298 2250 2204 2160 2077 2000 1929 2700
2683 2619 2558 2500 2444 2391 2340 2292 2245 2200 2115 2037 1964 2750
2732 2667 2605 2545 2489 2435 2383 2333 2286 2240 2154 2074 2000 2800
2780 2714 2651 2591 2533 2478 2426 2375 2327 2280 2192 2111 2036 2850
2829 2762 2698 2636 2578 2522 2468 2417 2367 2320 2231 2148 2071 2900
2878 2810 2744 2682 2622 2565 2511 2458 2408 2360 2269 2185 2107 2950
2927 2857 2791 2727 2667 2609 2553 2500 2449 2400 2308 2222 2143 3000
AW9C185-4
450 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1350 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
50 78 73 68 64 63 61 59 58 56 55 54 52 51
100 155 145 136 129 125 122 118 115 113 110 107 105 102
150 233 218 205 193 188 182 178 173 169 165 161 157 153
200 310 290 273 257 250 243 237 231 225 220 214 209 205
250 388 363 341 321 313 304 296 288 281 274 268 262 256
300 466 435 409 386 375 365 355 346 338 329 321 314 307
350 543 508 477 450 438 426 414 404 394 384 375 366 358
400 621 581 545 514 500 486 474 462 450 439 429 419 409
450 698 653 614 579 563 547 533 519 506 494 482 471 460
500 776 726 682 643 625 608 592 577 563 549 536 523 511
550 853 798 750 707 688 669 651 635 619 604 589 576 563
600 931 871 818 771 750 730 711 692 675 659 643 628 614
650 1009 944 886 836 813 791 770 750 731 713 696 680 665
700 1086 1016 955 900 875 851 829 808 788 768 750 733 716
750 1164 1089 1023 964 938 912 888 865 844 823 804 785 767
800 1241 1161 1091 1029 1000 973 947 923 900 878 857 837 818
850 1319 1234 1159 1093 1063 1034 1007 981 956 933 911 890 869
900 1397 1306 1227 1157 1125 1095 1066 1038 1013 988 964 942 920
950 1474 1379 1295 1221 1188 1155 1125 1096 1069 1043 1018 994 972
1000 1552 1452 1364 1286 1250 1216 1184 1154 1125 1098 1071 1047 1023
1050 1629 1524 1432 1350 1313 1277 1243 1212 1181 1152 1125 1099 1074
1100 1707 1597 1500 1414 1375 1338 1303 1269 1238 1207 1179 1151 1125
1150 1784 1669 1568 1479 1438 1399 1362 1327 1294 1262 1232 1203 1176
1200 1862 1742 1636 1543 1500 1459 1421 1385 1350 1317 1286 1256 1227
1250 1940 1815 1705 1607 1563 1520 1480 1442 1406 1372 1339 1308 1278
1300 2017 1887 1773 1671 1625 1581 1539 1500 1463 1427 1393 1360 1330
1350 2095 1960 1841 1736 1688 1642 1599 1558 1519 1482 1446 1413 1381
AW9C186-1
450 kt TAS
Sector Distance 50 - 1350 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 42 41 39 38 37 50
98 96 94 92 90 88 87 85 83 82 79 76 74 100
147 144 141 138 135 132 130 127 125 123 118 114 111 150
196 191 188 184 180 176 173 170 167 164 158 153 148 200
245 239 234 230 225 221 216 212 208 205 197 191 184 250
293 287 281 276 270 265 260 255 250 245 237 229 221 300
342 335 328 321 315 309 303 297 292 286 276 267 258 350
391 383 375 367 360 353 346 340 333 327 316 305 295 400
440 431 422 413 405 397 389 382 375 368 355 343 332 450
489 479 469 459 450 441 433 425 417 409 395 381 369 500
538 527 516 505 495 485 476 467 458 450 434 419 406 550
587 574 563 551 540 529 519 509 500 491 474 458 443 600
636 622 609 597 585 574 563 552 542 532 513 496 480 650
685 670 656 643 630 618 606 594 583 573 553 534 516 700
734 718 703 689 675 662 649 637 625 614 592 572 553 750
783 766 750 735 720 706 692 679 667 655 632 610 590 800
832 814 797 781 765 750 736 722 708 695 671 648 627 850
880 862 844 827 810 794 779 764 750 736 711 686 664 900
929 910 891 872 855 838 822 807 792 777 750 725 701 950
978 957 938 918 900 882 865 849 833 818 789 763 738 1000
1027 1005 984 964 945 926 909 892 875 859 829 801 775 1050
1076 1053 1031 1010 990 971 952 934 917 900 868 839 811 1100
1125 1101 1078 1056 1035 1015 995 976 958 941 908 877 848 1150
1174 1149 1125 1102 1080 1059 1038 1019 1000 982 947 915 885 1200
1223 1197 1172 1148 1125 1103 1082 1061 1042 1023 987 953 922 1250
1272 1245 1219 1194 1170 1147 1125 1104 1083 1064 1026 992 959 1300
1321 1293 1266 1240 1215 1191 1168 1146 1125 1105 1066 1030 996 1350
AW9C186-2
450 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1400 - 3000 nm
HEADWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
nm 160 140 120 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
1400 2172 2032 1909 1800 1750 1703 1658 1615 1575 1537 1500 1465 1432
1450 2250 2105 1977 1864 1813 1764 1717 1673 1631 1591 1554 1517 1483
1500 2328 2177 2045 1929 1875 1824 1776 1731 1688 1646 1607 1570 1534
1550 2405 2250 2114 1993 1938 1885 1836 1788 1744 1701 1661 1622 1585
1600 2483 2323 2182 2057 2000 1946 1895 1846 1800 1756 1714 1674 1636
1650 2560 2395 2250 2121 2063 2007 1954 1904 1856 1811 1768 1727 1688
1700 2638 2468 2318 2186 2125 2068 2013 1962 1913 1866 1821 1779 1739
1750 2716 2540 2386 2250 2188 2128 2072 2019 1969 1921 1875 1831 1790
1800 2793 2613 2455 2314 2250 2189 2132 2077 2025 1976 1929 1884 1841
1850 2871 2685 2523 2379 2313 2250 2191 2135 2081 2030 1982 1936 1892
1900 2948 2758 2591 2443 2375 2311 2250 2192 2138 2085 2036 1988 1943
1950 3026 2831 2659 2507 2438 2372 2309 2250 2194 2140 2089 2041 1994
2000 3103 2903 2727 2571 2500 2432 2368 2308 2250 2195 2143 2093 2045
2050 3181 2976 2795 2636 2563 2493 2428 2365 2306 2250 2196 2145 2097
2100 3259 3048 2864 2700 2625 2554 2487 2423 2363 2305 2250 2198 2148
2150 3336 3121 2932 2764 2688 2615 2546 2481 2419 2360 2304 2250 2199
2200 3414 3194 3000 2829 2750 2676 2605 2538 2475 2415 2357 2302 2250
2250 3491 3266 3068 2893 2813 2736 2664 2596 2531 2470 2411 2355 2301
2300 3569 3339 3136 2957 2875 2797 2724 2654 2588 2524 2464 2407 2352
2350 3647 3411 3205 3021 2938 2858 2783 2712 2644 2579 2518 2459 2403
2400 3724 3484 3273 3086 3000 2919 2842 2769 2700 2634 2571 2512 2455
2450 3802 3556 3341 3150 3063 2980 2901 2827 2756 2689 2625 2564 2506
2500 3879 3629 3409 3214 3125 3041 2961 2885 2813 2744 2679 2616 2557
2550 3957 3702 3477 3279 3188 3101 3020 2942 2869 2799 2732 2669 2608
2600 4034 3774 3545 3343 3250 3162 3079 3000 2925 2854 2786 2721 2659
2650 4112 3847 3614 3407 3313 3223 3138 3058 2981 2909 2839 2773 2710
2700 4190 3919 3682 3471 3375 3284 3197 3115 3038 2963 2893 2826 2761
2750 4267 3992 3750 3536 3438 3345 3257 3173 3094 3018 2946 2878 2813
2800 4345 4065 3818 3600 3500 3405 3316 3231 3150 3073 3000 2930 2864
2850 4422 4137 3886 3664 3563 3466 3375 3288 3206 3128 3054 2983 2915
2900 4500 4210 3955 3729 3625 3527 3434 3346 3263 3183 3107 3035 2966
2950 4578 4282 4023 3793 3688 3588 3493 3404 3319 3238 3161 3087 3017
3000 4655 4355 4091 3857 3750 3649 3553 3462 3375 3293 3214 3140 3068
AW9C186-3
450 kt TAS
Sector Distance 1400 - 3000 nm
TAILWIND kt
SECTOR DIST
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 nm
1370 1340 1313 1286 1260 1235 1212 1189 1167 1145 1105 1068 1033 1400
1418 1388 1359 1332 1305 1279 1255 1231 1208 1186 1145 1106 1070 1450
1467 1436 1406 1378 1350 1324 1298 1274 1250 1227 1184 1144 1107 1500
1516 1484 1453 1423 1395 1368 1341 1316 1292 1268 1224 1182 1143 1550
1565 1532 1500 1469 1440 1412 1385 1358 1333 1309 1263 1220 1180 1600
1614 1580 1547 1515 1485 1456 1428 1401 1375 1350 1303 1258 1217 1650
1663 1628 1594 1561 1530 1500 1471 1443 1417 1391 1342 1297 1254 1700
1712 1676 1641 1607 1575 1544 1514 1486 1458 1432 1382 1335 1291 1750
1761 1723 1688 1653 1620 1588 1558 1528 1500 1473 1421 1373 1328 1800
1810 1771 1734 1699 1665 1632 1601 1571 1542 1514 1461 1411 1365 1850
1859 1819 1781 1745 1710 1676 1644 1613 1583 1555 1500 1449 1402 1900
1908 1867 1828 1791 1755 1721 1688 1656 1625 1595 1539 1487 1439 1950
1957 1915 1875 1837 1800 1765 1731 1698 1667 1636 1579 1525 1475 2000
2005 1963 1922 1883 1845 1809 1774 1741 1708 1677 1618 1564 1512 2050
2054 2011 1969 1929 1890 1853 1817 1783 1750 1718 1658 1602 1549 2100
2103 2059 2016 1974 1935 1897 1861 1825 1792 1759 1697 1640 1586 2150
2152 2106 2063 2020 1980 1941 1904 1868 1833 1800 1737 1678 1623 2200
2201 2154 2109 2066 2025 1985 1947 1910 1875 1841 1776 1716 1660 2250
2250 2202 2156 2112 2070 2029 1990 1953 1917 1882 1816 1754 1697 2300
2299 2250 2203 2158 2115 2074 2034 1995 1958 1923 1855 1792 1734 2350
2348 2298 2250 2204 2160 2118 2077 2038 2000 1964 1895 1831 1770 2400
2397 2346 2297 2250 2205 2162 2120 2080 2042 2005 1934 1869 1807 2450
2446 2394 2344 2296 2250 2206 2163 2123 2083 2045 1974 1907 1844 2500
2495 2441 2391 2342 2295 2250 2207 2165 2125 2086 2013 1945 1881 2550
2543 2489 2438 2388 2340 2294 2250 2208 2167 2127 2053 1983 1918 2600
2592 2537 2484 2434 2385 2338 2293 2250 2208 2168 2092 2021 1955 2650
2641 2585 2531 2480 2430 2382 2337 2292 2250 2209 2132 2059 1992 2700
2690 2633 2578 2526 2475 2426 2380 2335 2292 2250 2171 2097 2029 2750
2739 2681 2625 2571 2520 2471 2423 2377 2333 2291 2211 2136 2066 2800
2788 2729 2672 2617 2565 2515 2466 2420 2375 2332 2250 2174 2102 2850
2837 2777 2719 2663 2610 2559 2510 2462 2417 2373 2289 2212 2139 2900
2886 2824 2766 2709 2655 2603 2553 2505 2458 2414 2329 2250 2176 2950
2935 2872 2813 2755 2700 2647 2596 2547 2500 2455 2368 2288 2213 3000
AW9C186-4
INTRODUCTION
Sector time and fuel are tabulated against air distance and cruise altitude. The tables cover a range of
arrival weights and en-route temperatures with data provided for three procedures as follows:
• Intermediate Procedure
Maximum initial cruise altitude determined by a minimum rate of climb of 200 fpm may be obtained from
the data provided in Sub-section 1 - GENERAL (Ceiling Data).
Diversion Time and fuel data (which may also be used for short sectors) is provided in (Diversion Time
and Fuel) of this Sub-section.
Holding fuel flows are tabulated in (Holding Fuel Flow) of this Sub-section.
The climb procedures are defined in Sub-section 3 - CLIMB and descent procedures are defined in Sub-
section 5 - NORMAL DESCENT.
INTRODUCTION
• Normal Climb.
• Normal Descent.
ISA - 15 C
Low Altitude Arrival Weight 17,000 lb
ISA - 15 C
Low Altitude
Arrival Weight 20,000 lb
INTRODUCTION
Intermediate Procedure is defined as follows:
• Normal Climb.
• Normal Descent.
ISA - 15 C
Low Altitude Arrival Weight 17,000 lb
ISA - 15 C
Low Altitude
Arrival Weight 20,000 lb
INTRODUCTION
Long Range Procedure is defined as follows:
• Normal Climb
• Normal Descent
ISA - 15 C
Arrival Weight 23,000 lb High Altitude
INTRODUCTION
This Sub-section contains tabulated data for diversion times and fuels versus diversion distance and
diversion cruise altitude. The tables cover a range of arrival weights for ISA conditions however, they
also may be used for other temperatures since the effect of temperature on diversion times and fuel is
negligible.
Diversion times and fuels have been calculated using the Long Range Procedure. They include fuel and
time allowances for discontinued approach and climb to 1000 ft, which are similar to those assumed for
take-off and initial climb in the Sector Time and Fuel tables. Therefore the diversion tables also may be
used to determine Sector Time and Fuels using the Long Range Procedure for short sectors.
INTRODUCTION
This Sub-section provides tabulated data for holding fuel flow versus weight and holding altitude.
The data is provided for engine antice off and engine antice on. The fuel flows are calculated with the
assumption that the holding is accomplished while flying circuits with 25° bank and the extra drag for
this condition is allowed for.
16,000 165 1038 1010 971 938 899 867 850 849
17,000 170 1086 1057 1017 981 940 909 891 879
18,000 175 1135 1105 1060 1023 982 951 934 922
19,000 180 1185 1154 1107 1066 1025 995 978 967
20,000 185 1236 1204 1153 1111 1068 1038 1022 1011
21,000 190 1288 1250 1197 1154 1111 1080 1065 1054
22,000 194 1339 1297 1243 1197 1156 1125 1109 1098
23,000 198 1387 1343 1287 1240 1199 1169 1150 1139
24,000 202 1433 1388 1332 1283 1242 1213 1193 1181
25,000 206 1481 1434 1378 1328 1286 1258 1236 1222
26,000 210 1527 1481 1425 1375 1333 1303 1279 1264
8XC098
NOTE: Total fuel flow is increased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C above ISA and
decreased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C below ISA.
ENGINE ANTICE ON
16,000 165 1163 1131 1088 1051 1007 971 952 951
17,000 170 1216 1184 1139 1099 1053 1018 998 984
18,000 175 1272 1239 1188 1147 1101 1066 1047 1034
19,000 180 1314 1280 1228 1182 1137 1103 1085 1072
20,000 185 1392 1356 1298 1251 1203 1169 1151 1138
21,000 190 1449 1406 1347 1298 1250 1215 1198 1186
22,000 194 1532 1484 1422 1369 1322 1287 1269 1256
23,000 198 1587 1536 1472 1419 1372 1337 1316 1303
24,000 202 1639 1588 1524 1468 1421 1388 1365 1351
25,000 206 1694 1641 1576 1519 1471 1439 1414 1398
26,000 210 1747 1694 1630 1573 1525 1491 1463 1446
8XC098
NOTE: Total fuel flow is increased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C above ISA and
decreased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C below ISA.
Climb fuel, distance and time are tabulated versus take-off weight and altitude at top of climb.
Fuel and time for takeoff and initial climb to 160 KIAS at 1000 ft are included. The data is presented for
temperatures in the range from ISA -15° C to ISA + 20° C.
OPTIMUM TIME-TO-HEIGHT CLIMB (Reference the charts on pages 3-18 through 3-29)
From 5000 ft, the optimum time-to-height climb continues at 250 KIAS to 28,000 ft
at which IMN = 0.63. The final part of the climb to cruise altitude is at IMN = 0.63.
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 96 128 151 173 194 216 237 259 281 304
19,000 DIST 0 1 3 5 6 7 9 11 12 14 17
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5
FUEL 65 101 135 160 183 205 228 251 274 297 321
20,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 15 18
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 69 107 142 168 193 217 241 265 289 314 339
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 8 10 12 14 16 19
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 72 112 150 177 203 228 253 279 304 331 357
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 17 20
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 75 117 157 186 213 239 266 293 320 348 376
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 9 11 13 16 18 21
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6
FUEL 78 123 164 195 223 251 279 307 336 365 395
24,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 22
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 81 129 172 204 233 263 292 322 352 382 414
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 8 10 12 15 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 84 134 180 213 244 275 306 337 368 400 433
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 87 140 188 223 255 287 319 352 385 418 453
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 14 16 19 22 25
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 90 146 196 232 266 299 333 367 401 437 473
28,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 12 14 17 20 23 27
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
8XC103-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 97 129 153 175 197 219 241 264 287 310
19,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 13 15 17
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5
FUEL 65 102 136 162 185 208 232 255 279 303 328
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 8 10 12 14 16 18
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 69 107 144 170 195 220 244 269 294 320 346
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 9 10 12 14 17 19
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 72 113 151 179 205 231 257 283 310 337 365
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 18 21
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 75 118 158 188 216 243 270 298 326 355 384
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 22
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 78 124 166 197 226 255 283 312 342 372 403
24,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 81 129 174 206 237 267 297 327 358 390 423
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 84 135 181 216 247 279 310 342 375 408 443
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 16 19 22 25
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 87 141 189 225 258 291 324 358 392 427 463
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 14 17 20 23 27
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 90 147 198 235 269 304 338 373 409 446 483
28,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 12 15 17 20 24 28
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8
8XC104-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 98 132 157 181 204 228 252 276 302 328
19,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 15 17 20
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 65 104 140 166 191 216 241 267 293 319 347
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 9 11 13 16 19 22
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 69 109 147 175 201 228 254 281 309 337 367
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 6
FUEL 72 115 155 184 212 240 268 296 326 356 387
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 75 120 162 193 223 252 281 312 342 374 407
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 11 13 16 19 22 26
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
FUEL 78 126 170 203 234 264 295 327 360 393 428
24,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 14 16 20 23 27
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 81 132 178 212 245 277 309 343 377 412 449
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 21 24 29
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 84 137 186 222 256 290 324 359 395 432 471
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 18 22 26 30
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 87 143 194 232 267 303 338 375 413 452 493
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 19 23 27 31
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8
FUEL 90 149 202 242 279 316 353 392 431 472 515
28,000 DIST 0 3 6 8 11 14 17 20 24 28 33
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
8XC105-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 100 135 161 186 211 236 261 287 314 341
19,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 7 9 11 14 16 19 23
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 65 105 142 171 197 223 249 276 304 332 361
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 69 111 150 180 208 235 263 292 321 351 382
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 13 16 19 22 26
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 72 116 158 189 219 248 277 308 339 370 403
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 7 9 11 14 16 20 23 27
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
FUEL 75 122 166 199 230 260 292 324 356 390 425
23,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 21 24 29
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 78 127 174 208 241 273 306 340 374 410 447
24,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 18 22 26 30
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 81 133 182 218 252 286 321 356 393 430 469
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 19 23 27 32
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8
FUEL 84 139 190 228 264 300 336 373 412 451 492
26,000 DIST 0 3 6 8 11 14 17 20 24 29 34
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
FUEL 87 145 199 239 276 313 351 391 431 472 516
27,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 11 14 18 21 25 30 35
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
FUEL 90 151 207 249 288 327 367 408 450 494 540
28,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 22 27 31 37
TIME 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 9
8XC106-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 101 138 166 192 218 245 272 300 328 357
19,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 13 15 18 22 25
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 65 106 146 175 203 231 259 288 318 348 379
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 9 11 14 16 20 23 27
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 69 112 153 185 215 244 274 305 336 368 401
21,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 21 25 29
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 72 118 161 195 226 257 289 321 355 389 424
22,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 18 22 26 30
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 75 123 170 205 238 270 304 338 373 410 447
23,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 20 23 28 32
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 78 129 178 215 250 284 319 356 393 431 471
24,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 21 25 29 34
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 8
FUEL 81 135 186 225 262 298 335 373 412 453 495
25,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 11 14 18 22 26 31 36
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
FUEL 84 141 195 236 274 312 351 391 432 475 519
26,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 19 23 27 32 38
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9
FUEL 87 147 204 246 286 326 367 409 453 498 544
27,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 13 16 20 24 29 34 40
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 90 154 213 257 299 341 384 428 474 521 570
28,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 13 17 21 25 30 35 42
TIME 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10
8XC107-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 102 141 171 199 227 255 285 315 345 377
19,000 DIST 0 2 4 7 9 12 14 17 21 25 29
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
FUEL 65 108 149 181 211 240 271 302 334 367 401
20,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 19 22 26 31
TIME 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 69 114 157 191 222 254 286 319 353 388 425
21,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 20 24 28 33
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 72 119 165 201 234 268 302 337 373 410 449
22,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 21 25 29 35
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 8
FUEL 75 125 174 211 247 282 318 355 393 433 474
23,000 DIST 0 2 6 9 11 15 18 22 26 31 37
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
FUEL 78 131 182 222 259 296 334 374 414 456 500
24,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 19 23 28 33 39
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9
FUEL 81 137 191 233 272 311 351 392 435 479 526
25,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 13 16 20 24 29 35 41
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 84 144 200 244 285 326 368 412 457 504 552
26,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 13 17 21 26 31 37 43
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 87 150 209 255 298 341 386 432 479 528 580
27,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 14 18 22 27 32 39 45
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FUEL 90 157 219 267 312 357 403 452 502 554 608
28,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 15 19 23 28 34 40 48
TIME 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8XC108-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 104 145 177 207 237 267 299 331 365 400
19,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 20 23 28 33
TIME 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 65 110 153 187 219 251 283 317 352 388 425
20,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 21 25 30 35
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8
FUEL 69 115 162 197 231 265 300 336 373 411 451
21,000 DIST 0 2 6 9 11 15 18 22 27 31 37
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
FUEL 72 121 170 208 244 280 317 355 394 435 477
22,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 19 23 28 33 39
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
FUEL 75 128 179 219 257 295 334 374 416 459 505
23,000 DIST 0 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 30 35 42
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 78 134 188 230 270 310 351 394 438 484 532
24,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 14 17 22 26 32 37 44
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 81 140 197 242 284 326 369 414 461 510 561
25,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 14 18 23 28 33 40 47
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FUEL 84 147 207 253 297 342 387 435 485 536 590
26,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 15 19 24 29 35 42 49
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
FUEL 87 153 216 265 312 358 406 457 509 563 621
27,000 DIST 0 3 8 12 16 20 25 31 37 44 52
TIME 1 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
FUEL 90 160 226 277 326 375 425 478 533 591 651
28,000 DIST 0 4 8 12 17 21 26 32 39 46 55
TIME 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13
8XC109-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 96 128 151 173 194 216 238 259 281 304
19,000 DIST 0 1 3 5 6 7 9 11 12 14 17
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5
FUEL 65 101 135 160 183 206 228 251 274 298 321
20,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 15 18
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 69 107 142 168 193 217 241 265 289 314 339
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 8 10 12 14 16 19
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 72 112 149 177 203 228 253 279 305 331 358
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 17 20
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 75 117 157 186 213 239 266 293 320 348 376
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 9 11 13 16 18 21
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6
FUEL 78 123 164 195 223 251 279 307 336 365 395
24,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 22
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 81 128 172 204 234 263 292 322 352 382 414
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 8 10 12 15 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 84 134 180 213 244 275 306 337 368 400 433
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 87 140 188 223 255 287 319 352 385 418 453
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 14 16 19 22 25
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 90 146 196 232 266 299 333 367 401 437 473
28,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 12 14 17 20 23 26
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7
8XC193-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 97 129 153 175 197 219 242 264 287 310
19,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 13 15 17
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5
FUEL 65 102 136 162 185 209 232 255 279 304 328
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 8 10 12 14 16 18
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 69 107 144 170 195 220 245 269 295 320 347
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 9 10 12 14 17 19
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 72 113 151 179 205 231 257 284 310 338 365
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 18 21
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 75 118 158 188 216 243 270 298 326 355 384
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 19 22
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 78 124 166 197 226 255 284 313 342 373 404
24,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 81 129 174 206 237 267 297 328 359 390 423
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 84 135 181 216 248 279 311 343 375 409 443
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 13 16 19 22 25
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 87 141 189 225 259 291 324 358 392 427 463
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 14 17 20 23 26
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 90 147 198 235 270 304 339 374 409 446 484
28,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 12 15 17 20 24 28
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8
8XC194-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 98 132 157 181 204 228 252 277 302 328
19,000 DIST 0 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 15 17 20
TIME 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
FUEL 65 104 139 166 191 216 241 267 293 320 347
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 5 7 9 11 13 16 18 22
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6
FUEL 69 109 147 175 201 228 254 282 309 338 367
21,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 9 12 14 17 20 23
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 6
FUEL 72 115 154 184 212 240 268 297 326 356 387
22,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 75 120 162 193 223 252 282 312 343 375 408
23,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 11 13 16 19 22 26
TIME 1 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 78 126 170 203 233 264 296 327 360 394 428
24,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 11 14 16 20 23 27
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 81 131 178 212 244 277 310 343 377 413 449
25,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 21 24 28
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7
FUEL 84 137 186 222 256 290 324 359 395 432 471
26,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 18 22 25 30
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 87 143 194 232 267 303 339 375 413 452 493
27,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 19 23 27 31
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 8
FUEL 90 149 202 242 279 316 353 392 432 473 515
28,000 DIST 0 3 6 8 11 13 17 20 24 28 33
TIME 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
8XC195-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 101 138 166 192 218 244 271 299 327 356
19,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 8 10 13 15 18 22 25
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6
FUEL 65 106 145 175 203 230 258 287 317 347 378
20,000 DIST 0 2 4 6 9 11 13 16 19 23 27
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7
FUEL 69 112 153 185 214 243 273 304 335 367 400
21,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 21 24 29
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7
FUEL 72 117 161 194 225 256 288 320 353 387 422
22,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 18 22 26 30
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 75 123 169 204 237 270 303 337 372 408 445
23,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 19 23 27 32
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 78 129 177 214 249 283 318 354 391 429 469
24,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 24 29 34
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 8
FUEL 81 135 186 224 261 297 334 372 411 451 493
25,000 DIST 0 3 6 8 11 14 18 22 26 30 36
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
FUEL 84 141 194 235 273 311 350 390 431 473 517
26,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 19 23 27 32 37
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9
FUEL 87 147 203 246 285 325 366 408 451 496 542
27,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 16 20 24 28 34 39
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 90 153 212 256 298 340 382 426 472 519 568
28,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 13 17 20 25 30 35 41
TIME 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10
8XC197-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 102 141 171 199 227 256 285 315 346 377
19,000 DIST 0 2 4 7 9 12 14 17 21 25 29
TIME 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7
FUEL 65 108 149 181 211 241 271 302 334 367 401
20,000 DIST 0 2 5 7 10 12 15 19 22 26 31
TIME 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 69 114 157 191 223 254 286 320 354 388 425
21,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 20 24 28 33
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8
FUEL 72 119 166 201 235 268 302 337 373 411 449
22,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 21 25 30 35
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 8
FUEL 75 125 174 212 247 282 318 355 394 433 474
23,000 DIST 0 2 6 9 11 15 18 22 26 31 37
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
FUEL 78 131 183 222 260 297 335 374 415 456 500
24,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 15 19 23 28 33 39
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 9
FUEL 81 137 191 233 272 311 351 393 436 480 526
25,000 DIST 0 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 29 35 41
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 84 144 200 244 285 326 368 412 457 504 552
26,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 13 17 21 26 31 37 43
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 87 150 210 255 299 342 386 432 480 529 580
27,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 14 18 22 27 33 39 45
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FUEL 90 157 219 267 312 357 404 452 502 554 608
28,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 15 19 23 29 34 41 48
TIME 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8XC198-1
TOW 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
FUEL 62 104 145 177 207 237 267 299 332 365 400
19,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 10 13 16 20 24 28 33
TIME 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8
FUEL 65 110 153 187 219 251 284 317 352 388 425
20,000 DIST 0 2 5 8 11 14 17 21 25 30 35
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8
FUEL 69 116 162 198 231 265 300 336 373 411 451
21,000 DIST 0 2 6 9 11 15 18 22 27 32 37
TIME 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9
FUEL 72 122 170 208 244 280 317 355 395 435 478
22,000 DIST 0 3 6 9 12 16 19 24 28 34 40
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
FUEL 75 128 179 219 257 295 334 375 417 460 505
23,000 DIST 0 3 6 10 13 16 20 25 30 36 42
TIME 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 78 134 188 230 270 311 352 395 439 485 533
24,000 DIST 0 3 7 10 14 17 22 26 32 38 44
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10
FUEL 81 140 197 242 284 326 370 415 462 511 562
25,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 14 18 23 28 34 40 47
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
FUEL 84 147 207 254 298 342 388 436 486 537 591
26,000 DIST 0 3 7 11 15 19 24 29 35 42 50
TIME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
FUEL 87 153 216 266 312 359 407 457 510 564 622
27,000 DIST 0 3 8 12 16 20 25 31 37 44 52
TIME 1 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
FUEL 90 160 226 278 327 376 426 479 535 592 653
28,000 DIST 0 4 8 12 17 21 27 32 39 47 55
TIME 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13
8XC199-1
Figure 1
Normal Procedure Pressure Rate of Climb - Antice Off
Cruise true airspeed, fuel flow and indicated airspeed are tabulated in this Sub-section for a range of
temperatures from ISA -10° C to ISA + 20° C , for three procedures:
Graphical charts of nautical air miles per lb of fuel versus weight and speed appear in this Sub-section
with altitudes being covered from 20,000 ft to 41,000 ft in ISA conditions.
The enroute fuel check, located at the back of this Sub-section, allows quick estimation of the fuel
required to complete the flight to a destination.
5000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1802 1824 1849 1873 1896 1919 1942 1965
lb/hr
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1824 1847 1872 1896 1919 1942 1965 1989
lb/hr
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1852 1875 1900 1923 1947 1971 1994 2018
lb/hr
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1883 1907 1931 1955 1979 2003 2028 2052
lb/hr
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1916 1939 1964 1989 2013 2038 2062 2087
lb/hr
27,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1932 1955 1980 2005 2030 2054 2079 2104
lb/hr
7000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1775 1798 1820 1844 1867 1890 1913 1936
lb/hr
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1797 1820 1843 1866 1890 1913 1937 1960
lb/hr
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1825 1847 1871 1895 1918 1942 1966 1990
lb/hr
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1856 1878 1903 1927 1951 1975 1999 2023
lb/hr
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1888 1911 1935 1960 1985 2009 2034 2058
lb/hr
27,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1904 1927 1952 1977 2001 2026 2051 2075
lb/hr
9000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC114
11,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC115
13,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC116
15,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC117
17,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC118
19,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC119
21,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC120
23,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights.
25,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC122
27,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC123
29,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC124
31,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC125
33,000 ft
NOTE: VMO is limited to the ventral tank full speed at higher weights. 8XC126
35,000 ft
37,000 ft
39,000 ft
41,000 ft
9000 ft
INTERMEDIATE CRUISE
11,000 ft
INTERMEDIATE CRUISE
13,000 ft
15,000 ft
17,000 ft
19,000 ft
21,000 ft
23,000 ft
25,000 ft
27,000 ft
29,000 ft
31,000 ft
33,000 ft
35,000 ft
37,000 ft
39,000 ft
41,000 ft
230 KIAS
230 KIAS
33,000 ft
35,000 ft
37,000 ft
39,000 ft
41,000 ft
Figure 1
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 20,000 ft ISA
Figure 2
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 25,000 ft ISA
Figure 3
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 31,000 ft ISA
Figure 4
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 33,000 ft ISA
Figure 5
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 35,000 ft ISA
Figure 6
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 37,000 ft ISA
Figure 7
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 39,000 ft ISA
Figure 8
CRUISE AIR MILES per lb of FUEL - 41,000 ft ISA
1 HEADWIND <----(KT)----> TAILWIND
3. The intersection of the row and column thus identified in part 5 of the table will 100 80 60 40 20 0 -20 -40 -60 -80 -100
show the fuel required to cover the remaining distance to the destination.
149 160 170 180 189 200 210 220 230 240 250 440 440 450 460 470 490 490 500 510 520 530 530 540 560
NOTES:
225
300
240
320
255
340
270
360
285
380
300
400
315
420
330
440
345
460
360
480
375
500
710
870
710
970
730
1010
750
1030
760
1060
780
1090
800
1110
810
1130
820
1140
840
1160
860
1180
860
1200
880
1220
910
1260
1. If the ground distance to go falls between two values in the table
then interpolate the fuel required from the corresponding rows in
375
450
400
480
425
510
450
540
475
570
500
600
525
630
550
660
575
690
600
720
625
750
1140
1410
1240
1520
1290
1570
1320
1610
1350
1640
1390
1690
1420
1730
1440
1760
1460
1780
1480
1810
1520
1850
1530
1870
1560
1910
1610
1970
part 5 . 525
600
560
640
595
680
630
720
665
760
700
800
735
840
770
880
805
920
840
960
875
1000
1680
1960
1780
2060
1850
2140
1900
2190
1940
2240
2010
2320
2040
2360
2080
2400
2110
2430
2140
2470
2190
2530
2220
2560
2260
2610
2320
2690
GROUND DISTANCE TO GO nm
2. The effect of temperature on the en route fuel check is negligible. 675 720 765 810 855 900 945 990 1035 1080 1125 2240 2340 2430 2490 2550 2630 2680 2730 2760 2810 2870 2910 2960 3040
750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 2630 2720 2790 2850 2940 3010 3060 3090 3140 3210 3260 3310 3410
825
900
880
960
935
1020
990
1080
1045
1140
1100
1200
1155
1260
1210
1320
1265
1380
1320
1440
1375
1500
2910
3210
3020
3320
3100
3410
3160
3480
3270
3590
3330
3660
3380
3720
3430
3770
3480
3830
3560
3910
3610
3960
3670
4030
3780
4150
2
1425 1520 1615 1710 1805 1900 1995 2090 2185 2280 2375
5660 5760 5920 6020 6110 6180 6270 6380 6460 6560 6730
5
1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 5990 6100 6270 6370 6460 6540 6630 6750 6820 6930 7110
1575
1650
1680
1760
1785
1870
1890
1980
1995
2090
2100
2200
2205
2310
2310
2420
2415
2530
2520
2640
2625
2750
6340 6440 6610
6940
6720
7040
6810
7140
6890
7220
6980
7310
7100
7430
7180
7510
7280
7620
7470
7810
1725
1800
1840
1920
1955
2040
2070
2160
2185
2280
2300
2400
2415
2520
2530
2640
2645
2760
2760
2880
2875
3000
7290 7410
7760
7500
7850
7580
7930
7680
8020
7810
8150
7880
8230
8000
8340
8190
8530
1875
1950
2000
2080
2125
2210
2250
2340
2375
2470
2500
2600
2625
2730
2750
2860
2875
2990
3000
3120
3125
3250
8080 8180 8260
8630
8360
8730
8490
8860
8570
8940
8680
9060
8880
9260
2025
2100
160
2240
295
2380
430
2520
565
2660
2700
2800
2835
2940
2970
3080
3105
3220
3240
3360
3375
3500
8960
9320
9060
9420
9190
9560
9270
9640
9380
9750
9580
9950
8XC170
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................5-3
NORMAL DESCENT ISA.............................................................................5-4
Descent Fuel, Distance and Time are tabulated in this Sub-section against Arrival Weight.
The data is presented for a descent at 0.76 IMN/285/250 KIAS in ISA conditions.
The descent procedure specifies a constant 1000 ft/min rate of descent down to 37,000 ft, where the
thrust is reduced to idle for the remainder of the descent to 1500 ft.
The effect of temperature on descent fuel, distance and time is negligible and the descent ends at the
arrival weight at 160 KIAS and 1500 ft altitude.
A summary of single engine ceilings for a range of weights and temperatures, at:
These ceilings are based on average airplane performance and are intended only for estimating
altitudes for use in fuel planning. Since they do not contain any margin they must not be used for
checking obstacle clearance.
Where obstacle clearance after engine failure is relevant, it should be checked using the en-route net
gradient data in the Airplane Flight Manual. This will show a net ceiling lower than the en-route data
given in this Sub-section (SUMMARY OF SINGLE ENGINE CEILINGS).
Ceilings obtained from the AFM for an en-route net gradient of zero are shown in this Sub-section
(OBSTACLE CLEARANCE).
It is assumed that the drift down is conducted at maximum continuous thrust at the minimum cruise
speed for the weight at engine failure.
If an engine fails, the cruise altitude is reduced, with a subsequent reduction in air miles per lb. To
minimize the loss of range, the thrust on the operative engine should be increased to maximum
continuous thrust and the speed reduced to the recommended single engine cruise speed (refer to the
table for Long Range Cruise Speed) and allow the airplane to drift down to its new cruise altitude.
The increase in fuel required is substantial and the possibility of engine failure must be considered when
planning a long flight with no en-route alternates, since this case may determine the fuel reserve
required.
Fuel required may be calculated on the assumption of an instantaneous loss of height from two-engine
to single engine altitude. If in the particular case it is practicable to do the gradual drift down mentioned
above, there will be a savings of approximately 150 lb of fuel compared with the instantaneous loss of
height.
Figure 1 - Range After Engine Failure shows the effect on range of the loss of altitude associated with
an engine failure.
Single Engine Holding Fuel Flows are also provided in this Sub-section.
The descent data is presented for daylight operations at ISA. An altitude range from the top of the
descent down to 14,000 feet is provided for a range of weights. Maximum descent speed is 0.70 Mach/
300 KIAS.
The cruise data is provided as a function of cruise altitudes, weights and temperatures for daylight
operations at ISA. Speed is listed in both Knots True Airspeed (KTAS) and Knots Indicated Airspeed
(KIAS). Total fuel flow is given in pounds per hour.
SINGLE ENGINE
MINIMUM SPEED
CRUISE MAXIMUM CRUISE ALTITUDE ft
KIAS
WEIGHT lb
26,000 210 25,800 25,200 23,900 22,500 21,400 20,300 18,800 16,700
25,000 206 26,800 26,200 25,100 23,700 22,500 21,600 20,100 18,300
24,000 202 27,800 27,400 26,300 25,000 23,800 22,800 21,400 19,900
23,000 198 28,700 28,500 27,500 26,300 25,000 23,900 22,600 21,300
22,000 194 29,700 29,500 28,700 27,600 26,200 25,100 23,800 22,600
21,000 189 30,700 30,500 29,800 29,000 27,500 26,300 25,000 23,800
20,000 185 31,600 31,500 30,900 30,200 28,800 27,500 26,200 25,000
19,000 180 32,500 32,400 32,000 31,500 30,300 28,900 27,500 26,300
18,000 175 33,400 33,300 33,000 32,600 31,700 30,500 28,800 27,700
8XC172
NOTE: These altitudes are determined with the operative engine running at
Maximum Continuous Thrust.
CRUISE
MAXIMUM CRUISE WEIGHT lb
ALTITUDE ft
17,000 25,800
NOTE: These ceilings are based on average performance with the operative engine running at
Maximum Continuous Thrust. To check obstacle clearance, use the en route net gradient in
the Airplane Flight Manual.
AFM en route net ceilings with zero net gradient are presented in the table on the following
page.
Figure 1
Range After Engine Failure
ISA -15° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -60 -60 -59 -59 -58 -58 -57 -57
TIME min 41 42 43 45 47 48 50 51
41,000 DISTANCE nm 203 212 221 234 245 254 263 271
FUEL USED lb 600 640 685 750 810 865 920 975
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,530 31,170 30,300 29,400 28,490 27,570 26,660 25,730
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -61 -61 -60 -60 -59 -59 -58 -58
TIME min 38 39 41 43 45 47 48 49
39,000 DISTANCE nm 189 198 207 221 233 243 252 261
FUEL USED lb 570 610 660 725 785 845 900 955
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,510 31,150 30,280 29,390 28,470 27,560 26,640 25,720
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -62 -62 -61 -61 -60 -60 -60 -59
TIME min 35 36 38 41 43 44 46 47
37,000 DISTANCE nm 172 181 192 207 219 230 240 249
FUEL USED lb 535 575 625 695 755 815 875 930
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,480 31,120 30,260 29,360 28,450 27,540 26,620 25,700
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -61 -60 -60 -59 -59 -59 -58 -58
TIME min 31 32 34 37 40 42 44 45
35,000 DISTANCE nm 150 160 173 190 204 216 226 236
FUEL USED lb 480 520 580 655 720 780 840 900
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,450 31,090 30,230 29,330 28,420 27,510 26,600 25,680
8XC177-1
ISA -15° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -57 -57 -56 -56 -56 -55 -55 -55
TIME min 24 26 30 33 36 39 41 43
33,000 DISTANCE nm 117 129 148 168 184 198 210 221
FUEL USED lb 385 435 505 595 665 735 800 860
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,380 31,030 30,180 29,290 28,380 27,480 26,570 25,650
CONSTANT KIAS 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -53 -53 -53 -52 -52 -52 -51
TIME min 10 20 27 31 34 37 39
31,000 DISTANCE nm 47 101 134 157 174 189 202
FUEL USED lb 165 355 485 580 660 735 805
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 30,820 30,070 29,210 28,320 27,430 26,520 25,610
CONSTANT KIAS 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -49 -49 -49 -48 -48
TIME min 7 21 27 31 35
29,000 DISTANCE nm 34 102 135 158 176
FUEL USED lb 130 390 530 630 720
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,910 28,170 27,330 26,450 25,550
CONSTANT KIAS 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -45 -45 -45
TIME min 4 20 27
27,000 DISTANCE nm 20 98 134
FUEL USED lb 80 405 565
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,960 26,270 25,440
CONSTANT KIAS
IOAT AT START °C
TIME min
25,000 DISTANCE nm
FUEL USED lb
FINAL ALTITUDE ft
8XC177-2
ISA -10° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -55 -54 -54 -53 -53 -52 -52 -51
TIME min 41 42 43 47 49 51 53 55
41,000 DISTANCE nm 208 217 226 244 258 271 282 293
FUEL USED lb 615 660 705 790 860 930 995 1060
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,430 31,080 30,210 29,250 28,240 27,210 26,180 25,140
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -56 -56 -55 -55 -54 -54 -53 -53
TIME min 38 40 41 45 47 49 51 53
39,000 DISTANCE nm 193 202 211 231 246 259 271 283
FUEL USED lb 590 630 675 765 835 905 975 1045
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,410 31,060 30,190 29,230 28,220 27,190 26,160 25,120
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -57 -56 -56 -56 -55 -55 -54 -54
TIME min 35 37 38 42 45 47 49 51
37,000 DISTANCE nm 176 185 196 217 232 247 259 271
FUEL USED lb 550 590 640 730 805 880 950 1020
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,380 31,030 30,160 29,210 28,190 27,170 26,140 25,110
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -55 -55 -55 -54 -54 -53 -53 -53
TIME min 31 33 35 39 42 45 47 49
35,000 DISTANCE nm 154 165 177 200 217 232 245 258
FUEL USED lb 495 540 595 690 770 845 915 990
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,350 31,000 30,130 29,180 28,160 27,140 26,110 25,080
8XC178-1
ISA -10° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -52 -52 -51 -51 -51 -50 -50 -49
TIME min 25 27 30 35 39 42 44 47
33,000 DISTANCE nm 121 134 151 178 197 214 229 243
FUEL USED lb 400 450 520 630 720 795 875 950
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 31,280 30,940 30,080 29,130 28,120 27,100 26,080 25,050
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -49 -48 -48 -48 -47 -47 -47 -46
TIME min 4 11 21 29 34 37 41 43
31,000 DISTANCE nm 20 56 106 145 170 190 208 224
FUEL USED lb 70 195 380 525 635 725 815 895
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 30,960 30,750 29,980 29,040 28,050 27,050 26,030 25,010
CONSTANT KIAS 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -44 -44 -44 -43 -43
TIME min 12 24 30 35 39
29,000 DISTANCE nm 60 120 153 179 198
FUEL USED lb 225 460 600 715 810
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,750 27,900 26,940 25,950 24,940
CONSTANT KIAS 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -40 -40 -39
TIME min 14 25 31
27,000 DISTANCE nm 72 127 160
FUEL USED lb 295 525 670
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,660 25,790 24,830
CONSTANT KIAS 214
IOAT AT START °C -36
TIME min 16
25,000 DISTANCE nm 83
FUEL USED lb 360
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 24,560
8XC178-2
ISA
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206
IOAT AT START °C -44 -44 -43 -43 -42 -42
TIME min 50 49 52 55 57 59
41,000 DISTANCE nm 254 253 273 289 301 312
FUEL USED lb 780 785 870 950 1020 1085
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 30,050 29,860 28,680 27,410 26,120 24,840
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -45 -45 -44 -44 -43 -43 -42 -42
TIME min 48 46 50 53 55 58 60 61
39,000 DISTANCE nm 240 239 259 276 289 301 312 321
FUEL USED lb 750 755 845 925 1000 1065 1135 1200
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 30,020 29,840 28,660 27,380 26,100 24,820 23,590 22,440
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -46 -46 -45 -45 -45 -44 -44 -43
TIME min 44 44 48 51 53 56 58 59
37,000 DISTANCE nm 222 223 245 261 275 288 299 310
FUEL USED lb 710 720 815 895 970 1040 1110 1175
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 29,990 29,800 28,630 27,360 26,080 24,800 23,570 22,420
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -45 -45 -44 -44 -43 -43 -42 -42
TIME min 41 40 44 48 51 53 55 57
35,000 DISTANCE nm 201 204 227 245 260 274 285 297
FUEL USED lb 660 675 770 855 935 1010 1080 1150
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 29,950 29,760 28,580 27,320 26,040 24,770 23,540 22,390
8XC179-1
ISA
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -42 -41 -41 -40 -40 -40 -39 -39
TIME min 35 35 40 44 47 50 53 55
33,000 DISTANCE nm 172 178 204 225 242 258 270 282
FUEL USED lb 575 605 710 805 885 965 1040 1110
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 29,880 29,690 28,520 27,270 26,000 24,730 23,510 22,370
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -38 -38 -38 -37 -37 -36 -36 -36
TIME min 25 27 34 39 43 47 50 52
31,000 DISTANCE nm 123 135 172 198 218 237 252 265
FUEL USED lb 425 470 610 725 820 910 985 1065
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 29,750 29,560 28,420 27,190 25,940 24,680 23,470 22,330
CONSTANT KIAS 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -34 -34 -33 -33 -33 -32
TIME min 22 31 37 42 45 48
29,000 DISTANCE nm 109 156 187 211 229 245
FUEL USED lb 400 585 715 825 915 1005
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,190 27,050 25,840 24,600 23,410 22,280
CONSTANT KIAS 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -30 -30 -30 -29 -29
TIME min 15 27 35 40 44
27,000 DISTANCE nm 72 136 174 199 220
FUEL USED lb 280 535 700 815 920
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,680 25,660 24,480 23,330 22,210
CONSTANT KIAS
IOAT AT START °C
TIME min
25,000 DISTANCE nm
FUEL USED lb
FINAL ALTITUDE ft
8XC179-2
ISA +10° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198
IOAT AT START °C -34 -33 -33 -32
TIME min 54 56 58 60
41,000 DISTANCE nm 277 286 297 309
FUEL USED lb 855 905 960 1030
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,440 27,210 26,010 24,850
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206
IOAT AT START °C -35 -34 -34 -33 -33 -32
TIME min 52 54 56 58 60 63
39,000 DISTANCE nm 263 274 284 297 312 326
FUEL USED lb 825 880 940 1005 1085 1165
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,420 27,190 25,990 24,840 23,670 22,560
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -36 -35 -35 -35 -34 -34 -33 -33
TIME min 49 51 53 56 58 61 64 66
37,000 DISTANCE nm 246 258 270 283 298 313 328 342
FUEL USED lb 790 850 910 980 1060 1140 1225 1310
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,390 27,160 25,970 24,810 23,650 22,540 21,410 20,250
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -35 -34 -34 -33 -33 -32 -32 -31
TIME min 45 48 50 53 56 59 61 64
35,000 DISTANCE nm 226 240 253 268 284 299 314 329
FUEL USED lb 740 805 870 945 1030 1110 1195 1285
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,350 27,130 25,940 24,780 23,630 22,520 21,380 20,230
8XC180-1
ISA +10° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -31 -31 -30 -30 -30 -29 -29 -28
TIME min 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62
33,000 DISTANCE nm 201 219 234 251 268 284 300 316
FUEL USED lb 675 750 825 905 990 1075 1160 1250
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,300 27,080 25,900 24,750 23,600 22,490 21,360 20,200
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -28 -28 -27 -27 -26 -26 -26 -25
TIME min 34 39 43 46 50 53 56 59
31,000 DISTANCE nm 168 192 211 231 250 267 284 300
FUEL USED lb 575 675 760 850 940 1030 1120 1215
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,220 27,020 25,840 24,700 23,560 22,450 21,320 20,170
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -25 -24 -24 -23 -23 -23 -22 -22
TIME min 23 32 37 42 46 50 53 57
29,000 DISTANCE nm 112 154 183 207 228 248 265 284
FUEL USED lb 400 555 670 775 875 975 1065 1165
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 28,070 26,920 25,770 24,640 23,510 22,400 21,280 20,130
CONSTANT KIAS 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -21 -20 -20 -20 -19 -19 -19
TIME min 15 28 35 41 45 49 53
27,000 DISTANCE nm 74 135 172 199 223 243 263
FUEL USED lb 275 510 660 785 895 995 1105
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,660 25,630 24,540 23,430 22,340 21,220 20,080
CONSTANT KIAS 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -17 -16 -16 -16 -15
TIME min 22 32 38 44 48
25,000 DISTANCE nm 105 154 188 214 238
FUEL USED lb 415 620 770 895 1015
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 24,320 23,300 22,240 21,140 20,010
8XC180-2
ISA +20° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185
IOAT AT START °C -23
TIME min 61
41,000 DISTANCE nm 308
FUEL USED lb 930
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,630
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194
IOAT AT START °C -24 -24 -23
TIME min 58 61 63
39,000 DISTANCE nm 294 305 319
FUEL USED lb 910 980 1055
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,610 24,610 23,450
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202
IOAT AT START °C -26 -25 -24 -24 -23
TIME min 56 59 61 64 67
37,000 DISTANCE nm 278 291 306 321 338
FUEL USED lb 875 955 1030 1115 1205
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,580 24,580 23,430 22,250 21,030
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -24 -24 -23 -23 -22 -22 -21 -21
TIME min 53 56 59 62 65 69 74 78
35,000 DISTANCE nm 260 275 291 308 325 345 370 393
FUEL USED lb 840 920 1000 1085 1175 1285 1425 1565
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,550 24,560 23,400 22,230 21,010 19,740 18,350 16,850
8XC181-1
ISA +20° C
These ceilings are based on average performance at Maximum Continuous Thrust and a constant
drift down KIAS (minimum cruise speed at start of drift down weight).
To check obstacle clearance use the EN ROUTE NET GRADIENT in the Airplane Flight Manual which
will give a lower ceiling than the final drift down altitudes below.
ALTITUDE ft WEIGHT lb
AT ENGINE AT ENGINE 20,000 21,000 22,000 23,000 24,000 25,000 26,000 27,000
FAILURE FAILURE
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -21 -20 -20 -20 -19 -19 -18 -18
TIME min 49 53 56 59 62 67 72 77
33,000 DISTANCE nm 239 258 275 292 310 331 357 381
FUEL USED lb 790 880 960 1050 1145 1255 1395 1540
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,500 24,520 23,370 22,200 20,980 19,710 18,320 16,820
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -18 -17 -17 -16 -16 -16 -15 -15
TIME min 44 49 53 56 60 64 69 74
31,000 DISTANCE nm 214 238 256 275 294 316 342 367
FUEL USED lb 720 830 915 1005 1105 1220 1360 1510
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,440 24,480 23,330 22,160 20,940 19,670 18,280 16,790
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -14 -14 -13 -13 -13 -12 -12 -12
TIME min 37 44 49 52 56 61 66 72
29,000 DISTANCE nm 179 213 235 255 276 299 326 352
FUEL USED lb 620 760 855 955 1055 1175 1320 1470
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,340 24,430 23,280 22,110 20,900 19,630 18,240 16,750
CONSTANT KIAS 185 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -11 -10 -10 -10 -9 -9 -9 -8
TIME min 24 37 43 48 52 57 63 69
27,000 DISTANCE nm 116 178 206 230 254 279 308 335
FUEL USED lb 410 650 770 880 990 1120 1270 1425
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 26,150 24,340 23,210 22,050 20,840 19,580 18,190 16,690
CONSTANT KIAS 189 194 198 202 206 210 214
IOAT AT START °C -7 -7 -6 -6 -6 -5 -5
TIME min 24 34 41 47 53 59 65
25,000 DISTANCE nm 113 163 197 226 256 286 315
FUEL USED lb 425 625 770 900 1050 1205 1365
FINAL ALTITUDE ft 24,200 23,080 21,950 20,760 19,500 18,120 16,630
8XC181-2
11,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 976 989 1002 1015 1029 1043 1056 1069
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 236 238 241 243 245 247 250 252
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1070 1086 1101 1116 1131 1145 1159 1173
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1173 1189 1206 1222 1238 1253 1268 1284
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1278 1294 1311 1328 1346 1362 1379 1395
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1383 1400 1419 1439 1457 1475 1493 1510
lb/hr
KIAS 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
8XC182
13,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 966 979 993 1007 1021 1035 1048 1062
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 243 246 248 250 253 255 257 260
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1062 1078 1093 1108 1123 1137 1151 1166
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1163 1180 1196 1212 1227 1243 1258 1273
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1267 1283 1300 1317 1334 1352 1369 1385
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1372 1388 1409 1430 1449 1466 1483 1455
lb/hr
KIAS 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 234
8XC183
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
15,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 955 970 984 998 1012 1026 1040 1054
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 251 253 256 258 261 263 266 268
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1053 1069 1084 1098 1113 1127 1142 1157
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1153 1170 1185 1200 1216 1232 1248 1264
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1257 1272 1288 1308 1327 1344 1360 1371
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 230
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1365 1386 1406 1425 1442 1462 1436 1366
lb/hr
KIAS 240 240 240 240 240 240 234 221
8XC184
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
17,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 946 961 976 990 1004 1017 1031 1045
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 258 261 264 266 269 271 274 276
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1044 1059 1075 1089 1103 1118 1134 1149
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1146 1162 1176 1191 1209 1226 1242 1257
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1252 1269 1289 1308 1325 1340 1359 1310
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 221
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1372 1391 1410 1430 1450 1430 1369
lb/hr
KIAS 240 240 240 240 240 235 224
8XC185
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
19,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 939 953 968 982 996 1009 1022 1037
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 266 269 272 275 278 280 283 286
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1038 1053 1068 1081 1095 1114 1129 1144
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1143 1157 1175 1193 1209 1225 1239 1253
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 219
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1257 1277 1295 1311 1332 1349 1304 1245
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 230 230 222 209
26,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1379 1403 1423 1434 1393 1352
lb/hr
KIAS 240 240 240 239 231 223
8XC186
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
21,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 932 948 962 976 989 1002 1019 1034
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 275 278 281 284 287 289 292 295
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1037 1050 1064 1081 1098 1115 1129 1144
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 210
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1147 1165 1184 1201 1217 1237 1238 1185
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 220 218 208
24,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1268 1292 1311 1330 1317 1283 1228
lb/hr
KIAS 230 230 230 230 226 219 206
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
23,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 934 948 962 973 991 1008 1024 1038
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 284 287 290 293 296 299 302 297
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1043 1059 1076 1095 1111 1128 1147 1122
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 210 210 205
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1166 1184 1205 1223 1241 1215 1163
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 220 220 214 203
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
25,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 945 956 973 991 1008 1023 1042 1056
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
KTAS 294 297 300 303 306 308 296 280
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1065 1082 1101 1121 1138 1146 1096 1044
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 210 209 199 186
22,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1188 1204 1225 1212 1171 1131
lb/hr
KIAS 220 220 220 216 206 195
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
27,000 ft
18,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 966 983 1003 1022 1041 1060 1030 983
lb/hr
KIAS 200 200 200 200 200 200 193 183
KTAS 303 306 310 313 305 292
20,000 TOTAL FUEL FLOW 1082 1103 1117 1139 1109 1069
lb/hr
KIAS 210 210 210 210 202 191
KTAS
NOTE: Shaded values are for the maximum speed attainable at the given conditions.
ALTITUDE ft
NOTE: Total fuel flow is increased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C above ISA
and decreased by approximately 50 lb/hr for every 10° C below ISA.
SINGLE ENGINE
HIGH SPEED DESCENT
ISA
SINGLE ENGINE
HIGH SPEED DESCENT
ISA
10,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -22 -17 -12 -7 -2 3 8 13
KTAS 347 351 348 342 335 328 320 311
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
2016 2043 1992 1917 1833 1754 1671 1592
11,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -22 -17 -12 -7 -2 3 8 13
KTAS 350 352 348 342 335 328 320 311
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1989 2004 1939 1864 1784 1707 1627 1551
13,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -26 -21 -16 -11 -6 -1 4 9
KTAS 355 353 347 342 335 328 320 311
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1939 1905 1829 1758 1685 1614 1539 1466
15,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5
KTAS 358 353 347 340 334 328 320 311
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1868 1792 1718 1649 1583 1519 1449 1380
17,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -34 -29 -24 -19 -14 -9 -4 1
KTAS 357 352 346 340 335 329 321 313
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1759 1692 1620 1555 1502 1449 1386 1321
19,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -38 -33 -28 -23 -18 -13 -8 -3
KTAS 356 351 345 338 333 328 321 314
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1656 1589 1522 1459 1417 1375 1318 1261
21,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -42 -37 -32 -27 -22 -17 -12 -7
KTAS 354 350 343 335 331 327 320 313
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1560 1501 1433 1374 1337 1302 1249 1196
23,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -46 -41 -36 -31 -26 -21 -16 -11
KTAS 352 348 340 333 329 325 317 310
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1471 1423 1357 1301 1265 1231 1180 1129
25,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -50 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15
KTAS 349 346 338 330 326 321 313 305
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1379 1341 1281 1227 1191 1158 1107 1058
27,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -53 -48 -43 -38 -33 -28 -23 -18
KTAS 343 341 335 328 321 315 305 295
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr
1273 1253 1205 1163 1121 1086 1035 989
KIAS
RGALCR012B-10
Figure 1 shows the unfactored landing distance required from 50 feet (15.24m) to stop on a dry, wet or
slippery surface. The associated conditions are the same as those given for landing field length in Sub-
section 5.50 of the Airplane Flight Manual.
It is recommended that landing weights should be obtained from the AFM Sub-section 5.50 whenever
possible, however, there may be occasions where runway length available is too short to allow operation
to 14 CFR Part 121 standards and where a lower standard of safety is acceptable to the operator and
to the Airworthiness Authority.
Figure 1 shows the shortest achievable landing distance; in order to achieve this distance it is necessary
to:
In using this information obtain the landing distance required for the intended weight and compare it
with the runway length available. It is necessary to decide whether the safety margin is adequate, taking
into account the weather and the possible consequence of an overrun or undershoot caused by
attempts to touch down early.
NOTE: Instructions for the use of Figure 1 is provided on the following page.
• Follow the guidelines to the appropriate wind component and then to the reference line of runway
slope correction grid which is used in a similar way.
• If the runway is not dry, follow the guidelines to the appropriate condition and read the unfactored
landing distance required on the right hand scale.
NOTES:
1. The wind grid is factored in such a way that the effect of not more than 50% of headwinds
and not less than 150% of tailwinds is obtained. Reported winds may therefore be used
directly in the grids, but when a landing is to be made into a headwind greater than 40
knots the chart is to be read at 40 knots.
3. Figure 1 includes the effect on landing distance of a very slippery surface having a
braking coefficient of friction of 0.05 and is intended to cover the effect of icy surfaces
and hydroplaning.
Figure 1 is valid for runways with approximately zero gradient and with no tailwind.
Landing downhill or with a tailwind on a slippery runway should be avoided if possible.
The limiting combinations of wind and gradient for which Figure 1 is valid are shown on
figure 5.50.3 of the Airplane Flight Manual.
Combinations of wind and gradient lying in the shaded area are not permitted.
No reduction in stopping distance is credited for the use of reverse thrust and it is
assumed that when reverse thrust is not being used, one engine is shut down after
touchdown to assist deceleration.
Figure 1
Unfactored Landing Distance Required
Section - IV
FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
Sub-section 8
GEAR DOWN PERFORMANCE
Table of Contents
Page
INTRODUCTION
This Sub-section provides gear down flight planning data for climb, cruise and descent and is
for use in planning abnormal operations only. Normal operations require landing gear retraction
capability to meet AFM takeoff and climb performance. Data is provided up to the maximum
permissible altitude of 20,000 feet with the landing gear extended.
Climb time, fuel and distance are tabulated versus take-off weight and altitude at the top of the
climb. The gear down climb speed profile commences at 160 KIAS at 1000 feet and accelerates
to 210 KIAS at 5000 feet (maintaining airspeed below VLE/VLO minus 10 kts, 210 KIAS). Data
is provided for a range of temperatures from ISA -15° C to ISA +20° C.
Cruise data is tabulated for 210 KIAS at altitudes from 1000 feet to 20,000 feet. Data is provided
for a range of temperatures from ISA -15° C to ISA +20° C.
Descent data is tabulated against arrival weight. The descent speed is 210 KIAS down to the
1500 foot arrival altitude. The effect of temperature variation on descent fuel, distance, and time
is negligible.
1,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -2 3 8 13 18 23 28 33
KTAS
204 206 208 210 212 213 215 217
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1886 1908 1932 1955 1979 2003 2027 2050
3,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -6 -1 4 9 14 19 24 29
KTAS
210 212 214 216 218 220 221 223
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1858 1880 1904 1929 1952 1974 1997 2019
5,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25
KTAS
216 218 220 222 224 226 228 230
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1830 1853 1875 1898 1921 1944 1967 1990
7,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -14 -9 -4 1 6 11 16 21
KTAS
222 224 227 229 231 233 235 237
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1804 1826 1848 1871 1894 1917 1939 1961
9,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -18 -13 -8 -3 2 7 12 17
KTAS
229 231 233 236 238 240 242 244
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1778 1799 1823 1845 1867 1889 1912 1935
11,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -22 -17 -12 -7 -2 3 8 13
KTAS
236 238 241 243 245 247 250 252
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1755 1777 1799 1821 1844 1867 1890 1913
13,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -26 -21 -16 -11 -6 -1 4 9
KTAS
243 246 248 250 253 255 257 260
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1732 1755 1778 1800 1824 1847 1869 1892
15,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5
KTAS
251 253 256 258 261 263 266 268
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1707 1730 1753 1776 1799 1823 1847 1870
17,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -34 -29 -24 -19 -14 -9 -4 1
KTAS
258 261 264 266 269 271 274 276
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1684 1706 1729 1754 1778 1801 1825 1847
19,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -38 -33 -28 -23 -18 -13 -8 -3
KTAS
266 269 272 275 278 280 283 286
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1662 1685 1710 1735 1759 1783 1806 1829
20,000 ft
TEMPERATURE RELATIVE TO ISA ºC
CRUISE
-15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20
WEIGHT
lb AMBIENT TEMP ºC -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5
KTAS
271 274 277 279 282 285 288 290
TOTAL FUEL FLOW
18,000 lb/hr 1653 1677 1702 1727 1751 1773 1796 1820
Arrival Weight……….pounds
FUEL………………………pounds
DIST……………………….nautical miles
TIME……………………….minutes
Section - IV
FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
Sub-section 9
EXTENDED RANGE OPERATIONS (Non-ETOPS)
Table of Contents
Page
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................9-3
EXTENDED RANGE OPERATIONS (Non-ETOPS) ...................................9-3
This section presents information for Hawker 800XP Part 135 operators to conduct flights without
requiring FAA Extended Operations (ETOPS) approval.
Any flight that remains within 1027 nm of an adequate airport at all times does not require the
Part 135 certificate holder to have ETOPS authorization.
The 180 minute distance represents that travelled in 3 hours with one engine inoperative, after
an engine failure in cruise. It is based on FAA Information for Operators (InFO) 08019, “14 CFR
Part 135 Extended Operational (ETOPS) Guidance,” and the following assumptions:
• Standard conditions.
• Level off and cruise per the High Speed Cruise procedure.
• Engine failure at 1027 nm from the departure airport (weight 23,524 lb).
• Descent to 15,000 ft per the Single Engine High Speed Descent profile.
• Level off and cruise at 15,000 ft per the Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust Cruise
profile until reaching the destination airport or the diversion airport.
NOTE: This information addresses only the applicability of the ETOPS rule on certain routes.
Determining the applicability of the ETOPS rule is only one aspect of actual operational
long range flight planning, which includes, among other considerations:
• Equal Time Point (ETP) calculations for planned contingencies (engine failure,
depressurization, medical emergency, etc.).
• Unplanned contingencies.
— To maximize single engine range when ETOPS authorization is not required, use
the Single Engine Drift Down and the Single Engine Long Range Cruise
procedures in this manual.
• From the Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT) Cruise data at 15,000 ft, the
following table was prepared by linear interpolation:
• From the above table, the following Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT)
Cruise performance data at 15,000 ft was calculated (all numbers rounded to the nearest
unit):
• Adding the fuel, distance, and time from the Single Engine High Speed Descent to 15,000
ft and the Single Engine Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT) Cruise at 15,000 ft, the
following results were obtained:
Section - V
FLIGHT HANDLING
Table of Contents
Page
CAUTION: THE NOSEWHEEL STEERING SHOULD NOT BE MOVED WHILE THE AIRPLANE IS
STATIONARY.
When taxiing in snow or slush, it is recommended that brake applications be made to allow the residual
heat, in the brake friction pack, to dispose of any slush accumulation in the brake units.
If the thrust reverser system is known to be inoperative or not serviceable, it must be disabled and
locked in the forward thrust position.
The thrust reversers should be armed (ARM annunciator illuminated) before each flight unless the
system is inoperative or unserviceable.
Reverse thrust is only to be used when the main and nose gears are on the ground.
Movement of the thrust levers above IDLE is inhibited during thrust reverser deployment and stowage.
The UNLCK annunciators will illuminate when the thrust reverser doors are not locked in the stowed
position. When the thrust reverser doors are fully deployed the REVSR annunciator will illuminate and,
the UNLCK annunciator will remain illuminated.
Engine Computers
ENG CMPTRs ................................................................. Select OVRSPD PROT
T/Rs
RUDDER BIAS switches A & B ....................................... ON
RUDDER BIAS annunciator............................................. Extinguished
Left Thrust Lever.............................................................. Advance to approximately 85% N2
Verify rudder pedals deflect to the left.
Left T/R ARM annunciator ............................................... Extinguished
Right Engine T/R ............................................................. Deploy
Verify rudder bias input is removed.
REVERSER annunciator ................................................. Remains extinguished
Right T/R UNLCK & REVRS annunciators ...................... Illuminated
Right Engine T/R ............................................................. Stow
Right T/R UNLCK & REVRS annunciators ...................... Extinguished
Left Thrust Lever.............................................................. Retard to Idle
Repeat the procedure using the right Thrust Lever and left T/R.
A runway is considered well soaked when there is sufficient moisture on the runway surface to cause it
to appear reflective.
A slippery runway is one which is either covered by compacted snow or is expected to have very low
braking action due to the presence of wet ice. The coefficient of friction is: μ = 0.05
NOTE: A runway referred to as slippery, under these conditions, is extremely more slippery than a
wet runway.
Compacted snow is snow which has been compressed into a solid mass which resists further
compression and will hold together or break into lumps if picked up.
Operation On Unpaved Surfaces
Paved runways are those having a prepared hard surface such as concrete or tarmac.
Unpaved runways are those categorized into natural, grass, and gravel runways.
Takeoff from an unpaved runway with an uphill slope of more than 1.0% is not permitted.
Before operating on unpaved surfaces, the airplane should have the rough field modifications installed.
These modifications give protection to the flaps and the under-fuselage beacons and antennas.
Operation on natural grass and gravel runways is satisfactory if the surface is hard, no ruts or major
surface irregularities, and there are no large loose stones. Some minor paint chipping can be expected
from small stones thrown up by the nose wheels, but large stones may cause dents. If possible, the pilot
should inspect the runway surface before using it.
Tire wear will increase if heavy braking is used, particularly on gravel surfaces. Even if only light braking
is used, the tires should be visually inspected before each flight.
On unpaved surfaces, it may be desirable to reduce the tire pressures. It is recommended that the
airplane should not be operated on a surface where the tires leave ruts. If ruts are formed, the tire
pressure should be reduced as much as possible.
NOTE: Operation from unpaved runways may be subject to the approval of the local airworthiness
authorities.
Takeoff and landing techniques are similar to those for paved runways, subject to the following:
• Refer to the appropriate Supplement in the Airplane Flight Manual for categories of unpaved runway
from which the airplane is certified to operate.
• Thrust reversers may be deployed, but should not be used at more engine thrust than reverse idle,
except in an emergency.
Figure 1
Minimum Turn Radii
NOTE: The Maxaret unit does not operate until the wheel is revolving, therefore the brakes must not
be applied before touchdown.
It should be noted that the emergency braking system by-passes the anti-skid units, therefore care
should be exercised when using this system.
If any of the wheels' fusible plugs blow, the brakes must be inspected and certified serviceable before
the next takeoff.
The brakes are of adequate capacity to bring the airplane to a stop under all circumstances, including
a rejected takeoff from V1, provided the brake procedures in the AFM Section 5.05 are complied with.
• Heavy braking should not be used more than necessary for the purpose of the exercise, and the
landing gear should be extended as long as possible - never less than five minutes in each circuit.
• Landings with light braking may be repeated at intervals of not less than fifteen minutes. After a
landing with heavy braking, one or more touch and go circuits should be done, and a time of 30
minutes should elapse before the next braked landing.
For established cooling times, refer to the table in the Airplane Flight Manual Section 2 - LIMITATIONS.
TAKEOFF
Refer to the following paragraphs and referenced figures for recommended takeoff sequences and
procedures.
If the outside air temperature is 10° C or below and is associated with conditions of high humidity, i.e.,
mist or fog reducing visibility to approximately 1 mile (1,600 meters), or with a wet runway surface, set
ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 and ENG IGNITION 1 and 2 to ON.
NOTE: ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 should be selected ON before setting take-off thrust.
When takeoff is made with ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 selected ON, ITT must be monitored during takeoff
and initial climb.
Allowance must be made for the use of ENG ANTICE on performance by reference to the appropriate
figures in the Airplane Flight Manual Sub-section 5.05.
If necessary, the airframe WING/TAIL ANTICE switch may also be selected on for takeoff. Switch ENG
ANTICE 1 and 2 to OFF and the ENG IGNITION 1 and 2 to off when conditions permit.
P/N 140-590032-0007 Section V Sub-section 1 Page 1-7
Revision A4: Sep, 2010
NORMAL HANDLING
Pilot’s Operating Manual
NOTE: There is a fuel penalty when the engine antice systems are in use.
Whether in icing conditions or not, the SCREEN HEAT L and R and the PITOT/VANE HEAT L and R
should be selected ON in flight.
The ICE DET switch should normally be set to AUTO, but before taxiing in icing conditions, it should be
set to OVRD.
TAKEOFF PROCEDURES
Refer to Figure 2 for a Flight Profile of Normal Takeoff and to Section 4.10 of the Airplane Flight Manual.
Before takeoff, the elevator trim should be set to the position appropriate to the center of gravity of the
airplane as shown alongside the green segment of the elevator trim label. Select APR to ARM for
takeoff.
The normal recommended practice is to arm the APR after take-off power has been set.
NOTE: The yaw damper MUST NOT be engaged for take-off. After take-off, the yaw damper may
be engaged but must be disengaged before touchdown.
At the start of the take-off run, until adequate aerodynamic centering is achieved, the control column
should be held in about the mid position fore-and-aft. If a crosswind is present, some "into wind" aileron
may be applied.
A rolling start takeoff may be made when runway length is not limiting, brakes being released before
setting the thrust levers for takeoff.
Where field length is limiting, the takeoff should be commenced from a standing start, take-off thrust
(N1REF) being attained before the brakes are released. Directional control should be maintained by the
use of nose wheel steering until the rudder becomes effective at approximately 60 KIAS.
The nose wheel should not be raised from the ground until rotation speed is reached, when the airplane
should be rotated to the initial climb attitude. Any attempt to rotate at lower speeds would require the
use of larger elevator angles and high stick forces resulting in undesirable rapid rotation.
When a positive rate of climb has been established, retract the landing gear. Raise the flaps at
approximately 160 KIAS (but not below the final take-off climb speed). With both engines operating at
take-off thrust, the airplane should be allowed to accelerate to an airspeed of 160 KIAS, this airspeed
being maintained until obstacle clearance height is reached.
Pitch attitude should not be allowed to exceed 20° and at light weights it will therefore be necessary to
permit the airspeed to increase above 160 KIAS. This technique allows an adequate margin for obstacle
clearance in the event of an engine failure during the initial climb.
APR should be disarmed when a safe height is reached, flaps are retracted and airspeed is not less
than final take-off climb speed.
Compensated fan speed (N1) provides the indication of thrust and the Airplane Flight Manual
Figures 5.05.1 (ENG ANTICE OFF) or 5.05.2 (ENG ANTICE ON) shows the value of N1 (N1REF) for
initial take-off thrust.
Maximum take-off thrust (APR thrust) is obtained when the thrust lever is fully forward and the APR has
operated (APR legend illuminated). Under some temperature conditions below ISA, operation of APR
does not increase thrust. Both thrusts are determined by the engine computer.
The engine fuel computer provides two levels of protection against overspeed or over-temperature. The
first level will normally prevent the engine limitations being exceeded but if this should occur, fuel is cut-
off automatically by the computer if N1 or N2 exceeds predetermined values. (107% N1 or 109% N2)
Before Takeoff
For airfield altitude and ambient temperature look up N1REF in the Airplane Flight Manual Figure 5.05.1
(ENG ANTICE OFF) or in Figure 5.05.2 (ENG ANTICE ON).
Takeoff
Advance both thrust levers until they are fully forward. Confirm that N2 and ITT are within limits. Arm
APR (white APR ARMED legend illuminates).
Up To 80 KIAS
If indicated N1 is more than 1% below N1REF - abandon the takeoff.
Figure 2
Flight Profile - Normal Takeoff
The Normal Procedure Climb continues at 250 KIAS to 32,000 ft. at which IMN = 0.70.
The final part of the climb to cruise altitude is at IMN = 0.70.
The Optimum Time-To-Height Procedure Climb continues at 250 KIAS to 28,000 ft. at which
IMN = 0.63. The final part of the climb to cruise altitude is at IMN = 0.63.
Both climb procedures include time and fuel allowances for takeoff and initial climb to 160 KIAS at 1000
ft, but no distance is credited for this initial climb. The procedures then accelerate to 250 KIAS at 5000
ft and continue to 10,000 ft at this speed. Maximum Climb Thrust is set by adjusting the thrust levers
until the green CLIMB annunciation appears in the N1/ITT gage (located at the lower center of the
N1/ITT scales on the pilot’s MFD).
NOTE: When using the CLIMB annunciation in the N1/ITT scale to set Max Climb rating, the
achieved N1 should not be more than 1% below the value determined from either the
Maximum Climb Chart or the FMS database. Deviation from the chart or FMS value is
dependent on individual engine compensation levels and the accuracy of the airplane
systems. If the achieved N1 is more than 1% below the chart/FMS value, refer to the
troubleshooting procedures for "Low N1 at Takeoff Power Setting" in the TFE731-5BR Light
Maintenance Manual.
The pilots need not check the Maximum Climb RPM against the chart unless they believe that climb
thrust is not being achieved.
Set climb power as soon as convenient after raising the flaps and landing gear, or after the completion
of a noise abatement procedure, and allow the airplane to accelerate to achieve the recommended
climbing speed at 2000 to 3000 ft.
If rate of climb is not important, a power lower than maximum climb power may be used.
When cruising height is reached, allow the airplane to accelerate to cruising speed and reduce power
to within the cruise rating. In some conditions, the initial cruising speed may be below the climbing
speed.
Table 1
N1 REFERENCE VALUES FOR MAXIMUM CLIMB
ALTITUDE TEMPERATURE °C
FT
-55 -50 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
41,000 98.7 99.8 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.7 98.8 98.0 97.1
40,000 98.7 99.8 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.0 98.3 97.4 96.5
35,000 98.7 99.8 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.3 98.3 97.4 96.6
30,000 98.6 99.7 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.1 98.2 97.3 96.5 95.6
25,000 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.4 98.8 98.2 97.4 96.6 95.6
20,000 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.2 97.4 96.9 96.4 95.8 95.2 94.4 93.6 92.6
15,000 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.2 97.4 96.7 96.0 95.3 94.5 93.8 92.9 91.9 90.8
10,000 89.3 90.3 91.3 92.3 93.3 94.2 95.2 96.2 97.2 98.1 97.6 96.9 96.3 95.5 94.8 94.0 93.1 92.1 90.9
5000 82.9 83.8 84.8 85.8 86.7 87.7 88.6 89.5 90.4 91.3 92.2 93.1 93.9 94.8 94.9 94.1 93.2 92.2 91.0 89.8
Sea Level 77.6 78.5 79.4 80.3 81.2 82.1 83.0 83.8 84.7 85.5 86.4 87.2 88.0 88.8 89.6 90.4 91.2 92.0 91.0 89.7
Table 2
N1 REFERENCE VALUES FOR MAXIMUM CLIMB
ALTITUDE TEMPERATURE °C
FT
-55 -50 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
41,000 98.7 99.4 99.6 99.8 99.2 98.2 97.5 96.7 95.8
40,000 98.7 99.8 100.0 100.0 99.5 98.6 97.8 96.9 96.1 95.3
35,000 98.7 99.8 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.3 98.6 97.8 96.9 95.9 95.1
30,000 98.6 99.7 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.9 99.2 98.5 97.7 96.7 95.8 95.0 94.1
25,000 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.5 98.9 98.4 97.9 97.3 96.7 95.9 95.1 94.1
20,000 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.1 97.2 96.6 95.9 95.4 94.9 94.3 93.7 92.8 92.0
15,000 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.3 98.2 97.5 96.7 95.9 95.2 94.5 93.8 93.0 92.1
10,000 89.3 90.3 91.3 92.3 93.3 94.2 95.2 96.2 97.2 97.0 96.1 95.4 94.8 94.0 93.2
5000 82.9 83.8 84.8 85.8 86.7 87.7 88.6 89.5 90.4 91.3 92.2 93.1 93.9 94.1 93.3
Sea Level 77.6 78.5 79.4 80.3 81.2 82.1 83.0 83.8 84.7 85.5 86.4 87.2 88.0 88.8 89.6
Figure 3
Flight Profile - Climb, Cruise and Descent
The maximum cruising speed is limited by VMO, MMO, or maximum cruise rating.
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA contains performance data related to the above procedures.
Thrust should be adjusted as required to achieve these speeds and any thrust setting up to maximum
recommended cruise thrust may be used.
On most occasions, N1 RPM will be the operating restriction and should be periodically checked and
reset if necessary, especially after a change of altitude or Indicated Outside Air Temperature (IOAT).
Where the highest practicable cruising altitude is required, the cruise may be started at a speed below
220 KIAS or 0.70 MIND and the airplane may be allowed to accelerate as weight decreases, maintaining
maximum cruising thrust until the desired speed is reached.
Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA gives the maximum cruising altitude against weight and
temperature, together with the IAS on which they are based.
These speeds are the lowest at which the airplane will cruise comfortably and no attempt should be
made to cruise slower.
At Mach numbers greater than about 0.7, the buffet onset boundary is defined by an agitation of the
ailerons which can be felt through the control column.
NOTE: The yaw damper also increases directional stability during turbulence.
Changes of trim with power, landing gear, and airbrakes are small. There is a nose down change of trim
as the flaps are extended, becoming distinctive beyond 25°.
Two pneumatic rudder bias struts are provided in order to reduce the control forces necessary in
maintaining unyawed flight after the failure of one engine.
NOTE: Identification of the inoperative engine may not be evident from flight characteristics alone.
Before takeoff, check the RUDDER BIAS switches are selected ON and check the RUDDER BIAS
annunciator is off.
AIRBRAKES
The airbrakes may be extended at any airspeed in flight. They must not be used when the flaps are
extended except when the airplane is on the ground.
STALLS
Conditions For Stalls
When intentional stalls are carried out, the following conditions apply:
1. The altitude must be above 10,000 ft AGL, 10,000 ft above clouds and below 18,000 ft MSL.
2. Stalls must be conducted during day VMC with good visual horizon.
To limit altitude loss, to maintain acceptable stalling characteristics and to prevent structural abuse, it is
strongly recommended that the following Technique For Stalls procedure be followed:
2. Stalls with flaps retracted and in the take-off configuration should be carried out at idle thrust. To
reduce altitude loss with approach or landing flaps, thrust should be adjusted not to exceed 77% N1.
Once thrust is set it should not be reduced during the approach to the stall and recovery.
3. The airplane should be trimmed at an airspeed of approximately 1.4 VS1 in the appropriate
configuration after setting the required thrust.
4. The airspeed should be reduced at not more than one knot per second. Rapid or violent movements
of any control during the approach to the stall should be avoided, particularly at air speeds below
the operation of the stick shaker.
With the yaw damper off, any tendency to yaw during the approach to the stall should be corrected
by normal use of the rudder.
5. The stall is identified by a short forward movement of the control column provided by the Stall
Identification System. The red STALL VLV OPEN annunciators will illuminate. The airplane should
be allowed to pitch nose down until the stick push has cancelled, and should then be recovered to
normal controlled flight. Any tendency to roll should be corrected by use of ailerons.
There is no natural stall warning or aerodynamic buffet prior to the stall. Stall warning is provided by a
stick shaker which is set to operate at an indicated airspeed of 7% to 9% above the stalling speed.
It is acceptable for stick pusher operation to be coincident with the natural stall, provided that any rolling
tendency can be restrained to within 20° of bank angle by normal use of ailerons. Some aerodynamic
buffet may occur briefly at the point of stall.
Power-off stalling speeds in terms of Indicated Air Speed (IAS) are given for various configurations in
the Airplane Flight Manual Figure 5.05.6. These airspeeds apply to an altitude of 15,000 feet and are
the stall identification speeds at forward CG and therefore differ from the values shown in the AFM
Figure 5.10.4 which are based on the minimum airspeed obtained during the stall.
The verification should include a comparison of the displayed distances between waypoints and the
distances shown on the flight path.
The installed Long Range navaids should be checked against the FMS position while still in DME
coverage before any oceanic crossing. Any FMS messages concerning navigation aid accuracy should
be investigated. Refer to the relevant Flight Management System manual.
NOTE: If there is any doubt as to the correct position, the controlling authority should be informed
particularly on an oceanic flight.
The Flight Management System should be carefully monitored throughout the flight to make certain that
present position and planned forward flight path satisfies the clearance which is currently effective.
On oceanic flights, and other remote areas, the monitoring procedures should include a routine check
of indicated position about 10 minutes after passing each waypoint.
In the vicinity of the equator or prime meridian, care must be taken to make sure that the co-ordinates
of data inserts are correctly designated (N/S, E/W).
NOTE: The crew regulator will be on 100% during the emergency descent and a 2 minutes period at
15,000 feet, then switched to the NORMAL mode.
The airplane is required to descend below 10,000 feet when the oxygen is depleted.
NOTE: The barometric control valve can only be reset below 11,000 feet.
For times quoted less than 30 minutes, this procedure allows 30 minutes minimum supplementary
oxygen supply to 2 crew members as stipulated in 14 CFR 91.211 requirements with total usable
oxygen contents depleted.
The crew regulator will be on 100% during emergency descent and a 2 minute period at 15,000 feet,
then switched to the NORMAL mode.
Oxygen supply to the passengers is reduced to 10% ten minutes after oxygen initiation.
After the given period, the airplane is required to descend to 10,000 feet. The oxygen supply is
completely stopped to the passengers at this altitude.
For times quoted less than 120 minutes this procedure allows 120 minutes minimum supplementary
oxygen supply to the 2 crew members as stipulated in 14 CFR 135.137 requirements with total usable
oxygen contents depleted.
Any descent technique which gives overall times close to these values may be used. If it is desired to
use a high rate of descent for part of the way down, this must be balanced by a lower rate of descent at
some other point to give a reasonable total time.
For fuel economy, it is best to use the lower rate of descent high up, and increase it at lower altitude.
For maximum range, the descent procedure used is 0.76 MIND down to 31,000 ft and 285 KIAS below,
decelerating to 250 KIAS by 10,000 ft. Adequate supply of air to the cabin is obtained with engines idling
and both MAIN AIR VALVES selected OPEN.
From altitudes above 37,000 ft the overall descent time, with power at idle, is too short and, unless some
delay lower down is anticipated, the rate of descent above 37,000 ft should be reduced to about 1,000
ft per minute by increasing power. The data in Section 4 - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA is based on this
technique.
The use of the rough air airspeed reduces rate of descent and increases sector fuel and time slightly.
Airbrakes are not normally used but may be extended to steepen the descent at any time.
Figure 4
Flight Profile - ILS
Figure 5
Flight Profile - Non-Precision Approach
NORMAL LANDING
Before the airplane descends below 200 feet, the MAIN AIR VLVs must be selected to CLOSE and the
APR armed.
Flying in the traffic pattern should be at 160 KIAS with air brakes closed, flaps 15° and landing gear
lowered.
The flaps may be lowered to 45°, reducing airspeed to the recommended approach speed of VREF +10
KIAS with flaps 45°. Lowering the flaps to 45° causes a nose down change of attitude and, because of
the extra drag, the rate of descent will be increased unless thrust is added.
When nearing the runway, thrust should be reduced so that the airplane crosses the threshold at VREF.
The yaw damper should be disengaged at or above 50 feet.
The nose wheel should be lowered to the surface immediately after touchdown, wheel brakes applied
as necessary (see WHEEL BRAKES in this Sub-section) lift dump selected and thrust reversers
deployed as required (see THRUST REVERSERS in this Sub-section).
Nosewheel steering may be used at any speed after landing but for passenger comfort it is
recommended that directional control be maintained by use of rudder and differential braking until below
100 KIAS.
Figure 6
Flight Profile - VFR Approach Normal
or
(b) Expected to have very low braking action due to the presence of wet ice.
Compacted snow is snow which has been compressed into a solid mass which resists further
compression and will hold together or break into lumps if picked up.
LANDING
For unfactored landing distances on compacted snow and wet ice, refer to the Airplane Flight Manual.
Obtain the landing distance required for the intended landing weight and compare it with the runway
length available. Then decide whether the safety margin is adequate taking into account the weather
and the possible consequence of an overrun or undershoot.
Landing downhill or with a tailwind on a slippery runway should be avoided. The limiting combinations
of wind and runway gradient are shown in the Airplane Flight Manual. Combinations of wind and
gradient lying in the shaded area are not permitted.
Reverse thrust should be used if available, but forward idle thrust should be selected if directional
control becomes difficult. If reverse thrust is not being used, deceleration will be assisted by shutting
down either engine after normal selection of lift dump.
For takeoff, the brakes should be released before 70% N1 is reached and the thrust levers advanced
smoothly so that the full thrust is achieved at an airspeed of approximately 15 knots.
It is recommended that both thrust reversers are deployed even if takeoff has been abandoned for
actual or suspected engine failure, but that power is not increased above reverse idle on a
malfunctioning engine.
The use of aileron on the ground is effective in steering the airplane in the natural sense. In the event
of an engine failure before VR, aileron can be used instinctively to maintain wings level, and further
application will help minimize deviation. Rotate at VR.
In a continued takeoff after engine failure where field length or obstacle clearance is limiting, it is
important that airspeed rise during transition is kept to a minimum and that the initial climb is made at
an airspeed as close as possible to V2.
APR must be cancelled by pushing the APR ARM switch no more than five minutes after start of the
take-off roll.
APR must be cancelled and maximum continuous rating selected not more than five minutes after start
of the take-off roll.
Figure 1
Flight Profile
Takeoff: Engine Failure After V1 with APR-High and Low Performance Profiles
If an engine fails, thrust may be increased up to maximum continuous on the operating engine, to
minimize the loss of speed and altitude.
The recommended Long Range cruising speed, provided in Section IV - FLIGHT PLANNING DATA
Sub-section 4 gives best range at a fixed altitude. However, it will be an advantage to frequently reduce
the speed to the minimum cruising KIAS in order to reduce the loss of altitude.
This minimum speed is the same as that given for all engine operation and should be used only until
the airplane can accelerate to the Long Range speed.
If obstacle clearance is most important, the en-route climb speed will give the minimum gradient of
descent and the best ceiling, but it is too slow for Long Range operation. Therefore, the general
procedure is to increase power to maximum continuous and maintain altitude while speed falls to the
minimum cruising speed. The airplane will then drift down to the single engine cruise ceiling.
When a satisfactory cruise altitude is established, allow the speed to rise to the Long Range KIAS or
higher if range is not critical.
NOTE: The following procedures apply when the airplane is used solely for the purpose of pilot
training or routine test flights with no passengers on board.
If a Mach number greater than 0.82 indicated or an airspeed of greater than 20 KIAS above VMO is
inadvertently achieved, or if any airframe or aileron buffet is encountered, take recovery action
immediately.
• Ice and snow accumulation will reduce the aerodynamic efficiency of the airplane by increasing
drag and diminishing lift due to airfoil deformation.
• Control movements can be impaired.
• Loss of thrust can occur due to engine inlet duct icing.
Icing conditions exist when visible moisture is present and visibility is reduced to 3000 feet or less, plus:
(a) During ground operations, take-off, initial climb, or go-around the OAT or SAT is 5° C (41° F)
or below
or
ICING GENERAL
If ice has formed on the airframe prior to approach, or icing conditions exist, the flight speeds for use
on approach are provided in Figure 2.
AIRFRAME ICING
The airplane must be clear of snow, ice and frost before takeoff with the exception of the following areas:
• Frost is allowable on the underside of the wings over the general area of the fuel tanks provided
that the depth does not exceed 0.125 inch (3 mm).
If frost is present in this region, the WAT limited take-off weight must be reduced by 1000 lb (454
kg) and the net flight path reference and fourth segment climb gradients must be obtained using a
weight 1000 lb (454 kg) higher than the actual weight.
• Frost is allowable on the fuselage provided the layer is thin enough to distinguish the surface
features such as paint lines or markings underneath, but all vents, probes and ports must be clear
of frost.
WING/TAIL ANTICE FLUIDS
Only de-ice fluids TKS80, R328 or fluid to specification DTD 406B must be used.
NOTE: A tank indicating FULL provides priming and protection for a period of at least
85 minutes.
If the outside air temperature is 10° C or below and is associated with conditions of high humidity, i.e.,
mist or fog reducing visibility to approximately 1 mile (1600 meters), or with a wet runway surface, set
ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 and ENG IGNITION 1 and 2 to ON.
NOTE: ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 should be selected ON before setting take-off thrust.
When take-off is made with ENG ANTICE 1 and 2 selected ON, ITT must be monitored during takeoff
and initial climb. Allowance must be made for the use of ENG ANTICE on performance by reference to
the appropriate figures in the Airplane Flight Manual, Sub-section 4.10 and Section 5. If necessary, the
airframe WING/TAIL ANTICE switch may also be selected on for takeoff. Switch ENG ANTICE 1 and 2
to OFF and the ENG IGNITION 1 and 2 to off when conditions permit.
NOTE: There is a fuel penalty when the engine antice systems are in use.
Whether in icing conditions or not, the SCREEN HEAT L and R and the PITOT/VANE HEAT L and R
should be selected ON in flight. The ICE DET switch should normally be set to AUTO, but before taxiing
in icing conditions, it should be set to OVRD.
IN FLIGHT
Maintain the airframe system in the fully primed condition (see NOTE 1).
NOTES:
1. The airframe system should be maintained fully primed by selecting it on for 30 seconds
at the start of climb, for 2 minutes at the top of descent, and, if icing conditions are
expected, preferably for 2 minutes prior to entering icing conditions.
2. If icing conditions still prevail or are expected, a further period of operation should be
selected prior to the time switch reaching zero. Termination of the WING/TAIL ANTICE
selection will be given by an audio chime.
There is a fuel penalty with the engine anti-ice systems in use and the systems must be turned off when
the airplane is clear of icing conditions.
When selecting the ENG ANTICE switch ON, an ITT increase of 20° to 50° C can be expected and
special care must be taken not to exceed the ITT limitations.
Appropriate performance tables must be used when the ENG ANTICE switch is selected ON.
While in icing conditions, the airspeed must be kept within the range given in Figure 2. These limits are
set to make sure adequate de-icing fluid is distributed over the wing and tailplane surfaces.
CLIMB
Climb at 230 KIAS or as required in accordance with Figure 2 with normal climb power.
CRUISE
In all conditions the airplane has sufficient performance to be able to cruise above 30,000 feet, where
icing is unlikely to occur.
If it is necessary to cruise in an icing layer, the long range speed should be used. It is usually more
economical to cruise below the icing layer rather than in it.
HOLDING
Holding should be done at the normal holding speed.
NOTE: The procedural use of 15° flap, for holding, is not permitted in icing conditions.
DESCENT
When descending into icing conditions, select the airframe ice protection system on 2 minutes before
entering icing (approximately 5000 feet above cloud). With ENG ANTICE selected in flight and thrust
lever at idle, a raised N2 is automatically applied at which adequate intake and engine anti-ice is
available.
Figure 2
Speed for Use in Icing Conditions
THIS ICE MAY NOT BE SHED USING THE ICE PROTECTION SYSTEMS AND MAY
SERIOUSLY DEGRADE THE PERFORMANCE AND CONTROLLABILITY OF THE
AIRPLANE.
During flight, severe icing conditions that exceed those for which the airplane is certified shall be
determined by the following visual cues.
If one or more of these visual cues exists, immediately request priority handling from Air Traffic Control
to facilitate a route or an altitude change to exit the icing conditions:
• Extensive ice accumulation on the airframe in areas not normally observed to collect ice.
• Accumulation of ice on the wing aft of the protected area.
Since the autopilot may mask tactile cues that indicate adverse changes in handling characteristics,
use of the autopilot is prohibited when any of the visual cues specified above exist, or when unusual
lateral trim requirements or autopilot trim warnings are encountered while the airplane is in icing
conditions.
All icing detection lights must be operative prior to flight into icing conditions at night.
NOTE: This supersedes any relief provided by the Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL).
The following weather conditions may be conducive to severe in-flight icing:
While severe icing may form at temperatures as cold as -18° C, increased vigilance is warranted at
temperatures near freezing with visible moisture present. If the visual cues specified in the Limitations
Section of this manual for identifying severe icing conditions are observed, accomplish the following:
1. Immediately request priority handling from Air Traffic Control to facilitate a route or an altitude
change to exit the severe icing conditions in order to avoid extended exposure to flight conditions
more severe than those for which the airplane has been certified.
2. Avoid abrupt and excessive maneuvering that may exacerbate control difficulties.
4. If the autopilot is engaged, hold the ram’s-horn control column firmly and disengage the autopilot.
5. If an unusual roll response or uncommanded roll control movement is observed, reduce the angle-
of-attack.
In all types of turbulence it is important to avoid pilot actions which could give rapid changes in attitude,
altitude, or airspeed. Whenever possible, achieve a steady condition before entering turbulence.
Pilot control movement should be kept to the minimum and restricted to limiting long term changes in
attitude and airspeed. All control actions should be small and gentle, and use of the trim system should
be restricted to compensating for intentional change of airspeed.
The airplane should be flown through turbulence on a straight course or, if this is not practicable, bank
angles should be limited to approximately 15°.
STORM TURBULENCE
If it is not certain that the conditions are non-storm then they must be assumed to be storm turbulence.
Where a change to the flight path is made to avoid a region of storm turbulence, it shall be assumed
that severe turbulence might still be expected for the purpose of defining the maximum allowable
altitude.
Figure 3
Maximum Altitude for Flight When Storm or Severe Turbulence May Be Expected
MICROBURST
This term is taken to mean a concentrated, more-powerful form of downdraught, which may occur
anywhere convective weather conditions exist.
• Symmetric Microburst
• Asymmetric Microburst
• Dry Microburst
Refer to Figures 4, 5 and 6.
WINDSHEAR
This term is taken to mean severe windshear, throughout this part, where airspeed changes exceed
15 knots or vertical speed changes exceed 500 feet per minute.
Windshear has long been recognized as a potentially serious hazard to airplanes during landing and
takeoff, but may also be experienced in thunderstorm areas, when penetrating weather fronts, low level
jet streams, mountain waves and thermals. Other causes include terrain irregularities and man-made
obstructions such as buildings or towers close to the runway.
To think of windshear as an aggravated form of wind gradient is unwise. It can strike suddenly and with
serious effect which in certain circumstances can be catastrophic and may not be successfully escaped
with any known techniques, even by the most experienced pilots flying modern and powerful airplanes.
Statistics indicate that two out of every three windshear accidents or incidents are related to convective
weather conditions, mainly thunderstorms and in particular the most hazardous form of windshear, the
microburst.
WARNING: THE FIRST AND MOST VITAL DEFENSE AGAINST WINDSHEAR IS AVOIDANCE.
Figure 4
Symmetric Microburst
An airplane transiting this type of microburst would experience equal headwinds and tailwinds.
Figure 5
Asymmetric Microburst
An airplane transiting the microburst from left to right would experience a small headwind followed
by a large tailwind.
Figure 6
Dry Microburst
Evaporation of rain below cloud base (virga) causes intense cooling of rain-shaft and subsequent
cold air plunge.
To improve the chances of surviving a windshear encounter, the model of aircrew actions should be
incorporated into day-to-day operations to make sure such actions are available and easily recalled
when needed.
NO
ANY SIGNS OF
WINDSHEAR?
AVOID KNOWN
YES WINDSHEAR
IS IT SAFE NO
TO CONTINUE?
YES
CONSIDER PRECAUTIONS
FOLLOW STANDARD
OPERATING TECHNIQUES
WINDSHEAR RECOVERY
TECHNIQUE
REPORT THE
ENCOUNTER
This is especially important because shears will exist which are beyond the capability of any pilot or
airplane.
When avoidance action has failed, other lessons have been learned regarding windshear recognition
and pilot techniques.
Having evaluated the weather, the flow chart recommends the aircrew follow SOTs in an effort to aid
them with the early recognition of a windshear encounter.
The SOTs fall into two general headings of air crew awareness and air crew co-ordination.
The aircrew should be prepared to change to windshear recovery techniques as soon as the SOTs
indicate the likelihood of windshear activity.
The more indicators present, the more crews should consider delaying departure or approach.
The weather evaluation process must continue during the takeoff and climb-out and throughout the
approach and landing.
The following weather information should be examined for any potential windshear conditions affecting
the flight:
Microburst windshears exist which are beyond the capability of even the largest of airplanes and the
most highly skilled pilots. Avoidance may only mean a ten to twenty minute delay.
A summary of the weather evaluation factors which can be helpful in avoiding windshear is provided by
the following information:
• With temperature/dew point spread between -1° C and 10° C (30° and 50° F) .. MEDIUM
HIGH Probability
• Critical attention to be given to this observation.
• A decision to avoid should be made.
MEDIUM Probability
• Consideration should be given to avoiding.
• Precautions should be taken.
LOW Probability
• Consideration should be given to this observation, but a decision to avoid is not generally indicated.
NOTE: Windshear clues should be considered cumulative.
Consider Precautions
However, there are situations when windshear clues do not clearly dictate delaying, but can be
interpreted to mean that conditions are right for windshear activity.
A number of precautionary techniques have been developed which aircrews can take to lessen the
effects of an inadvertent windshear encounter.
Use of precautions along with even the best recovery piloting skills cannot guarantee a successful
escape.
Recommended precautions have a relatively small effect on the outcome of an inadvertent encounter.
Precautions should not replace pilot judgement. If in doubt, do not takeoff or make an approach to land.
Take-off Precautions
1. Use maximum rated take-off thrust, N1 Ref.
(Do not use de-rated thrust or flexible thrust techniques, if applicable)
The choice also involves consideration of exposure to obstacles after lift off and crosswind and tailwind
limitations.
3. Determine field length limit maximum weight and corresponding VR for selected runway.
4. If field length limit VR is greater than actual gross weight VR, use the higher VR (up to 20 knots in
excess of actual gross weight VR) for takeoff. Airspeed bugs should not be reset to the higher speed.
5. Rotate to normal initial climb attitude (approximately 12° dependent on take-off weight and flap
setting) at the increased VR and maintain this attitude.
If increased airspeed is not used prior to take-off, acceleration to higher than normal airspeed after
takeoff is not recommended, as pitch attitude reduction at low altitude might produce a hazard if
windshear were encountered.
Windshear effect may force rotation at speed below VR. Rotation should begin no later than 2,000 ft
from end of usable runway.
Figure 7
Windshear Effects on Rotation Decision
Approach Precautions
1. Stabilize approach no later than 1000 ft ARTE.
Microburst reduces airspeed and lift at normal attitude which results in pitch down tendency to regain
airspeed.
Figure 8
Windshear Effects on Flight Path During Approach
Thrust Management
Rather than immediately compensating for an airspeed increase by reducing thrust, a brief pause to
evaluate speed trends is prudent.
In the absence of a tailwind shear this procedure may result in a higher than normal approach speed
which may have to be accounted for in landing distance.
However, use of autoflight systems only provide benefits in terms of decreased workload if this allows
the aircrew more time to monitor instruments and weather conditions.
• Attitudes
• Climb rates
• Airspeed build-up
2. Know/use all-engine initial climb attitude.
7. Know recovery decision guidelines and be prepared to execute the recommended recovery
procedure as soon as deviations exceed target conditions.
Approach
1. Know normal:
• Attitudes
• Descent rates
• Airspeeds
• Thrust lever position
2. Cross-check flight director commands.
3. Avoid large thrust reductions.
4. Pilot Not Flying - Monitor vertical flight path instruments, call-out deviations.
5. Know recovery decision guidelines and be prepared to execute the recommended recovery
procedure as soon as deviations exceed target conditions.
Should focus attention on flying, taking appropriate action in response to call-outs in a windshear
encounter.
• Airspeed
• Vertical speed
• Altitude
• Pitch attitude
• Glideslope deviation
• Thrust
Any significant deviations from normal indications should be called out using standard flight
compartment call-out procedures.
Takeoff
1. 15 knots sudden variation of airspeed.
Prior to V1 the takeoff should be rejected if a windshear is encountered and the decision is made that
sufficient runway is available to stop the airplane. After V1 the takeoff must be continued.
2. Pitch - At normal VR rotate toward 12° at normal pitch rate (but no later than 2000 ft of usable runway
remaining, even if below VR). Pitch attitude should not be increased beyond 12° before lift off.
However, if during an approach a windshear is encountered which increases the performance of the
airplane (increasing performance shear), a normal go-around rather than the recovery maneuver may
be accomplished.
Recovery Technique
1. THRUST - Immediately apply full power.
(a) If flight path is unacceptable, increase pitch attitude beyond 12° in 2° increments.
Thrust
Advance thrust levers fully. Select APR and OVERRIDE.
Pitch
Use intermittent stick shaker as the upper pitch limit. If attitude has been reduced to less than 12° to
stop stick shaker, increase attitude towards 12° as soon as stick shaker stops.
Once the airplane is climbing and ground contact is no longer an immediate concern, airspeed should
be increased by cautious reductions in pitch attitude.
Additional considerations
1. Autopilot should be disengaged at the start of the recovery.
4. Airplane type.
The contents of this part are based on the FAA PILOT WINDSHEAR GUIDE.
Further information may be found in the FAA WINDSHEAR TRAINING AID, and also the FAA PILOT
WINDSHEAR GUIDE which is published as FAA ADVISORY CIRCULAR AC 00-54 APPENDIX 1.
NOTE: Immediate recovery action should be taken as soon as the presence of windshear is
recognized by the pilots, even if the windshear alerting system has not yet given a CAUTION
or a WARNING.
An amber Windshear Caution is annunciated for an increasing performance windshear. On detection
of decreasing performance windshear, a red WINDSHEAR WARNING is annunciated together with the
audio message of “WINDSHEAR WINDSHEAR WINDSHEAR" with EGPWS modes being inhibited for
5 seconds after a windshear warning. A CAUTION (increasing performance) will most probably serve
as a precursor to a WARNING (decreasing performance).
The action following a CAUTION on the approach should be a normal go-around. A WARNING at any
stage should result in the pilots immediately carrying out the recovery technique described in the
previous section.
SUMMARY
The best defense against windshear is RECOGNITION and AVOIDANCE. Inadvertent encounters are
best negotiated by means of pitch attitude control and thrust, tolerating lower than normal airspeed.
Behavioural changes are necessary to break from the instinct to chase airspeed - a potentially
hazardous recovery technique.
GROUND OPERATION
Volcanic dust will be stirred up by routine maintenance and service activities, and will settle on exposed
surfaces and may penetrate air intakes and seals.
PRE-START
Gently brush the ash from the windshields and flying surfaces. Avoid using the APU by using ground
power.
TAXI
Keep engine thrust to a minimum. Avoid sharp or high speed turns and keep the engine and APU air
valves closed.
TAKEOFF
Allow all dust and ash to settle before takeoff. Make a rolling takeoff by advancing the thrust levers
smoothly to take-off power.
CRUISE
NOTE: If an area contaminated by volcanic ash is encountered during cruise, the aircrew must don
oxygen masks.
If engines malfunction (surge/increase ITT) select engine ignition on and retard thrust levers to IDLE.
Where practicable, close engine air valves to prevent dust entering the cabin and descend to minimum
safe altitude. Passengers and cabin crew should use cabin oxygen system when the masks drop down.
A volcanic cloud is likely to drift downwind for many miles from its source, and will probably be confined
to upper and medium levels. Therefore, contrary to the advice normally given to escape from
thunderstorms, the quickest way out of a volcanic cloud may well be to turn around.
LANDING
Do not use reverse thrust unless absolutely necessary, and then only to the minimum level required to
stop safely. Runway friction, and brake efficiency, may be reduced by ash on the runway.
The use of landing data for a wet or contaminated runway should be considered.
At a height of about 200 feet, provided that a successful landing seems to be assured, flaps 45° should
be selected and the airspeed allowed to slow to VREF.
Alternatively, the airplane may be landed with flaps 25°, using a landing reference speed of VREF + 5
knots IAS. In this case, lift dump will not be available after touch down. At light weights, VREF should be
increased to 111 KIAS to allow adequate control in the event of a discontinued approach.
APR power may be used, but is not necessary to meet the limits for landing weight, altitude and
temperature (WAT) given in Sub-section 5.45.
If APR power is required, push the APR ARM switch and check that both APR ARMED (white) and APR
(green) legends illuminate. APR power will be available immediately during the remainder of the
approach and in the event of a subsequent go-around.
Reverse thrust on the operative engine may be used on the ground and it is recommended that the
reverser on the inoperative engine is deployed, if possible, to reduce the asymmetric effect on handling.
The speed should be maintained at final approach speed during the climb-out. Do not allow speed to
reduce below VREF with flaps 15° or VREF + 10 KIAS with flaps 0°.
NOTES:
1. Under limiting performance conditions, it is more important to establish a climb and
retract the landing gear than to increase airspeed above the minimum.
2. The airworthiness requirements do not ensure that there will be a positive climb
performance in the final landing phase with an engine inoperative. Therefore, the
decision to discontinue the approach should be made before the flaps are extended to
45°.
EMERGENCY OVERWEIGHT LANDING
If it is necessary to make a landing at a weight in excess of maximum landing weight, use normal
techniques for approach and landing, touching down as smoothly as possible.
For the purpose of brake cooling, an overweight landing should be considered as a rejected takeoff.
If a landing has to be made shortly after takeoff at a weight at or close to the maximum given in the
Airplane Flight Manual Figure 5.15.1, where the required approach climb gross gradient of 2.1% cannot
be met with flaps 15° (see AFM Figure 5.55.4), an alternative landing procedure is required.
The approach should be made with flaps 15° at VREF + 25 KIAS. When a successful landing is assured,
flaps 25° should be selected and airspeed allowed to slow to VREF + 5 KIAS at the threshold. Airbrakes
should be selected open immediately after touchdown.
When landing with an inoperative engine, reverse thrust on the operative engine may be used on the
ground and it is recommended that the reverser on the inoperative engine is deployed, if possible, to
reduce the asymmetric effect on handling.
NOTES:
1. Lift Dump is not available with flaps 25°.
2. All reference to VREF means the VREF appropriate to flaps 45° and as defined in the AFM
Sub-section 5.10.
LANDING WITH ENGINE FUEL COMPUTER INOPERATIVE
When landing with either or both engines in the manual mode, special care must be taken due to slow
engine(s) acceleration. Depending on conditions, acceleration time will be greatly increased.
To minimize acceleration time on the affected engine(s), ENG ANTICE should be selected OFF and the
MAIN AIR VLV selected CLOSE whenever possible.
NO FLAP LANDING
In the event of a failure making it impossible to extend the flaps, the landing gear should be lowered
when airspeed is reduced below 220 KIAS to improve speed stability. The final approach should be
made at VREF + 30 KIAS. As the runway is approached thrust should be reduced so that the threshold
is crossed at VREF + 15 KIAS. The nosewheel should be lowered to the runway surface immediately after
touch down, the airbrakes opened (if available), wheel brakes applied and reverse thrust used as for a
normal landing.
When landing in icing conditions with flap 0°, a further 15 KIAS should be added to the speeds i.e. final
approach at VREF + 45 KIAS and the threshold is crossed at VREF + 30 KIAS. The landing distance is
approximately twice the normal flaps 45° distance.
If, as a result of a failure, asymmetric air brake is suspected, the subsequent landing should be made
as a no flap landing using the techniques and airspeeds given above. The use of flaps is not
recommended as large aileron angles will be necessary at low airspeed with flaps extended.
Should failure of any one of the primary flying controls occur, the following landing technique is
recommended.
Maneuvering in the traffic pattern should be made at approximately 160 KIAS with flaps 15° and the
landing gear down. Steep turns should be avoided. A long final approach should be made with flaps 45°
at VREF + 10 KIAS.
If the rudder control has failed, the yaw damper must be switched off before touchdown.
If the elevator primary control has failed, airspeed may be controlled by the elevator trim and the rate of
descent by the thrust levers. The final stage of the approach should be fairly flat and touchdown made
by slowly closing the thrust levers. It has been demonstrated that elevator trim remains effective during
the landing flare.
If both primary rudder and elevator controls are lost together with a single engine failure, make the
approach at VREF + 20 KIAS, flaps 25° and landing gear down. This airspeed should be maintained to
the threshold and a landing made with flaps 25°.
NOTE: While it is normal to select flaps 45° on a single engine landing, it is considered unwise to
create a trim change at a late stage of the approach when direct elevator control has been
lost.
If the aileron control has failed, it is recommended that the rudder be used for lateral control. However,
it may be possible to use the aileron trim control depending on the type of failure. Unless the left aileron
itself has jammed, normal use of the trimmer will give some lateral control, the amount depending on
how much of the circuit is free to stretch. Should lateral control be seriously impaired, it is recommended
that a landing be made with flaps 0°. The final approach speed should not be less than VREF + 25 KIAS;
a greater speed may be needed to retain sufficient lateral control.
If a main braking system failure is suspected but not confirmed before landing, the emergency system
should not be selected prior to touchdown. The normal brake system should be used and the
emergency system only selected if complete failure of the normal system is confirmed after touchdown.
NOTE: If committed to using the emergency system, it should be selected with the pedals released.
With emergency selected, anti-skid will not be available so only minimum braking should be applied and
maintained until the airplane slows to taxiing speed. The pedals should not be pumped because rapid
exhaustion of the emergency accumulator will occur.
Figure 9
Flight Profile - Non-Precision Approach-Single Engine
Figure 10
Flight Profile - ILS Approach-Single Engine
Figure 11
Flight Profile - VFR Approach-Single Engine
Figure 12
Flight Profile - VFR No Flap Approach
Figure 13
Flight Profile - ILS Approach-Landing Above WAT Limit
They contain the best available advice, being based largely on model ditching tests on the British Royal
Air Force Dominie and general ditching procedures of other airplane (reference R & M No. 2917). These
recommendations are not based on tests made with a Hawker 800XP. No such tests have been carried
out.
• State of Sea ............ This is better assessed from a height of 500 to 1000 ft, particularly the
direction of swell which may not be as obvious as the less important wave
direction when seen from a lower altitude.
When there is no swell, alight into wind. In the presence of swell, and
provided that drift does not exceed 10° alight parallel to the swell and as
nearly into wind as possible. If drift exceeds 10°, alight into wind.
If possible, the ditching should take place while power is still available. This will enable the most
favorable conditions to be selected.
DIRECTION OF DITCHING
The direction of ditching is mainly dependent on wind and state of sea and these factors may be
assessed as follows:
• Wind Direction ......... This may be found by observing the waves, which move and break
downwind, spray from the wave tops is also a reliable indicator.
• Wind Speed............. The following conditions can be used as a guide to wind speed:
ACTION
Passenger Preparation
• Switch on the appropriate cabin signs and securely stow all personal baggage.
• Make certain that all life jackets are available and their use understood.
• Give instructions for all spectacles and dentures to be removed, with collars and ties loosened.
• Check seat backs are upright and safety belts are fastened.
• Instruct passengers on correct posture for ditching.
• Advise the passengers to use the Emergency Overwing Exit only and not to use the main entry
door.
Page 2-36 Sub-section 2 Pilot’s Operating Manual
ABNORMAL HANDLING Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section V - FLIGHT HANDLING
Depressurization
• Depressurize cabin by 1500 ft above sea level.
• Close MAIN AIR VALVES 1 and 2 and check that the dump valve is closed.
During Descent
• Switch on all external lights to aid location of the airplane.
• At night, switch off all lights likely to impair night vision and switch on emergency lighting.
• Check all crew members are at ditching stations with life jackets on and safety harnesses tight.
WARNING: DO NOT OPEN THE MAIN ENTRANCE DOOR. IF THE MAIN ENTRANCE DOOR IS
OPENED, ON A SURFACE OTHER THAN FLAT CALM CONDITIONS, WATER WILL
ENTER THE CABIN.
• Copilot to remove the Emergency Overwing Exit and leave the airplane first.
• Copilot to assist the passengers in leaving the airplane.
• Pilot is to make certain that all the passengers are out of the airplane and then leave.
• After leaving the airplane, the pilot is to make certain all life jackets are inflated correctly.
Section - VI
GROUND OPERATIONS
Table of Contents
Page
AIRPLANE DE-ICING
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE APU (IF INSTALLED) WHILE DE-ICING IS IN PROGRESS.
INGESTION OF DE-ICING FLUID MAY CAUSE SERIOUS MALFUNCTIONS.
EQUIPMENT NECESSARY
• Power operated de-icing trolley (capable of delivering heated fluid and equipped with spray lances)
• Ground servicing platforms (of sufficient height to enable the operator to direct the spray onto all
airfoil surfaces)
• Air blast facility (capable of supplying hot or cold air)
• Brooms
• Rubber squeegees
During these operations, the surfaces will be very slippery due to snow, ice or de-icing fluid. Use a
servicing stand whenever possible or use mainplane mats and safety belts and always stand upwind of
the airplane when applying fluids.
The de-icing fluid used must be to concentration and at a temperature in accordance with the fluid
manufacturer’s instructions, providing the following limitations are not exceeded:
2. If the spray rate per lance exceeds 12 gal/min (45 l/min), reduce the temperature to 60° C (140° F).
CAUTION: DE-ICING FLUID MUST NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH LANDING GEAR
ELECTRICAL PLUGS OR HARNESS.
BEFORE APPLYING FLUID, WHERE OPERATIONS PERMIT, MAKE SURE THAT ALL
COVERS AND BLANKS ARE INSTALLED.
For application of de-icing fluids, the flaps and airbrakes are to be fully retracted and the thrust reversers
are to be in the stowed position.
The period of time an operator can remain on the ground (hold over time) after application of any
de-ice fluid is dependent on many factors, including Outside Air Temperature, type of precipitation, type
of fluid applied and concentration of fluid.
High wind velocity and jet blast may cause a degradation of the protective film, thereby shortening the
protection time considerably.
Refer to Hawker Beechcraft Corporation approved 125/Hawker Chapter 20 Standard Practices Manual,
Section 20-95-101 (pages 1 and 2) for airplane-specific approved de-icing fluids.
The FAA publishes a Flight Standards Information Bulletin for Air Transportation (FSAT) that provides
generically approved Type I, Type II, Type III and Type IV de-icing fluids, guidelines for application
procedures, charts for Holdover Times, and other related information.
Holdover time tables, obtained from www.faa.gov, search "HOLDOVER TIME TABLES", shall only be
used as part of an approved ground-deicing program. When the website cannot be accessed or
questions arise, contact FAA Flight Standards, Washington D.C. at 202-267-8166 or Hawker Beechcraft
Corporation at 1-800-429-5372 or 316-676-3140.
De-icing is the removal of ice, frost, and snow from the airplane’s exterior after it has formed.
Anti-icing is a means of keeping the surface clear of subsequent accumulations of ice, snow and frost.
Removal of these accumulations is necessary prior to takeoff. Airfoil contours may be altered by the ice
and snow to the extent that their lift qualities will be seriously impaired.
Ice and snow on the fuselage can increase drag and weight.
Prior to take-off the pilot in command must be satisfied the aircraft is clear of frost, snow, or ice within
the limitations stated in the Aircraft Flight Manual, Section 2.
If the holdover time (reference a current copy of the FSAT) is exceeded and visual/tactile investigation
of the flight surfaces is not possible, the aircraft should be returned for further treatment with de-icing
fluid prior to take-off.
SNOW REMOVAL
CAUTION: CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING SNOW FROM AREAS WHERE VORTEX
GENERATORS ARE INSTALLED.
The removal of frozen deposits by chipping or scraping is not recommended.
The recommended removal of snow is to brush it off with a squeegee, soft brush, or mop. Care must
be exercised not to damage any components that may be attached to the outside of the airplane, such
as antennas, vents, stall warning vanes, etc.
Remove loose snow from the airplane before heating the airplane interior. At low temperatures, the
snow may melt and refreeze to build up a considerable depth of ice.
If the airplane has been hangared and snow is falling, coat the airplane surfaces with an anti-icing
solution.
Snow falling on the warm surface will have a tendency to melt, then refreeze. After snow has been
removed from the airplane, inspect the airplane for evidence of residual snow.
Special attention should be given to all vents, openings, static ports, control surfaces, hinge points, and
the wing, tail, and fuselage surfaces for obstructions or accumulations of snow.
Check the exterior of the airplane for damage to external components that may have occurred during
the snow removal operations.
Control surfaces should be moved to confirm full and free movement. The landing gear mechanism,
doors, wheel wells, uplocks and microswitches should be checked for ice deposits that may impair
function.
NOTE: When the airplane is hangared to melt snow, any melted snow may freeze again if the
airplane is subsequently moved into freezing temperatures. Any measures taken to remove
frozen deposits while the airplane is on the ground must also prevent the possibility of
refreezing of the liquid.
Following snow removal, should freezing precipitation continue, the airplane surface should be treated
for icing.
Brush the snow as the fluid is being applied to assist in breaking up the deposits, and to retain the fluid
on the deposit.
When all frozen deposits have been removed, give a final light spray of de-icing fluid.
FROST REMOVAL
Frost that may form on the wing fuel tank bottom skins need not be removed prior to flight.
Frost that may accumulate on other portions of the wing, the tail surfaces, or on any control surface,
must be removed prior to flight.
Frost that cannot be removed by wiping with a gloved hand or soft towel must be removed by placing
the airplane in a warm hangar or by the application of a de-icing fluid in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
After removal of all frost from the airplane exterior, check all external components for damage that may
have occurred during frost removal.
Under severe frost forming conditions, after defrosting, give a further light application of the
concentrated fluid to make sure the maximum hold-over period is met.
ICE REMOVAL
Moderate or heavy ice and residual snow deposits should be removed with a de-icing fluid. No attempt
should be made to remove ice deposits or break an ice bond by force.
After completing the de-icing process, the airplane should be inspected to make sure its condition is
satisfactory for flight.
All external surfaces should be examined for residual ice or snow, special attention should be given to
all vents, openings, static ports, control surfaces, hinge points, and the wing, tail, and fuselage surfaces
for obstructions or accumulations of ice or snow.
NOTE: When the airplane is hangared to melt ice, any melted ice may freeze again if the airplane is
subsequently moved into freezing temperatures. Any measures taken to remove frozen
deposits while the airplane is on the ground must also prevent the possible refreezing of the
liquid.
Following ice removal, should freezing precipitation continue, the airplane surface should be treated for
icing.
• Static vents
• Stall warning vents
• Pitot heads
• Drain mast
• All intakes/exhausts
• All control surfaces, hinges and mechanisms
• Airbrakes
• Flaps
• Thrust reversers
• Landing gear
DE-ICING THE WINDSHIELD
Lightly spray the windshield with windshield wash fluid. If smearing occurs, wipe clear with a warm
damp rag.
CAUTION: DE-ICING FLUID MUST NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH LANDING GEAR
ELECTRICAL PLUGS, BRAKE UNITS AND HARNESSES.
Remove stubborn deposits with a rag soaked in de-icing fluid.
Make sure the tires are free from ice and that the wheels are free to move.
• Wash down the affected area with clean water as soon as possible. A wetting agent such as
TEEPOL or Comprex A may be added in small quantities.
When time or conditions prevent removal of the contamination at out-stations, this must be noted in the
Technical Log so that the appropriate action can be taken to remove it at base.
Airplanes operating on runways which have been treated with Runway De-icer Agents should have
corrosion preventative lubricant applied to the main landing gear side stay shims.
The lubricant should be applied as directed in the Airplane Flexible Maintenance Schedule (AFMS),
Part 7 Lubrication, Lubrication Requirements.
The lubricants specified in the Lubrication Requirements will provide corrosion protection to offset the
effects of runway de-icer agents which can be detrimental to long term landing gear operation.
Monthly application will provide protection for airplanes operating on de-iced runways.
In addition to the normal exterior preflight inspection, special attention should be given to all vents,
openings, static ports, control surfaces, hinge points, and the wing, tail, and fuselage surfaces for
accumulations of ice or snow. Removal of these accumulations is necessary prior to takeoff.
Airfoil contours may be altered by the ice and snow to the extent that their lift qualities will be seriously
impaired. Ice and snow on the fuselage can increase drag and weight.
No attempt should be made to remove ice deposits or break an ice bond by force.
Frost that may form on the wing fuel tank bottom skins need not be removed prior to flight. Frost that
may accumulate on other portions of the wing, the tail surfaces, or on any control surface, must be
removed prior to flight.
For frost accumulation and removal, refer to the Airplane Flight Manual Section 2 - LIMITATIONS (ICE
PROTECTION LIMITATIONS - Airframe Icing) and the FAA published FSAT.
Unless engine inlet covers have been installed during snow or icing conditions, the rotor blades should
be turned by hand in the direction of normal rotation to make sure they are free to rotate prior to starting
engines. The removal of frozen deposits by chipping or scraping is not recommended. A soft brush,
squeegee, or mop may be used to clear snow that is not adhering to the surfaces.
If use of de-icing/anti-icing fluids are required to produce a clean airplane, special attention must be
given to the pitot masts, static ports, fuel vents, cockpit windows and the area forward of the cockpit
windows to make sure these components and areas are free of the de-icing/anti-icing solution.
Complete the normal preflight procedures, including a check of the flight controls for complete freedom
of movement.
TAXIING
Taxiing through deep snow or slush should be avoided when possible. Snow and slush can be forced
into brake assemblies which may cause the brakes to freeze during a prolonged hold on the ground or
during the subsequent flight. Keep flaps retracted during taxiing to avoid throwing snow or slush into
flap mechanisms and to minimize damage to flap surfaces.
Glaze ice can be difficult to see, therefore, taxi slowly and allow more clearance from objects when
maneuvering the airplane.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
After completion of the normal before takeoff checklist, verify that the airplane is still free of frozen
contaminants. Make sure the runway is free from hazards such as snow drifts, glazed ice, and ruts. If
visible moisture is to be encountered during take-off, engine anti-ice must be turned on.
LANDING
Braking and steering are less effective on slick runways. Also, at higher speeds, hydroplaning may occur
under wet runway conditions. Use the rudder to maintain directional control until the tires make solid
contact with the runway surface. Selecting reverse thrust can effectively reduce stopping distances on
slick runways.
NOTE: Reverse thrust may cause snow or moisture to be thrown forward, temporarily reducing
visibility.
Cold Soak conditions are defined as exposure to average ambient temperatures below -20° C for
periods in excess of four hours, when it is assumed that all airplane components have stabilized at the
ambient temperature.
UPON ARRIVAL
1. Drain the water system and toilet unit.
2. If the airplane cannot be housed in a heated hanger, remove the airplane main batteries and store
in a warm environment.
NOTE: The removal of the airplane main batteries will make sure the temperature of each battery
is not less than -10° C prior to the next take-off, thereby preserving the emergency flight
time capability.
3. Remove any packed snow from the wheel wells, landing gear, and all control surfaces.
NOTE: Make sure the airplane wheels are securely chocked and the PARK BRAKE is released to
prevent the brakes freezing.
4. Install covers or blanks to the following:
• Engine Intakes
• Jet Pipe Exhausts
• Nose and Main Gear Wheels
• Pitot Heads and Static Vents
• Windshield
• Ice Detector Head
• Dorsal Air Intake
• Stall Warning Vents
Refer to Hawker Beechcraft Corporation approved 125/Hawker Chapter 20 Standard Practices Manual,
Section 20-95-101 (pages 1 & 2) for airplane-specific approved de-icing fluids.
The FAA publishes a Flight Standards Information Bulletin for Air Transportation (FSAT) that provides
generically approved Type I, Type II, Type III and Type IV de-icing fluids, guidelines for application
procedures, charts for Holdover Times, and other related information.
Holdover time tables, obtained from www.faa.gov, search "HOLDOVER TIME TABLES", shall only be
used as part of an approved ground-deicing program. When the website cannot be accessed or
questions arise, contact FAA Flight Standards, Washington D.C. at 202-267-8166 or Hawker Beechcraft
Corporation at 1-800-429-5372 or 316-676-3140.
NOTE: When icing conditions prevail, airplane de-icing procedures must be carried out immediately
prior to flight as stated at the beginning of this section.
If a hot-air supply ground truck is available, this may be used to heat the following areas:
Check that all blanks and covers have been removed and all servicing is complete.
• Engine Intakes
• Fan Blades
• Spinners and Cowlings
• Vents
• Inlets
• Drains
• Jet Exhausts
To assist satisfactory starts, approximately 10 minutes before start, motor each engine for 30 seconds
with the fuel off.
NOTE: If the start is unsuccessful, use ground hot-air supply (if available) to warm the engine prior
to the next attempt.
Before takeoff, the minimum oil temperature for thrust settings above idle is +30° C.
• Air Temperature
• Minimum Fuel Temperature
• Oil Temperature
• Bird Strike Protection
Towing Procedure
1. Make sure the nose and main gear locking pins are installed (Figure 2).
2. Check that a pressure of 2000 psi minimum is indicated on the emergency brake accumulator
gauge in the rear equipment bay. If necessary, top up the system by operating the hydraulic hand
pump located adjacent to the accumulator.
3. Disconnect the steering by withdrawing the quick release pin and remove the steering disconnect
pin (Figure 1). Stow the quick release pin in the hole at the head of the disconnect pin.
4. Locate and attach the towbar to the torque link sleeve by inserting the steering disconnect pin in the
tow position of the sleeve. Turn the towbar safety catch to lock the tow pin.
5. Connect the towbar to the tractor.
6. Station a competent brake operator in the flight compartment and position an observer at each wing
tip and at the rear of the airplane if it is to be pushed.
7. Establish a suitable communication between the brake operator and the tractor driver.
8. Place the WHEELBRAKE lever to the EMERG position until ready to move the airplane.
9. If required, switch NAV lights ON.
10. Close the entry door.
11. Tow the airplane steadily at a speed not exceeding 5 mph (8 kph).
12. On arrival at the parking position, center the nose gear, check the brake pressure, and top up as
necessary.
Set the WHEELBRAKE lever fully to the PARK position and place chocks at the front and rear of the
main and nose gear wheels.
13. Disconnect the towbar. Insert the steering disconnect pin through the torque link sleeve and steering
sleeve.
Lock the disconnect pin by inserting the quick release pin through the 0.25 inch diameter hole
recessed in the forward face of the torque link sleeve (Figure 1).
Make sure the quick release pin is locked in position with the indicator groove exposed and level
with the head (Figure 1).
If a pattern type towbar is used for towing, which does not provide a catch to retain the steering
disconnect pin, the disconnect pin should be retained by the use of the quick release pin.
Figure 1
Towbar Installation
CAUTION: ALLOW PITOT HEADS TO COOL BEFORE INSTALLING THE PITOT COVERS.
Figure 2
Landing Gear Locking Pins Location
STOWED POSITION
DEPLOYED POSITION
Figure 3
Thrust Reverser Locking Pins
NOTE: The dorsal intake blank is positioned using the folding handle stowed with the blank. Using a
servicing mat and observing the KEEP OFF areas, stand on the left wing to install the blank.
NOTE: If used, make sure the inside of the windshield cover is clean and free from all contaminates
before installing and do not drag the cover over the screen.
(b) Attach the snap fasteners of the forward and rear inboard straps to the snap fasteners on the
underside of the pylon.
(c) Adjust the tensioners on all three straps to make sure of the even positioning and security of the
fasteners.
Figure 4
Covers and Blanks
Mooring Procedure
1. Provided the airplane is headed into wind and the parking brakes are used in conjunction with
chocks front and rear of the main and nose gear wheels, no mooring is necessary in winds of less
than 40 knots.
2. When winds are expected to exceed 40 knots, moor the airplane as shown in Figures 5 and 6.
UP TO 40 KNOTS
40 TO 60 KNOTS
Airplane headed into wind, brakes on, wheel chocks lashed, and main wheels moored.
NOTE: Use two inch sisal or manila rope at all attachment points. Allow sufficient slack for contraction
of rope in wet weather.
Figure 5
Airplane Mooring
60 to 80 KNOTS
• Fueled
• Brakes on
MAIN GEAR
NOSE GEAR
Figure 6
Main and Nose Landing Gear Mooring
2. Close the spigots on the claws into the handwheel bushes by pushing the knurled ring down and
turning clockwise. Make sure the plunger engages the bush in the mounting bracket.
2. Set the control column fully left and fully forward. Swing the gust lock back and secure into the
stowage clip.
Figure 7
Gust Lock - Ailerons and Elevator
Figure 8
Gust Lock - Rudder
Ground running at power settings above idle, for other than brief periods, can cause the local air
temperatures to exceed limits in the following areas:
NOTE: Engine anti-icing must not be used if the ambient air temperature is above +10° C. For engine
running limitations, refer to the Airplane Maintenance Manual.
1. Position the airplane (preferably headed into wind and standing on concrete which is free from
cracks, joints, debris, dust, and spilt fuel and/or oil), so that all buildings, etc. will be clear of the
Engine Danger Zones (Figure 1).
2. Center the nose gear and chock all wheels.
3. Remove all covers and blanks and make sure the engine intakes and exhausts are free from foreign
matter.
4. Observe normal fire precautions.
5. Connect the appropriate external electrical power supply suitable for starting engines (if available)
or use the airplane APU (if installed).
If no external power supply is available, use the APU (if installed) to support airplane services and
the internal batteries to start the engines.
FULL THROTTLE
Velocity falls
below 15 MPH
FULL THROTTLE
Temperature
below 30° C
100 ft
50 ft
16 ft Radius
75 ft
150 ft
Figure 1
Engine Danger Zones
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
Upon engine shutdown, roll down times may vary between engines. Investigate any roll down time of
less than 60 seconds.
Upon completion of the engine run, the cowling doors and the rear equipment bay door should be
closed and secured.
NOTE: A card listing approved oils is located in the airplane manual stowage. The consumable
quantity stated above, and on the card, refers to the oil available for use below the minimum
level on the sight-glass and is sufficient for more than 12 hours engine operation at maximum
oil consumption.
1. Check the level of oil at the oil tank sight glass, visible through the viewing port in the cowling lower
access door.
2. Record the quantity of oil required.
Replenish Engine Oil via the Filler Tube (Left Side of Engine - Figure 3)
1. Open the cowling door to get access to the oil filler tube on the left side of the engine.
2. Push the filler cap down, with minimal force, and turn 90° counter-clockwise before lifting from the
tank.
3. Make sure the container is very clean and add oil to the filler tube until the level at the sight glass
registers FULL.
4. Inspect and, if necessary, renew the filler cap seal.
5. Insert the filler cap into the filler tube and push down and turn 90° clockwise to secure.
6. Do not use excessive force.
7. Record the quantity required to fill the system.
8. Close the cowling lower access door and secure.
Figure 2
Engine Oil Contents Viewing Ports
Figure 3
Engine Oil System Replenishment Details
STOWED POSITION
DEPLOYED POSITION
Figure 4
Thrust Reverser Pins
CENTER SPAR
Figure 5
Fuel Tanks and Compartments
FUEL CAPACITIES
Capacities quoted in Table 3 are achieved following gravity refueling.
NOTE: Contents indicators register usable fuel only.
Table 3 - Fuel Capacities
NOTES:
1. After pressure refueling, the contents of each wing tank will be 1.7 U.S. gallons less and
the contents of the ventral tank will be reduced by 2.5 U.S. gallons.
2. The contents is reduced by 3.3 U.S. gallons for airplanes which have an external toilet
servicing facility.
Aviation Wide-Cut fuel to the current approved issue of the following specification
• British .......................... DEF STAN 91-88 D.E.R.D. 2454
• American ..................... ASTM D1655/JET B
MIL-T-5624 JP4
• Canadian ..................... CAN/CGSB 3.22/JET B
• Russian ....................... GOST 10227-86 T2
SIGBOL additive TU38-101741-78 may be used in concentrations not exceeding 0.0005% by volume.
NOTES:
1. Fuel contained in the wing tanks shall be equally disposed between the two wing tanks.
The maximum out of balance between wing tanks for flight is 500 lb (227 kg).
2. Fuel must not be carried in the ventral tank unless each main wing tank contains at least
3450 lb (1565 kg) of fuel.
3. Before flights on which it is to be utilized, the ventral tank must be filled completely. For other
flights it must be empty.
(FAIRING REMOVED)
FUEL DRAIN
VALVE
ENG 2 REFUEL
FUEL ON
GRAVITY REFUEL BONDING WING FUEL REAR BAY
POINT (ACCESS SPIGOT XFD/TFR DOOR
DOOR) C
R PUMP
ON
FUEL TANK B
WATER DRAIN
VALVE
BONDING PRESSURE REFUEL/
SPIGOT DEFUEL COUPLING
FUEL TANK WATER A
DRAIN VALVES
VENT COLLECTOR
(UNDER PANELS)
TANK DRAIN VALVE VENTRAL TANK ACCESS
REAR FAIRING DOOR
CROCODILE
FILLER CAP EARTH CLIP
D DUST
COVER
BLANKING
CAP ON
B LANYARD
TYPICAL
HOSE LANYARD
E END UNIT STOWAGE
FILLER CAP
CDU C
REFUEL CONTROL PRESSURE REFUEL/
PANEL DEFUEL COUPLING
ENGINE / FUEL DATA
22 OIL TEMP °C
C 22 PRESS TO TEST P TO T PRESS TO TEST
LEFT RIGHT
ON REFUEL REFUEL
0 FUEL FLOW 0
ON
1940 FUEL QTY LBS 2020 OFF
VENTRAL - EMPTY
OFF
OFF DEFUEL OFF
POWER MASTER VENTRAL L WING R
E D M8100
HA00B986973AA
Figure 6
Fuel System Servicing Points
Figure 7
Pressure Refueling Coupling
When the airplane 28 VDC busbars are energized, the refuel control panel electrical power is normally
supplied from the PE busbar circuit breakers and through the left weight-on-wheels switch. Both wing
tank fuel contents and the ventral tank contents are displayed on either the pilot’s or copilot’s CDU
engine page and the copilot’s MFD.
When the airplane has no external power, the APU is not running or the batteries are not switched ON,
the refuel control panel and the refuel/defuel circuits can be energized by the use of the POWER
switch on the refuel control panel.
(a) For Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent or for airplanes with SB 24-3641 embodied:
The refuel control panel POWER switch also energizes the left CDU and two of the Data
Control Units (DCU) from the battery busbar which allows the fuel contents indications to be
displayed.
(b) For airplanes prior to Airplane Serial No. 258670 which do not have SB 24-3641 embodied:
Fuel contents indications will not be available because the right MFD and the left CDU are not
energized.
The refuel control panel is illuminated when either the door or vestibule ENTRY LIGHT is switched ON.
Using the water drain tool, drain all water from tanks before and after refueling.
After refueling, delay the water drain check, if possible, for about 30 minutes. Free water readily
separates from the fuel but water in extremely fine droplets will remain suspended for at least 10
minutes. If the drain sample appears cloudy, it contains water and further time is required to allow this
water to settle.
NOTE: If the tank fuel temperature is below 0° C, the water drains may be frozen and ineffective with
water accumulating over successive flights. In these circumstances, it is essential that water
drain checks are complied with at the first opportunity when the tank temperature rises above
0° C.
Figure 8
Water Drain Tool
To Drain Water From The Wing Center Tanks, Use This Release Tool With The Extension Blade.
1. Insert the blade of the release tool in the slot of the drain valve spindle.
2. Turn the tool and valve counter-clockwise 1/4 turn and push up.
3. Continue to drain until the drains container appears to be full.
4. Release the pressure on the drain tool and allow the drain to move downwards to the closed
position.
5. Turn the drain tool and valve clockwise to lock the drain valve in position.
6. Check the sample and repeat the drain procedure if necessary.
NOTE: This tool may be used without the extension blade for draining the vent surge and ventral
tank.
POWER SUPPLIES
Refuel/defuel preferably with external power connected. If external power is not available, the airplane
batteries may be used but do not use other electrical equipment as a battery voltage reduction may
occur affecting indicator readings.
If RAC Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 has been incorporated, the fuel quantity can be monitored on the
pilot’s CDU following the selection of the refuel control panel POWER switch to ON. Selecting the
airplane batteries to ON (for these airplanes) is not required.
WARNING: THE APU MUST NOT BE USED IF THE AIRPLANE CONTAINS OR WILL
BE REFUELLED WITH A WIDE CUT FUEL E.G. JP4.
Limitations
• Maximum refuel pressure (gauge) ...............50 psi (3.515 kg/sq.cm)
• Maximum refuel rate.....................................144 US Gal/min (545 Ltrs/min)
• Maximum defuel suction...............................11.0 psi (0.773 kg/sq.cm)
NOTE: The minimum wing tank fuel load with a full ventral tank is 1000 lb (454 kg) each wing.
(3) On the refuel control panel, select the VENTRAL and L & R WING switches to
REFUEL.
(a) Push the LEFT OVER FLOW PRESS TO TEST and check:
(b) Release the LEFT OVER FLOW PRESS TO TEST and check all indications are
the same as those at the end of step (2).
(d) Release the RIGHT OVER FLOW PRESS TO TEST and check all indications are
the same as those at the end of step (2).
• FULL is indicated.
(f) Release the VENTRAL P TO T and check that all indications are the same as those
at the end of step (2).
• FULL is indicated.
• FULL is indicated.
(5) Select the VENTRAL and L & R WING tank REFUEL switches OFF and check:
(6) Push the OVER PRESS PRESS TO TEST for more than 1 second, then release and
check:
(7) Select the refuel MASTER switch OFF, then after approximately 2 seconds, select ON
and check the MASTER VALVE reopens.
Airworthiness Requirements
The previous Test Refuel Control System Before Refuel, Step (4) sub-steps (a) thru (h) is given to show
compliance with United States F.A.R. Part 25.979.
(b) Push the finger hole towards the center to release the handle, then turn the handle
counter-clockwise to remove the cover.
(c) Hold the handwheel, push the HEPC up and put its nose coupling into engagement
with the airplane coupling; turn the HEPC clockwise to the limit of its travel,
approximately 40°.
(d) Connect the HEPC grounding clip to the grounding point. Move the valve operation
lever to the open position to engage the interlock.
(b) Disconnect the HEPC grounding clip from the grounding point.
(c) Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and disengage the HEPC from the airplane
coupling.
(c) Turn the cover clockwise to lock and then close the handle.
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and pressure refueling with the airplane
batteries only:
II. Airplanes prior to Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and pressure refueling with the airplane
batteries only:
III. All airplanes pressure refueling when external power or the APU is available:
Depending on the configuration of the airplane, refer to the appropriate steps under I, II, or III to prepare
for Pressure Refueling:
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and pressure refueling with the airplane batteries only:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(3) Make sure the fuel L & R PUMP switches are selected OFF.
(4) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
The Engine/Fuel data page will automatically be displayed on the pilot’s CDU.
NOTE: A sonalert will sound and the overhead panel REFUEL ON annunciator
illuminates when the POWER switch is selected ON. The sonalert will stop
when the MASTER switch is selected ON.
(5) If the wings are to be only partially filled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed on
the pilot’s CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(7) Make sure the WING FUEL/X FEED/TRANSFER lever is selected to WING FUEL
(lever fully up).
(8) Refer forward to Pressure Refueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
II. Airplanes prior to airplane Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and pressure refueling with the airplane batteries only:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(3) Make sure the fuel L & R PUMP switches are selected OFF.
(4) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
(6) If the wings are to be only partially filled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed on
the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(8) Make sure the WING FUEL/X FEED/TRANSFER lever is selected to WING FUEL
(lever fully up).
(9) Refer forward to Pressure Refueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
III. All airplanes pressure refueling when external power or the APU is available:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(3) Make sure the fuel L & R PUMP switches are selected OFF.
(5) If the wings are to be only partially filled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed on
the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(7) Make sure the WING FUEL/X FEED/TRANSFER lever is selected to WING FUEL
(lever fully up).
(8) Make sure the AUX FUEL TRANSFER lever is selected CLOSED
(lever fully up).
(9) Refer below to Pressure Refueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
NOTE: A refuel vehicle with either 'hose end' or 'on board' pressure regulation may be
used.
(4) Open the refuel vehicle delivery valve, then adjust the refuel vehicle pump output
pressure and commence pumping fuel into airplane tanks:
(a) Hose end regulation (50 psi MAX) only - adjust refueling vehicle pump output
pressure to 65-70 psi (4.4 - 4.83 bar).
(b) On board regulation only - adjust the refuel vehicle pump output pressure to
50 psi (3.45 bar).
(5) On the refuel control panel, select the switches of the tanks to be refueled to REFUEL.
On the refuel control panel, select each tank REFUEL switch OFF when its associated
tank indicates FULL and check the associated tank refuel valve indicates SHUT.
NOTES:
1. Allow the fuel to settle for approximately 2 minutes to make sure the content
indications are satisfactory
2. The maximum out of balance between wing tanks for flight is 500 lb (227 kg).
(8) On the refuel control panel, select the refuel MASTER switch OFF and check all refuel
valve indicators indicate SHUT.
(9) Check the total fuel uplift with the fuel supplier.
(11) Check the flight compartment overhead roof panel REFUEL ON annunciator is
extinguished.
(12) Disconnect the hose bonding lead, uncouple the refueling hose and disconnect the
vehicle bonding lead. Install the blanking cap to the airplane coupling and close the
coupling access door.
(14) Report all unusual incidents, in the refuel system, to the pilot before flight.
In this instance, the associated tank may be refueled by manual control of the affected valve, but a
signalling system should be arranged to instruct the operator to shut the valve when the associated
TANK FULL indicator illuminates.
NOTE: The associated tank refuel VALVE position indicator must be serviceable for this manual
operation.
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and suction defueling with the airplane batteries
only:
II. Airplanes prior to Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and suction defueling with the airplane batteries
only:
III. All airplanes suction defueling when external power or the APU is available:
Depending on the configuration of the airplane, refer to the appropriate steps under I, II, or III to prepare
for Suction Defueling:
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and suction defueling with the airplane batteries only:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(3) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
NOTE: A sonalert will sound and the overhead panel REFUEL ON annunciator will
illuminate when the POWER switch is selected ON. The sonalert will stop
when the MASTER switch is selected ON.
(4) If the wings are to be only partially defueled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed
on the pilot’s CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(6) Refer forward to Suction Defueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(3) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
(5) If the wings are to be only partially defueled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed
on the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(7) Refer forward to Suction Defueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
III. All airplanes suction defueling when external power or the APU is available:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(4) If the wings are to be only partially defueled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed
on the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(6) Refer forward to Suction Defueling Procedure and continue with steps 1 thru 14:
(3) On the refuel control panel, select the refuel MASTER switch ON. Check the MASTER
VALVE magnetic indicator displays OPEN and the flight compartment overhead roof
panel REFUEL ON annunciator is illuminated.
(b) On the refuel control panel, select the REFUEL-OFF-DEFUEL switch to DEFUEL
and check the ventral tank VALVE magnetic indicator displays OPEN.
(c) Defuel the ventral tank until the CDU legend displays EMPTY.
(d) Check the ventral tank VALVE magnetic indicator displays SHUT.
(6) On the refuel control panel, select the refuel MASTER switch OFF and check the
MASTER VALVE magnetic indicator displays SHUT.
(7) If the refuel control panel POWER switch was selected ON, select OFF.
(8) On the flight compartment overhead roof panel, check the REFUEL ON annunciator is
extinguished.
(10) Disconnect the refuel/defuel coupling and associated bonding lead from the airplane.
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling wing tanks with the
airplane batteries only:
II. Airplanes prior to Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling wing tanks with the
airplane batteries only:
III. All airplanes gravity refueling wing tanks when external power or the APU is available:
Depending on the configuration of the airplane, refer to the appropriate steps under I, II, or III to prepare
for Gravity Refueling Wing Tanks:
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling wing tanks with the airplane batteries only:
NOTE: Although there is no mandatory order in which wing tanks must be filled, refuel these tanks
simultaneously if possible. The maximum out of balance between wing tanks for flight is
500 lb (227 kg).
(4) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
NOTE: A sonalert will sound and the overhead panel REFUEL ON annunciator will
illuminate when the POWER switch is selected ON. The sonalert will stop
when the MASTER switch is selected ON.
(6) Refer forward to Gravity Refueling Wing Tanks Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 14:
II. Airplanes prior to airplane Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling wing tanks with the airplane batteries only:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(6) If the wings are to be only partially filled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed on
the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(7) Refer forward to Gravity Refueling Wing Tanks Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 14:
(2) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(4) If the wings are to be only partially refueled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed
on the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(6) Refer below to Gravity Refueling Wing Tanks Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 14:
(3) Put the wing skin protection mat in position on the wing at the filler point (Figure 9).
(4) Bond the refuel nozzle to the bonding spigot on the wing, unlock and remove the filler
cap from wing.
(5) Refuel to the level required, both tanks at the same time if possible.
(6) The wing tanks are full when the fuel level gets to the filler neck flap valve. Do not
overfill.
(7) Check the fuel contents of each tank as displayed on the CDU.
(a) Engage the cap into the skin adapter with the arrow on the cap pointed forward.
(10) Remove the wing skin protection mat from the wing.
(11) Drain all water from the tanks (Figures 6 & 8).
(12) If the POWER switch on the refuel control panel was selected to ON, select the
POWER switch to OFF.
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling ventral tank with the
airplane batteries only:
II. Airplanes prior to Serial No. 258670 which do not have Raytheon Aircraft Company
Service Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refueling ventral tank with the
airplane batteries only:
III. All airplanes gravity refueling ventral tank when external power or the APU is available:
Depending on the configuration of the airplane, refer to the appropriate steps under I, II, or III to prepare
for Gravity Refueling Ventral Tank:
I. Airplane Serial No. 258670 and subsequent, or airplanes with Raytheon Aircraft Company Service
Bulletin SB 24-3641 incorporated and gravity refuel ventral tank with the airplane batteries only:
NOTE: If the ventral tank is to be used in flight it must be full and each wing must contain
more than 3450 lb (1565 kg) of fuel.
After the ventral tank has been refueled to full and after the 28 VDC has been de-
energized and energized, the CDU indication may present a crosshatch indication
due to settling. To confirm the ventral tank is full, a small amount of fuel can be
transferred into the ventral tank.
(1) Drain all water from the ventral tank using the water drain.
WARNING: APU (if installed) MUST NOT BE RUNNING.
(2) Comply with local refueling safety precautions.
(3) On the refuel control panel, select the POWER switch ON (Figure 6).
NOTE: A sonalert will sound and the overhead panel REFUEL ON annunciator will
illuminate when the POWER switch is selected ON. The sonalert will stop
when the MASTER switch is selected ON.
(4) Refer forward to Gravity Refueling Ventral Tank Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 16:
(2) Drain all water from the ventral tank using the water drain (Figures 6 & 8).
(6) If the wings are to be only partially filled, check the wing FUEL contents displayed on
the CDU and make sure the indication shows the correct current fuel state.
(7) Refer forward to Gravity Refuel Ventral Tank Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 16:
III. All airplanes gravity refuel ventral tank when external power or the APU is available:
(2) Drain all water from the ventral tank using the water drain (Figures 6 & 8).
(5) Refer forward to Gravity Refuel Ventral Tank Procedure and continue with steps
1 thru 16:
(5) Open the gravity refuel access door in the ventral tank rear fairing (Figure 10).
(6) Bond the filling nozzle to the bonding spigot on the tank.
(8) Pump fuel into the tank until full and withdraw the nozzle.
(9) Check the filler cap is serviceable, install and secure the cap to the tank. Disconnect
the bonding lead and close the access door.
(10) Check the VENTRAL tank contents legend on the CDU displays FULL.
(12) If the POWER switch on the refuel control panel was selected to ON, select the
POWER switch to OFF.
CAUTION: LEAVE THE AUX FUEL TRANSFER VALVE SHUT OR FUEL MAY TRANSFER FROM
THE VENTRAL TANK TO THE WING TANKS.
(5) Place a wing skin protection mat on the wing at the filling point for the tank being
defueled (Figure 9).
(7) Unscrew the blanking adapter from the fuel drain valve and install the drain adapter to
the tank.
(9) Remove the drain adapter and install the blanking adapter to the fuel drain valve.
1. Insert the cap into the skin adapter with the arrow on the cap facing forward.
2. Rotate the handle to lock and seal the cap.
3. Lower the handle into the recess.
Figure 9
Wing Tank Filler Cap
Figure 10
Ventral Tank Filler Cap
WING LEADING
EDGE
FUEL DRAIN
ADAPTER
25Y-867A
M8009_0.AI
Figure 11
Gravity Defueling Drain Adaptor
NOTES:
1. To avoid drain on airplane batteries it is recommended that testing of electrical services
be performed using external ground supply incorporating overvoltage protection.
2. For external starts, a ground power unit capable of supplying 28 VDC with a minimum
output of 42 kW (short term capability of 28 volts x 1500 AMPS) having a limiter
operating at 1100 AMPS must be used.
GENERAL
Primary DC power distribution is effected by busbars designated PS1, PS2, and PE. During ground
servicing, the busbars can be energized from the APU generator or ground supplies. PE busbar may
also be energized from the airplane batteries, provided their use is severely restricted.
ENERGIZE DC BUSBARS
WARNING: MAKE SURE THE THRUST REVERSERS ARE STOWED AND THE THRUST
REVERSER LEVERS IN THE FLIGHT COMPARTMENT ARE AT THE STOW
POSITION BEFORE ENERGIZING THE DC BUSBARS.
CAUTION: THE APU MASTER SWITCH SHOULD NEVER BE LEFT IN THE ON POSITION WITH
THE APU NOT RUNNING BECAUSE FUEL PUMP CAVITATION CAN OCCUR WITH
SUBSEQUENT PUMP DAMAGE OR FAILURE.
To energize the DC busbars refer to Figures 12 and 12A. The external ground supplies are connected
to the airplane electrical system via a three pin plug located on the right side rear fuselage (Figure 13).
DC APU
Ground Supply Generator
Check the APU MASTER, BATTERY, EXT POWER and external On the APU control panel,
ground supply switches are selected OFF. check the following annunciator, is extinguished.
APU
Switch the external power supply ON and wait at least GEN
30 seconds to select the EXT POWER switch ON.
Power Power
Diode Diode
On the overhead roof panel, Monitor the battery voltage on B1, B2, and PE
the following annunciators will illuminate. If a ground power supply is connected and by using the voltmeter selector switch.
switched ON with the APU generator output
BATT 1
isolated, the above annunciator will illuminate.
CNTCTR ESSENTIAL DC BUSBAR - PE
BATT 2
CNTCTR
GEN 1 BUS TIE GEN 2
PE2
FAIL OPEN FAIL
No. 1 No. 2
PS1 BUSBAR PS2 BUSBAR Battery Battery
Figure 12
Energizing DC Busbars
Figure 13
External Ground Power Receptacle
(b) Operate the foot brake pedals until, with the brakes fully applied, zero pressure is indicated on
both the brake indicators.
(b) Operate the foot brake pedals until the emergency brake accumulator pressure gauge reads 950
to 1000 psi.
1. Make sure the landing gear is DOWN, airbrakes are SHUT, and thrust reversers are stowed.
2. Gain access to the main hydraulic reservoir in the rear equipment bay and release the thrust
reverser accumulator pressure as follows:
(a) Set the spring loaded handle of the thrust reverser pressure release valve, located on the
hydraulic box, to the OPEN position to depressurize the thrust reverser accumulator until the
pressure gauge reads 1450 to 1500 psi.
1. After releasing the accumulator pressure, check the fluid level of the reservoir in the level indicator
tube against the appropriate markings on the adjacent label.
2. If replenishment is required, release the reservoir air pressure by slowly removing the filler cap and
replenish the reservoir as necessary.
3. Check the pressure release hole in the filler cap is unobstructed and the sealing ring is undamaged
and correctly seated.
4. Reinstall the filler cap.
5. Clean up any spilled fluid.
REPLENISH AUXILIARY RESERVOIR (Figure 15)
CAUTION: BEFORE REPLENISHMENT, MAKE SURE THE FILTER IN THE FILLER NECK IS IN
POSITION AND UNDAMAGED. ALWAYS USE A CLEAN CONTAINER AND CLEAN
FLUID.
1. Release the front radome fasteners and secure the radome in the open position.
2. In the nose gear bay, peel back the velcro secured fabric cover on the forward bulkhead and gain
access to the auxiliary reservoir.
3. Check the fluid level in the tank level indicator tube and replenish the reservoir as necessary.
NOTE: To prevent a possible misreading, shine a flashlight from behind the indicator tube.
Center
Instrument
Panel
OFF
4
SUPPLY 0
MWS Annunciators
3 1
2
Triple Indicator
Figure 14
Hydraulic Indications
LEVEL
INDICATOR
FILLER CAP
B
A
FULL THREE
LARGE ACCS
EMPTY
FULL ONE
LARGE ACC
LEVEL INDICATOR FILLER CAP A
3000 PSI
AUXILIARY RESERVOIR
FULL TWO
LARGE ACCS
3000 PSI
FULL THREE
LARGE ACCS
3000 PSI
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
CHECK FLUID LEVEL
C
AIR BRAKES IN
T/R STOWED
U/C DOWN
F
C
AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE
THRUST REVERSER D
ACCUMULATOR HYDRAULIC QUICK
E RELEASE CONNECTION
(3 OFF)
EMERGENCY BRAKE
PRESSURE RELEASE VALVE
F NORMAL BRAKE
THRUST REVERSER
PRESSURE RELEASE
PRESSURE RELEASE VALVE
VALVE
EMERGENCY
ACCUMULATOR
GAUGE
B
D MAIN SYSTEM RESERVOIR
AND ACCUMULATORS
CAPACITORS
MAIN
E ACCUMULATOR M7155_0
HA00B
986043AA
FORWARD
Figure 15
Hydraulic Servicing Points
Figure 16
Main Hydraulic Reservoir
The following pressures may be used, up to maximum take-off weight, for general operation from
normal runway surfaces. These values are with Weight-On-Wheels.
CAUTION: USE ONLY NITROGEN FOR TIRE INFLATION. WHEN A TIRE IS INFLATED, FILL THE
TIRE WITH NITROGEN SLOWLY TO PREVENT A RAPID TEMPERATURE INCREASE
AND INCORRECT READINGS.
The landing case may determine main wheel tire pressures for short range operations. A tolerance of
+10, - 0 psi is recommended for pressures quoted above or Figures 17 and 18. With the airplane
standing on its wheels, check the tire pressures with an inflation gauge (pressure range 0-260 psi) and
a screw on inflation connector.
NOTE: The UNLOADED figures quoted in Figures 17 and 18 apply only when there is no load on the
tire.
Except as stated below, only nitrogen is to be used for tire inflation. The use of high pressure nitrogen
bottles is recommended, but it is essential that a suitable pressure reducing valve is incorporated in the
delivery line. Inflate the tires to the required pressures. If nitrogen is not available it is permissible to use
dry air for inflation provided that, at the earliest opportunity, the tire is completely re-charged with
nitrogen.
NOTES:
1. Pressure loss at ambient temperature must not exceed 5% of the inflation pressure
during any 24 hour period.
2. After landing, there will be a rise in main wheel tire pressure due to brake heat.
3. Allowance must be made for this pressure rise when checking tire pressures if the
duration of the stop does not permit waiting for the gas in the tire to cool.
Figure 17
Variation of Minimum Nosewheel Tire Pressure with Take-off and Landing Weights
Figure 18
Variation of Minimum Mainwheel Tire Pressure with Take-off and Landing Weights
1. Unless otherwise stated by the appropriate Airworthiness Authority, reject a tire when it is fully worn
as defined by the following.
2. Use the center groove as a wear indicator.
If the tread pattern, shown in Figure 19, does not have a center groove, use the grooves adjacent
to the center rib. A tire is fully worn when the tread is worn to the base of the wear indicating
groove(s).
NOTE: A tire worn beyond the above defined limit cannot normally be retreaded.
TIRE INSPECTION
1. Examine the tire tread as previously defined in Tread Wear Check and reject a tire which is fully
worn.
2. Visually examine the tire for evidence of overheating. Signs of overheating are, blistering, chafing,
melting, or the start of bead failure shown by irregularities in the molding lines near the tire bead.
Reject a tire which has been subjected to excessive heat.
3. Examine the nose wheel tires for cracking along the chine/side-wall junctions. Cracking up to 0.016
in. in depth is permitted. Reject a chined tire with the following:
(a) A crack deeper than 0.016 in. and more than 1.0 inch in length.
4. Examine the general condition of the tires by using the illustrations and notes provided in Figures
19, 20, 20A and 21 for guidance.
REINFORCING TREAD
CORD
BREAKERS,
IF INCORPORATED
SIDEWALL
RUBBER
CASING PLIES,
LAYERS OF CORD
CROWN
SHOULDER
SIDE WALL
CHINE
BEAD
Tire Terminology Chine Type Nose Wheel Tire
Figure 19
Construction of a Typical Tire
(a) Cuts in the tread area are within the limits of Table 6.
(b) The cut does not exceed 1.50 in. in length, measured in the outer cord layer and not more than
0.50 in. in length, measured at the point of maximum penetration.
(c) Any two areas of maximum damage are not less than 60° apart.
NOTE: Maximum damage is given as a cut through the maximum permitted number of plies
detailed in Table 6.
Maximum
Tire Part No. Location Permissible
Damage Penetration
DR14625T Main Wheel 2 Plies
DR14626T Main Wheel 2 Plies
DR14627T Main Wheel 2 Plies
DR6384T Nose Wheel 1 Ply
DR6385T Nose Wheel 1 Ply
3. Refer to Figure 20, example (1) and Figure 20A, example (5)
Unevenly worn tires or tires worn on the shoulder until worn to the base of the tread pattern or to
the limit of wear defined in item 1, whichever occurs sooner.
Figure 20
Permissible Tire Damage
SIDEWAYS SCRUBBING
(7)
Figure 20A
Permissible Tire Damage (continued)
7. Leaking tires.
Figure 21
Non-Permissible Tire Damage
NOTES:
1. The inflation graphs, Figures 23 and 24, are based on the assumption that the oil level
is correct. When the oil level is correct, the gear can be inflated to the pressure to
correspond with the extension. The gear extension must NOT be adjusted, by altering
the gas pressure, if any doubt exists about the oil level.
2. It is recommended that only nitrogen should be used for inflation.
WARNING: IF A LEAK OCCURS AT THE CHARGING VALVE ADAPTER, THE ADAPTER MUST
NOT BE OVER TIGHTENED. CLOSE THE CHARGING VALVE AND CHARGING
CART STOP VALVE AND DEPRESSURIZE THE HOSE.
NOTE: The use of high pressure nitrogen bottles is recommended, but an applicable pressure
reducing valve is to be used in the delivery line.
2. Remove the charging valve cap and connect the charging adapter with gauge (Figure 22).
3. Check that the extension of the gear is correct for the pressure reading obtained on the pressure
indicator (Figures 23 and 24).
NOTE: Should the gear extension be incorrect, check the oil level.
CHARGING POINTS
V2973/1
HA00B986938AA
Figure 22
Gear Charging Valves
Figure 23
Main Gear - Pressure/Extension Graph
Figure 24
Nose Gear - Pressure/Extension Graph
WARNING: THE MASTER SUPPLY VALVE MUST BE FULLY OPEN OR CLOSED, FINGER
TIGHT ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO STOP A LEAK BY OVER-TIGHTENING.
(1) Open the master SUPPLY valve on the oxygen panel (pilot’s left side console) and
check the contents indicator.
(2) Close the master SUPPLY valve.
Figure 25
Flight Compartment Oxygen Services Panel
WARNING: OXYGEN FORMS AN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURE WITH OIL, GREASE, FUEL OR METAL
DUST. USE DEGREASED TOOLS AND CLEAN HANDS.
The airplane must be serviced with oxygen conforming to one of the following specifications:
• BS 2N3 1990
• ISO 2046
• DEF STAN 68-21
• MIL-0-27210
1. Open the oxygen charging point access door on the right side of the rear fuselage.
Figure 26
Oxygen Charging Point (Right Side of Rear Fuselage)
2. Connect the oxygen charging rig to the airplane charging valve as follows:
WARNING: BEFORE BONDING THE OXYGEN CHARGING RIG TO THE AIRPLANE, MAKE
SURE BOTH THE RIG AND THE AIRPLANE ARE INDIVIDUALLY BONDED TO
GROUND.
(b) On the oxygen charging rig, connect one bonding cable to ground.
(c) Connect the bonding cable on the charging rig to an appropriate bonding stud on the airplane.
(d) Remove the charging valve cap and connect the hose from the oxygen charging rig to the
charging valve.
3. Open the rig delivery valve and set the regulator valve to charge the system slowly to approximately
1900 psi.
4. Close the rig delivery valve and allow the system to cool to ambient temperature.
5. Check the system contents on the adjacent contents indicator and top up if necessary until the
indicator shows FULL, when the system pressure will be 1800 psi at 21° C.
6. Remove the oxygen charging rig from the airplane as follows:
(a) If a top up of the system was performed, make sure the rig delivery valve is closed.
(b) Disconnect the hose from the oxygen charging valve and install the charging valve cap.
(c) Remove the bonding cable from the charging rig to the bonding stud on the airplane.
(d) Remove the bonding cable from ground to the charging rig.
PRIME SYSTEM
Make sure the system is fully primed by the following instructions:
1. Energize PS2 busbar (Figure 12).
2. Make sure the contents indicator on the copilot’s side console is at a minimum of 1/4.
3. Push the vent valve adjacent to the tank filler cap for at least 10 seconds.
4. Set the WING/TAIL ANTICE time switch to run for 2 minutes.
5. Check that fluid flows from all distributor panels. If not, reselect the time switch for brief periods until
flow occurs.
6. Replenish the system tank as instructed previously.
7. De-energize PS2 busbar.
PURGE SYSTEM
1. Energize PS2 busbar (Figure 12).
2. Make sure the contents indicator on the copilot’s side console is at a minimum of 1/4.
3. Push the vent valve adjacent to the tank filler cap for at least 10 seconds.
4. Set the WING/TAIL ANTICE time switch to run for 10 minutes.
5. Before the switch reaches zero, reselect for an extra two minutes.
6. Check that fluid flows from all distributor panels. If not, reselect the time switch for brief periods until
flow occurs.
NOTE: The system must be run for at least 12 minutes during purging.
7. Replenish the system tank as instructed previously.
8. De-energize PS2 busbar.
1
/
2
1 3
/ /
4 4
E F
DE-ICE
FLUID
VENT
ICE
COVER
DETECTED
ANTICE ANTICE
LO PRESS LO QTY
ICE DET
WING / TAIL ANTICE
MAIN RISING AUTO
MINS
VENT PIPE
10 0
SECONDARY
VENT PIPE
OVRD
PART OF
TO TANK ROOF PANEL CG
FILLER
CONTENTS
TRANSMITTER
TO MANUAL
VENT VALVE
PUMP VENT
DE-ICING
PIPE
FLUID TANK
FRAME 6
FRAME 8
M6260
HA00B995896AA
Figure 27
Ice Protection Servicing Points
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................3
GENERAL .......................................................................................................3
SOURCES OF INFORMATION....................................................................3
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL AND
PILOT’S OPERATING MANUAL..................................................................3
RAYTHEON AIRCRAFT COMPANY SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ...............4
FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATIONS.........................................................5
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES.................................................................5
AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION MANUAL................................................5
ADVISORY INFORMATION .........................................................................6
FAA ADVISORY CIRCULARS .....................................................................6
FAA GENERAL AVIATION NEWS ...............................................................8
FAA ACCIDENT PREVENTION PROGRAM ...............................................8
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ......................................................................8
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SPECIFIC TOPICS ......................................9
MAINTENANCE............................................................................................9
HAZARDS OF UNAPPROVED MODIFICATIONS.....................................10
FLIGHT PLANNING....................................................................................10
PASSENGER SAFETY PROCEDURES GUIDES .....................................11
STOWAGE OF ARTICLES.........................................................................11
FLIGHT OPERATIONS ..............................................................................11
General ................................................................................................11
Preflight Inspection ..............................................................................11
Weight and Balance.............................................................................11
Autopilot ...............................................................................................12
Flutter...................................................................................................12
Turbulent Weather ...............................................................................13
Windshear............................................................................................14
Flight In Icing Conditions......................................................................15
Weather Radar.....................................................................................17
Mountain Flying....................................................................................18
VFR At Night ........................................................................................19
Vertigo - Disorientation ........................................................................19
Flight With One Engine Inoperative .....................................................20
Minimum Control Airspeed VMCA .........................................................20
Basic Single Engine Procedures..........................................................21
Engine Failure During Takeoff .............................................................21
The skilled pilot recognizes that safety consciousness is an integral, and never-ending, part of his or her
job. Be thoroughly familiar with your airplane. Know its limitations and your own.
Maintain your currency, or fly with a qualified instructor until you are current and proficient. Practice
emergency procedures at safe altitudes and airspeeds, preferably with a qualified instructor pilot, until
the required action is instinctive. Periodically review this Safety Information as part of your recurrency
training regimen.
Raytheon airplanes are designed and built to provide you with many years of safe and efficient
transportation. By maintaining your airplane properly and flying it prudently you will realize its full
potential.
It is mandatory that you fully understand the contents of this publication and the other operating and
maintenance manuals which accompany the airplane; that FAA requirements for ratings, certifications
and review be scrupulously complied with; and that only persons who are properly licensed and rated,
and thoroughly familiar with the contents of the Pilot’s Operating Manual and FAA Approved Airplane
Flight Manual be allowed to operate the airplane.
SOURCES OF INFORMATION
There is a wealth of information available to the pilot created for the sole purpose of making flying safer,
easier and more efficient. Take advantage of this knowledge and be prepared for an emergency in the
remote event that one should occur.
http://www.raytheonaircraft.com/support/pubs/publications.asp
Raytheon Aircraft Company automatically mails original issues and revisions of Raytheon Service
Bulletins (Mandatory, Recommended and Optional), FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual
Supplements, reissues and revisions of FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manuals, Flight Handbooks,
Owner’s Manuals, Pilot’s Operating Manuals and Pilot’s Operating Handbooks, and original issues and
revisions of Raytheon Safety Communiques to Raytheon airplane owners addresses as listed by the
FAA Aircraft Registration Branch List and the Raytheon Aircraft International Owner Notification Service
List. While this information is distributed by Raytheon Aircraft Company, we can not make changes in
the name or address furnished by the FAA. The owner must contact the FAA regarding any changes to
name or address. Their address is: FAA Aircraft Registration Branch (AAC250) P.O. Box 25082,
Oklahoma City, OK 73125, Phone (405) 680-2131.
It is the responsibility of the FAA owner of record to ensure that any mailings from Raytheon Aircraft
Company are forwarded to the proper persons. Often the FAA registered owner is a bank, financing
company, or an individual not in possession of the airplane. Also, when an airplane is sold, there is a
lag in processing the change in registration with the FAA. If you are a new owner, contact Raytheon
Aircraft Company and ensure that your manuals are up to date.
Raytheon Aircraft Company provides a subscription service which provides for direct factory mailing of
Raytheon Aircraft publications applicable to a specific serial number airplane. Details concerning the
fees and ordering information for this subscription service are available from TMDC at the following
address:
TMDC
Raytheon Aircraft Company
P.O. Box 85
Wichita, KS 67201-9863
From time to time Raytheon Aircraft Company issues Raytheon Safety Communiques dealing with the
safe operation of a specific series of airplanes, or airplanes in general. It is recommended that each
owner/operator maintain a current file of these publications. Back issues of Raytheon Safety
Communiques may be obtained without charge by sending a request including airplane model and
serial number to TMDC at the address listed above.
• Certificates Required
• Flight Plans
• Preflight Action
• Fuel Requirements
• Flight Rules
You, as a pilot, have responsibilities under government regulations. The regulations are designed for
your protection and the protection of your passengers and the public. Compliance is mandatory.
AIRWORTHINESS DIRECTIVES
14 CFR Part 39 specifies that no person may operate a product to which an Airworthiness Directive
issued by the FAA applies, except in accordance with the requirements of that Airworthiness Directive.
Airworthiness Directives (AD’s) are not issued by the manufacturer. They are issued and available from
the FAA.
It also contains items of interest to pilots concerning health and medical facts, factors affecting flight
safety, a pilot/controller glossary of terms in the Air Traffic Control system, information on safety, and
accident/hazard reporting. It is revised at six-month intervals and can be purchased from the
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.
This document contains a wealth of pilot information. Among the subjects are:
• Controlled Airspace
• Emergency Procedures
• Mountain Flying
• Preflight
• Bird Hazards
• Departures - IFR
• Enroute - IFR
• Arrival - IFR
All pilots must be thoroughly familiar with and use the information in the AIM.
ADVISORY INFORMATION
NOTAMS (Notices to Airmen) are documents that have information of a time-critical nature that would
affect a pilot’s decision to make a flight; for example, a closed airport, terminal radar out of service, or
enroute navigational aids out of service.
A complete list of current FAA Advisory Circulars is published in AC 00-2, which lists Advisory Circulars
that are for sale, as well as those distributed free of charge by the FAA, and provides ordering
information.
Many Advisory Circulars which are for sale can be purchased locally in aviation bookstores or at FBO’s.
These documents are subject to periodic revision. Be certain the Advisory Circular you are using is the
latest revision available. Some of the Advisory Circulars of interest to pilots are:
Usually the airport manager, the FAA Flight Service Station (FSS), or Fixed Base Operator (FBO), will
have a list of accident prevention counsellors and their phone numbers available. All Flight Standards
and General Aviation District Offices have a list of the counsellors serving the District.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The National Transportation Safety Board and the Federal Aviation Administration periodically issue, in
greater detail, general aviation pamphlets concerning aviation safety. FAA Regional Offices also publish
material under the FAA General Aviation Accident Prevention Program. These can be obtained at FAA
Offices, Weather Stations, Flight Service Stations or Airport Facilities.
• Weather or Not
• Disorientation
• Plane Sense
• Wake Turbulence
• Thunderstorm - TRW
• Icing
• Impossible Turn
• Windshear
Schedule your maintenance regularly, and have your airplane serviced by a reputable organization. Be
suspicious of bargain prices for maintenance, repair and inspections.
If repairs or modifications are made to the flight control system, make sure the control surfaces are
properly balanced and the controls can be moved freely from the cockpit through their designed range
of travel.
It is the responsibility of the owner and the operator to make sure the airplane is maintained in an
airworthy condition and that proper maintenance records are kept. Use only genuine Raytheon Aircraft
Company approved parts obtained from Raytheon Aircraft Company approved sources, in conjunction
with the maintenance and repair of Raytheon airplanes.
Genuine Raytheon Aircraft Company parts are produced and inspected under rigorous procedures to
make sure of airworthiness and suitability for use in Raytheon airplane applications. Parts purchased
from sources other than Raytheon Aircraft Company, even though outwardly identical in appearance,
may not have had the required tests and inspections performed, may be different in fabrication
techniques and materials, and may be dangerous when installed in an airplane.
Salvaged airplane parts, reworked parts obtained from non-Raytheon Aircraft Company approved
sources or parts, components, or structural assemblies, the service history of which is unknown or
cannot be authenticated, may have been subjected to unacceptable stresses or temperatures or have
other hidden damage not discernible through routine visual or usual non destructive testing techniques.
This may render the part, component or structural assembly, even though originally manufactured by
Raytheon Aircraft Company, unsuitable and unsafe for airplane use.
Raytheon Aircraft Company expressly disclaims any responsibility for malfunctions, failures, damage or
injury caused by use of non-Raytheon Aircraft Company parts.
NOTE: The required periods do not constitute a guarantee that the item will reach the period without
malfunction, as the aforementioned factors cannot be controlled by the manufacturer.
Corrosion and its effects must be treated at the earliest possible opportunity. A clean, dry surface is
virtually immune to corrosion. Make sure that all drain holes remain unobstructed. Protective films and
sealants help to keep corrosive agents from contacting metallic surfaces. Corrosion inspections should
be made most frequently under high-corrosion-risk operating conditions, such as in areas of excessive
airborne salt concentrations (e.g., near the sea) and in high-humidity areas (e.g., tropical regions).
If you have purchased a used airplane, have your mechanic inspect the airplane registration records,
logbooks and maintenance records carefully. An unexplained period of time for which the airplane has
been out of service, or unexplained significant repairs may well indicate the airplane has been seriously
damaged in a prior accident. Have your mechanics inspect a used airplane carefully. Take the time to
make sure you really know what you are buying when you buy a used airplane.
Airplane owners and maintenance personnel are particularly cautioned not to make attachments to, or
otherwise modify, seats from original certification without approval from the FAA Engineering and
Manufacturing District Office having original certification responsibility for that make and model.
Any unapproved attachment or modification to seat structure may increase load factors and metal
stress which could cause failure of seat structure at a lesser "g" force than exhibited for original
certification. Examples of unauthorized attachments found are drilling holes in seat tubing to attach fire
extinguishers and drilling holes to attach approach plate book bins to seats.
FLIGHT PLANNING
14 CFR Part 91 requires that each pilot in command, before beginning a flight, familiarize himself with
all available information concerning that flight, and, for Transport Category airplanes, states take-off
weight, landing weight and field length limitations which must be observed.
Obtain a current and complete preflight briefing. This should consist of local, enroute and destination
weather and enroute navaid information. Enroute terrain and obstructions, alternate airports, airport
runways active, length of runways, and take-off and landing distances for the airplane for conditions
expected should be known.
The prudent pilot will review the planned enroute track and stations and make a list for quick reference.
If a flight is to be made VFR, it is strongly recommended to file a flight plan with a Flight Service Station.
Also, advise Flight Service Stations of changes or delays of one hour or more and remember to close
the flight plan at destination.
STOWAGE OF ARTICLES
Airplane seats are designed to absorb energy in a downward direction. In order to accomplish this
action, the space between the seat pan and the floor is utilized to provide space for seat displacement.
If hard, solid objects are stored beneath seats, the energy absorbing feature is lost and severe spinal
injuries can occur to occupants.
Prior to flight, pilots should assure that articles are not stowed beneath seats that would restrict seat
pan energy absorption or penetrate the seat in event of a high vertical velocity accident.
Ensure that cargo and baggage is stowed and properly secured with tie-down straps and cargo nets.
FLIGHT OPERATIONS
General
The pilot MUST be thoroughly familiar with all information published by the manufacturer concerning
the airplane, and is required by law to operate the airplane in accordance with the FAA Approved
Airplane Flight Manual and placards installed.
Preflight Inspection
In addition to maintenance inspections and preflight information required by 14 CFR Part 91, a
complete, careful preflight inspection is imperative. Each airplane has a checklist for the preflight
inspection which must be followed. USE THE CHECKLIST.
The airplane must be loaded so as not to exceed the weight and center of gravity (C.G.) limitations.
Airplanes that are loaded above the maximum take-off or landing weight limitations will have an overall
lower level of performance compared to that shown in the Performance section of the Pilot’s Operating
Manual and the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. If loaded above maximum take-off weight, take-
off distance and the landing distance will be longer than that shown in the Performance section; the
stalling speed will be higher, rate of climb, cruising speed, and the range of the airplane at any level of
fuel will all be lower than shown in the Performance section.
If an airplane is loaded aft of the aft C.G. limitation, the pilot will experience a lower level of stability.
Airplane characteristics that indicate a lower stability level are; lower control forces, difficulty in trimming
the airplane, lower control forces for maneuvering with attendant danger of structural overload, decayed
stall characteristics, and a lower level of lateral-directional damping.
Ensure all cargo and baggage is properly secured before take-off. A sudden shift in balance at rotation
can cause controllability problems.
Autopilot
In addition to ensuring compliance with the autopilot manufacturer’s maintenance requirements, all
owner/operators should thoroughly familiarize themselves with the operation, function and procedures
described in the Hawker 800XP Collins Pro Line 21 Avionics System Pilot’s Guide, P/N 523-0780409-
001117. Prior to flight, each pilot must command a full understanding of the methods of engagement
and disengagement of the autopilot system, particularily disengagement.
Test that all buttons, switches and circuit breakers function as described in the Pilot’s Guide. If they do
not function as described, have the system repaired by a qualified service agency. If field service advice
or assistance is necessary, contact Raytheon Aircraft Company, Customer Support Department.
The preflight check must be conducted before every flight. The preflight check assures not only that the
system and all of its features are operating properly, but also that the pilot, before flight, is familiar with
the proper means of engagement and disengagement of the autopilot.
The Pilot’s Guide cautions against trying to override the autopilot system during flight without
disengaging the autopilot because the autopilot will continue to trim the airplane and oppose the pilot’s
actions. This could result in a severe out-of-trim condition. This is a basic feature of all autopilots with
electric trim followup.
It is often difficult to distinguish an autopilot malfunction from an electric trim system malfunction.
The engagement of the autopilot must be done in accordance with the instructions and procedures
contained in the Pilot’s Guide.
Particular attention must be paid to the autopilot settings prior to engagement. If you attempt to engage
the autopilot when the airplane is out of trim, a large attitude change may occur.
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE PROCEDURES SET FORTH IN THE PILOT’S GUIDE BE FOLLOWED
BEFORE ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT.
Flutter
Flutter is a phenomenon that can occur when an aerodynamic surface begins vibrating. The energy to
sustain the vibration is derived from airflow over the surface. The amplitude of the vibration can (1)
Airplanes are designed so that flutter will not occur in the normal operating envelope of the airplane as
long as the airplane is properly maintained. In the case of any airplane, decreasing the damping and
stiffness of the structure or increasing the trailing edge weight of control surfaces will tend to cause
flutter. If a combination of these factors is sufficient, flutter can occur within the normal operating
envelope.
Owners and operators of airplanes have the primary responsibility for maintaining their airplanes. To
fulfill this responsibility, it is imperative that all airplanes receive a thorough preflight inspection.
Improper tension on the control cables or any other loose condition in the flight control system can also
cause or contribute to flutter.
Pilots should pay particular attention to control surface attachment hardware including tab pushrod
attachment during preflight inspection. Looseness of fixed surfaces or movement of control surfaces
other than in the normal direction of travel should be rectified before flight. Further, owners should also
take their airplanes to mechanics who have access to current technical publications and prior
experience in properly maintaining that make and model of airplane.
The owner should make certain that control cable tension inspections are performed as outlined in the
applicable Raytheon Aircraft Company Inspection Guide. Worn control surface attachment hardware
must be replaced. Any repainting or repair of a moveable control surface will require a verification of the
control surface balance before the airplane is returned to service. Control surface drain holes must be
open to prevent freezing of accumulated moisture, which could create an increased trailing-edge-heavy
control surface and flutter.
If an excessive vibration, particularly in the control column and rudder pedals, is encountered in flight,
this may be the onset of flutter and the procedure to follow is:
3. FLY AT THE REDUCED AIRSPEED AND LAND AT THE NEAREST SUITABLE AIRPORT.
Turbulent Weather
A complete and current weather briefing is a requirement for a safe trip.
Updating of weather information enroute is also essential. The wise pilot knows that weather conditions
can change quickly and treats weather forecasting as professional advice, rather than an absolute fact.
He obtains all the advice possible, but stays alert to any sign or report of changing conditions.
Plan the flight to avoid areas of reported severe turbulence. It is not always possible to detect individual
storm areas or find the in-between clear areas.
Thunderstorms, squall lines and violent turbulence should be regarded as extremely dangerous and
must be avoided. Hail and tornadic wind velocities can be encountered in thunderstorms that can
destroy any airplane, just as tornadoes destroy nearly everything in their path on the ground.
Thunderstorms also pose the possibility of a lightning strike on an airplane. Any structure or equipment
which shows evidence of a lightning strike, or of being subjected to a high current flow due to a strike,
or is a suspected part of a lightning strike path through the airplane should be thoroughly inspected and
any damage repaired prior to additional flight.
A roll cloud ahead of a squall line or thunderstorm is visible evidence of extreme turbulence; however,
the absence of a roll cloud should not be interpreted as denoting that severe turbulence is not present.
Even though flight in severe turbulence must be avoided, flight in turbulent air may be encountered
unexpectedly under certain conditions.
The following recommendations should be observed for airplane operation in turbulent air:
Flying through turbulent air presents two basic problems, the answer to both of which is proper
airspeed. On one hand, if you maintain an excessive airspeed, you run the risk of structural damage
or failure; on the other hand, if your airspeed is too low, the airplane may stall.
If turbulence is encountered, reduce speed to the turbulent air penetration speed or to the
maneuvering speed, which is listed in the LIMITATIONS section of the FAA Approved Airplane
Flight Manual. These speeds give the best assurance of avoiding excessive stress loads, and at
the same time provide the proper margin against inadvertent stalls due to gusts.
Beware of over controlling in an attempt to correct for changes in attitude; applying control pressure
abruptly will build up G-forces rapidly and could cause structural damage or even failure. You
should watch particularly your angle of bank, making turns as wide and shallow as possible. Be
equally cautious in applying forward or back pressure to keep the airplane level. Maintain straight
and level attitude in either up or down drafts. Use trim sparingly to avoid being grossly out of trim
as the vertical air columns change velocity and direction.
Windshear
More windshear information is provided in Section V, Sub-section 2 - ABNORMAL HANDLING.
A horizontal windshear is a sudden change in wind direction or speed that can, for example, transform
a headwind into a tailwind, producing a sudden decrease in indicated airspeed because of the inertia
of the airplane. A vertical windshear, is a sudden updraft or downdraft. Microbursts are intense, highly
localized severe downdrafts.
The prediction of windshears is far from an exact science. Monitor your airspeed carefully when flying
near storms, particularly on approach. BE MENTALLY PREPARED TO ADD POWER AND GO
AROUND AT THE FIRST INDICATION THAT A WINDSHEAR IS BEING ENCOUNTERED.
It is the pilot’s primary responsibility to understand limitations which restrict the use of the airplane in
icing conditions and the conditions which may exceed the systems capacity.
Pilots and airplane owners must carefully review the Pilot’s Operating Manual and FAA Approved
Airplane Flight Manual in order to ascertain the required operable equipment needed for flight in icing
conditions. In addition, they must ascertain from the same source the limits of approval or certification
of their airplane for flight in icing conditions, and plan the flight accordingly, if icing conditions are known
or forecast along the route.
Even airplanes fully equipped and certified for flight in the icing conditions described in Appendix C to
14 CFR Part 25 must avoid flights into those conditions defined by the National Weather Service as
“severe”. No airplane equipped with any combination of de-icing/anti-icing equipment can be expected
to cope with such conditions. As competent pilots know, there appears to be no predictable limits for the
severest weather conditions. For essentially the same reasons that airplanes, however designed or
Even though the pilot exercises normal precautions for operating in icing conditions, ice is still likely to
build up on unprotected areas, and may not be directly observable from the cockpit. Under some
atmospheric conditions, it may even build up aft of the de-iced areas despite the timely use of deice/
anti-ice procedures.
The effect of ice accumulation on any unprotected surface is aggravated by length of exposure to the
icing conditions. Ice buildup on unprotected surfaces will increase drag, add weight, reduce lift, and
generally, adversely affect the aerodynamic characteristics and performance of the airplane. It can
progress to the point where the airplane is no longer capable of flying.
Therefore, the pilot operating even a fully-equipped airplane in sustained icing conditions must remain
sensitive to any indication, such as observed ice accumulation, loss of airspeed, the need for increased
thrust, reduced rate of climb, or sluggish response, that ice is accumulating on unprotected surfaces.
Continued flight in these conditions is extremely hazardous, regardless of the performance of the de-
icing/anti-icing equipment.
Since flight in icing conditions is not an everyday occurrence, it is important that you maintain a proper
proficiency and awareness of the operating procedures necessary for safe operation of the airplane and
that the airplane is in a condition for safe operation.
Ensure moisture drains in the airplane structure are maintained open as specified in the Maintenance
Manual, so that moisture will not collect and cause freezing in the control cable area. Also control
surface tab hinges should be maintained and lubricated as specified in the Maintenance Manual.
In icing conditions the autopilot should be disengaged at an altitude sufficient to permit the pilot to gain
the feel of the airplane prior to landing. In no case should this be less than the minimum altitude
specified in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Observe the procedures and limitations set forth in the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual during
operation in icing conditions. Activate your deice and anti-icing systems before entering an area of
moisture where you are likely to go through a freezing level.
• The airplane’s FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual and Pilot’s Operating Manual, especially the
sections on Normal Procedures, Emergency Procedures, Abnormal Procedures, Systems
Description and Safety Information.
Finally, the most important ingredients to safe flight in icing conditions - regardless of the airplane or the
combination of de-icing/anti-icing equipment - are a complete and current weather briefing, sound pilot
judgement, close attention to the rate and type of ice accumulations, and the knowledge that “severe
icing” as defined by the National Weather Service is beyond the capability of modern airplanes and an
immediate diversion must be made.
It is the inexperienced or uneducated pilot who presses on “regardless” hoping that steadily worsening
conditions will improve, only to find himself flying an airplane which has become so loaded with ice that
he can no longer maintain altitude. At this point he has lost most, if not all, of his safety options, including
perhaps a 180° turn to return along the course already travelled.
The responsible and well-informed pilot recognizes the limitations of weather conditions, limitations of
the airplane and it’s systems and reacts promptly.
Weather Radar
Airborne weather avoidance radar is, as its name implies, for avoiding severe weather - not for
penetrating it.
Whether to fly into an area of radar echoes depends on echo intensity and shape, spacing between the
echoes and the capabilities of you and your airplane. Remember that weather radar detects only
precipitation drops. Except for the most advanced radar units, it does not detect turbulence. Therefore,
the radar scope provides no assurance of avoiding turbulence. The radar scope also does not provide
assurance of avoiding instrument weather from clouds and fog. Your scope may be clear between
intense echoes; this clear area does not necessarily mean you can fly between the storms and maintain
visual sighting of them.
Thunderstorms build and dissipate rapidly. Therefore, do not attempt to plan a course between echoes
using ground based radar. The best use of ground radar information is to isolate general areas and
coverage of echoes. You must avoid individual storms from in-flight observations either by visual
sighting or by airborne radar. It is better to avoid the whole thunderstorm area than to detour around
individual storms unless they are scattered.
Remember that while hail always gives a radar echo, it may fall several miles from the nearest visible
cloud and hazardous turbulence may extend to as much as 20 miles from the echo. The intensity of the
radar echo from hail varies with the size and nature of the hailstone. Avoid intense or extreme level
echoes by at least 20 miles; that is, such echoes should be separated by at least 40 miles before you
fly between them.
Above all, remember this: never regard any thunderstorm lightly. Even when radar observers report the
echoes are of light intensity, avoiding thunderstorms is the best policy. The following are some do’s and
don’ts of thunderstorm avoidance:
2. Don’t attempt to fly under a thunderstorm even if you can see through to the other side. Turbulence
and windshear under the storm could be disastrous.
3. Don’t fly without airborne radar into a cloud mass containing scattered embedded thunderstorms.
Embedded thunderstorms usually can not be visually circumnavigated.
4. Don’t trust visual appearance to be a reliable indicator of the turbulence inside a thunderstorm.
5. Do avoid by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense radar echo.
This is especially true under the anvil of a large cumulonimbus.
6. Do circumnavigate the entire area if the area has 6/10 or greater thunderstorm coverage.
7. Do remember that vivid and frequent lightning indicates the probability of a severe thunderstorm.
8. Do regard as extremely hazardous any thunderstorm with tops 35,000 feet or higher, whether the
top is visually sighted or determined by radar.
If you cannot avoid penetrating a thunderstorm, the following are some do’s BEFORE entering the
storm:
1. Tighten your safety belt, put on your shoulder harness, and secure all loose objects and inform your
passengers.
2. Plan and hold your course to take you through the storm in minimum time.
3. To avoid the most critical icing, establish a penetration altitude below the freezing level or an altitude
where the OAT is -15° C or colder.
4. Verify that all heaters and anti-ice/deice systems are on. Icing can be rapid at any altitude and cause
almost instantaneous power failure and/or loss of airspeed indication.
Mountain Flying
Pilots flying in mountainous areas should inform themselves of all aspects of mountain flying, including
the effects of topographic features on weather conditions. Many good articles have been published, and
a synopsis of mountain flying operations is included in the FAA Aeronautical Information Manual, Part 1.
Avoid flight at low altitudes over mountainous terrain, particularly near the lee slopes. If the wind velocity
near the level of the ridge is in excess of 25 knots and approximately perpendicular to the ridge,
mountain wave conditions are likely over and near the lee slopes. If the wind velocity at the level of the
ridge exceeds 50 knots, a strong mountain wave is probable with extreme up and down drafts and
severe turbulence.
The worst turbulence will be encountered in and below the rotor zone, which is usually 8 to 10 miles
downwind from the ridge. This zone is sometimes characterized by the presence of "roll clouds" if
sufficient moisture is present. Altocumulus standing lenticular clouds are also visible signs that a
mountain wave exists, but their presence is likewise dependent on moisture.
VFR At Night
When flying VFR at night, in addition to the altitude appropriate for the direction of flight, pilots should
maintain a safe minimum altitude as dictated by terrain, obstacles such as TV towers, or communities
in the area flown.
This is especially true in mountainous terrain, where there is usually very little ground reference.
Minimum clearance is 2000 feet above the highest obstacle en route. Do not depend on your ability to
see obstacles in time to miss them. Flight on dark nights over sparsely populated country can be the
same as IFR.
Vertigo - Disorientation
Disorientation can occur in a variety of ways. During flight, inner ear balancing mechanisms are
subjected to varied forces not normally experienced on the ground. This, combined with loss of outside
visual reference, can cause vertigo. False interpretations (illusions) result, and may confuse the pilot’s
conception of the attitude and position of the airplane.
Under VFR conditions, the visual sense, using the horizon as a reference, can override the illusions.
Under low visibility conditions (night, fog, clouds, haze, etc.) the illusions predominate. Only through
awareness of these illusions, and proficiency in instrument flight procedures, can an airplane be
operated safely in a low visibility environment.
Flying in fog, dense haze or dust, cloud banks, or very low visibility, with strobe lights or rotating beacons
turned on can contribute to vertigo. They should be turned off in these conditions, particularly at night.
Motion sickness often precedes or accompanies disorientation and may further jeopardize the flight.
Disorientation in low visibility conditions is not limited to VFR pilots. Although IFR pilots are trained to
look at their instruments to gain an artificial visual reference as a replacement for the loss of a visual
horizon, they do not always do so.
This can happen when the pilot’s physical condition will not permit concentration on the instruments;
when the pilot is not proficient in flying instrument conditions in the airplane being flown, or when the
pilot’s workload of flying by reference to the instruments is compounded by such factors as turbulence.
Even an instrument rated pilot encountering instrument conditions, intentional or unintentional, should
know whether or not they are sufficiently alert and proficient in the airplane being flown to fly under low
visibility conditions and in the turbulence anticipated or encountered.
All pilots should check the weather and use good judgement in planning flights. If any doubt exists, the
flight should not be made or it should be discontinued as soon as possible.
The result of vertigo is loss of control of the airplane. If the loss of control is sustained, it will result in an
excessive speed accident. Excessive speed accidents occur in one of two manners - either as an inflight
airframe separation or as a high speed ground impact. They are fatal accidents in either case. All
airplanes are subject to this form of accident.
Loss of thrust on one engine creates yaw due to asymmetric thrust. Yaw forces must be balanced with
the rudder. In addition, yaw affects the lift distribution over the wing causing a roll towards the "dead"
engine. These roll forces may be balanced by banking slightly (up to 5°) into the operating engine. It is
desirable under these conditions to trim the airplane (roll axis) to allow the ailerons to remain neutral,
thus enhancing single-engine performance.
Airspeed is the key to safe single-engine operations. For most twin-engine airplanes the following
airspeeds have been established:
Symbol Description
VMCA Airspeed below which directional control cannot be maintained in the air.
Airspeed that will give the best single-engine rate-of climb (or the minimum
VYSE
descent rate).
VXSE Airspeed that will give the steepest angle-of-climb with one engine out.
Consequently, it is not advisable to fly at speeds approaching VMCA. Adhering to the practice of never
flying at or below the published VMCA speed for your airplane will virtually eliminate loss of directional
control as a problem in the event of an engine failure.
The checklist should be used to make sure the inoperative engine is secured properly and that the
appropriate switches are placed in the correct position.
The single-engine stall speed of a twin-engine airplane is generally slightly below the power off (engines
idle) stall speed, for a given weight condition. Single-engine stalls in multi-engine airplanes are not
recommended and should not be conducted by other than qualified engineering test pilots.
VMCA demonstrations should not be attempted when the altitude and temperature are such that the
engine-out minimum control speed is known, or discovered to be, close to the stalling speed. Loss of
directional or lateral control, just as a stall occurs, is potentially hazardous.
Spins
A major cause of fatal accidents in general aviation airplanes is a spin. Stall demonstrations and
practice are a means for a pilot to acquire the skills to recognize when a stall is about to occur and to
recover as soon as the first signs of a stall are evident. If a stall does not occur - A spin cannot occur.
It is important to remember however, that a stall can occur in any flight attitude, at any airspeed, if
controls are misused.
The pilot of an airplane placarded against intentional spins should assume that the airplane may
become uncontrollable in a spin, since its performance characteristics beyond certain limits specified in
the FAA regulations may not have been tested and are unknown. This is why airplanes are placarded
against intentional spins and this is why stall avoidance is your protection against an inadvertent spin.
Pilots are taught that intentional spins are entered by deliberately inducing a yawing moment with the
controls as the airplane is stalled. Inadvertent spins result from the same combination - stall plus yaw.
That is why it is important to use coordinated controls and to recover at the first indication of a stall when
practicing stalls.
In any twin engine airplane, fundamental aerodynamics dictate that if the airplane is allowed to become
fully stalled while one engine is providing thrust, the yawing moment which can induce a spin will be
present.
Consequently, it is important to immediately reduce power on the operating engine, lower the nose to
reduce the angle of attack, and increase the airspeed to recover from the stall. In any twin engine
airplane, if application of stall recovery controls is delayed, a rapid rolling and yawing motion may
develop, even against full aileron and rudder, resulting in the airplane becoming inverted during the
onset of a spinning motion.
Once the airplane has been permitted to progress beyond the stall and is allowed to reach the rapid
rolling and yawing condition, the pilot must then immediately initiate the generally accepted spin
recovery procedure for multi-engine airplanes, which is as follows:
These three actions should be done as near simultaneously as possible, then continue to hold this
control position until rotation stops, then neutralize all controls and execute a smooth pullout.
THE LONGER THE PILOT DELAYS BEFORE TAKING CORRECTIVE ACTION, THE MORE
DIFFICULT RECOVERY WILL BECOME.
Always remember that extra alertness and pilot techniques are required for slow flight maneuvers,
including the practice or demonstration of stalls or VMCA. In addition to the foregoing mandatory
procedure, always:
• Be certain that the center of gravity of the airplane is as far forward as possible. Forward C.G. aids
stall recovery, spin avoidance and spin recovery. An aft C.G. can create a tendency for a spin to
flatten out, which delays recovery.
• Conduct any maneuvers which could possibly result in a spin at altitudes in excess of 5,000 feet
above ground level in clear air only.
• Remember that an airplane, at or near traffic pattern and approach altitudes, cannot recover from
a spin, or perhaps even a stall, before impact with the ground. When descending to traffic altitude
and during pattern entry and all other flight operations, maintain speed at a comfortable margin
above the VREF for the existing flap condition. On final approach maintain at least the VREF
airspeed shown in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Page 22 Pilot’s Operating Manual
Revision A1: Nov, 2002
Hawker 800XP Pro Line 21
Section VII - SAFETY INFORMATION
• Recognize that under some conditions of weight, density altitude, and airplane configuration, a twin
engine airplane cannot climb or accelerate on a single engine. Hence a single engine go-around
is impossible and the airplane is committed to a landing. Plan your approach accordingly.
• Remember that if a stall or spin occurs under instrument conditions, the pilot, without reference to
the horizon, is certain to become disoriented. The pilot may be unable to recognize a stall, spin
entry, or the spin condition and may be unable to determine even the direction of the rotation.
• Finally, never forget that stall avoidance is your best protection against an inadvertent spin.
MAINTAIN AIRSPEED.
In tests, vortex velocities of 133 knots have been recorded. Encountering the rolling effect of wing tip
vortices within two minutes after passage of large airplanes is most hazardous to light airplanes. This
roll effect can exceed the maximum counter-roll obtainable in a light airplane.
The turbulent areas may remain for as long as three minutes or more, depending on wind conditions,
and may extend several miles behind the airplane. Plan to fly slightly above and to the windward side
of other airplanes. Because of the wide variety of conditions that can be encountered, there is no set
rule to follow to avoid wake turbulence in all situations.
However, the Aeronautical Information Manual, and to a greater extent Advisory Circular 90-23, Aircraft
Wake Turbulence, provide a thorough discussion of the factors you should be aware of when wake
turbulence may be encountered.
Caution must be exercised to make sure the entire operation is performed below Maximum Landing
Gear Operating Airspeed.
Use caution when landing on runways that are covered by water or slush which cause hydroplaning
(aquaplaning), a phenomenon that renders braking and steering ineffective because of the lack of
sufficient surface friction. Snow and ice covered runways are also hazardous. The pilot should also be
alert to the possibility of the brakes freezing.
Use caution when taking off or landing during gusty wind conditions. Also be aware of the special wind
conditions caused by buildings or other obstructions located near the runway in a crosswind pattern.
When piloting an airplane, an individual should be free of conditions which are harmful to alertness,
ability to make correct decisions, and rapid reaction time.
Fatigue
Fatigue generally slows reaction time and causes errors due to inattention. In addition to the most
common cause of fatigue, insufficient rest and loss of sleep, the pressures of business, financial
worries, and family problems can be important contributing factors. If you are tired, don’t fly.
Hypoxia
Hypoxia, in simple terms, is a lack of sufficient oxygen to keep the brain and other body tissues
functioning properly.
Your body has no built-in alarm system to let you know when you are not getting enough oxygen. It is
impossible to predict when or where hypoxia will occur during a given flight, or how it will manifest itself.
Some of the common symptoms of hypoxia are increased breathing rate, a light-headed or dizzy
sensation, tingling or warm sensation, sweating, reduced visual field, sleepiness, blue coloring of skin,
fingernails, and lips, and behavior changes. A particularly dangerous feature of hypoxia is an increased
sense of well-being called euphoria. It obscures a person’s ability and desire to be self-critical, slows
reaction time, and impairs thinking ability. Consequently, a hypoxic individual commonly believes things
are getting progressively better while nearing total collapse.
The symptoms are slow but progressive, insidious in onset, and are most marked at altitudes above
10,000 feet. Night vision, however, can be impaired starting at an altitude of 5000 feet. Persons who
have recently overindulged in alcohol, who are moderate to heavy smokers, or who take certain drugs,
may be more susceptible to hypoxia. Susceptibility may also vary in the same individual from day to day
or even morning to evening.
Depending upon altitude, a hypoxic individual requires more time to make decisions and perform useful
acts. If pressurization equipment fails, the pilot and passengers have only a certain amount of time to
get an oxygen mask on before they exceed their time of useful consciousness. The time of useful
consciousness is approximately 3-5 minutes at 25,000 feet of altitude for the average individual and
diminishes markedly as altitude increases. At 30,000 feet altitude, for example, the time of useful
consciousness is approximately 1-2 minutes. Therefore, in the event of depressurization, oxygen masks
should be used immediately.
Pilots who fly to altitudes that require or may require the use of supplemental oxygen should be
thoroughly familiar with the operation of the airplane oxygen systems. A preflight inspection of the
system should be performed, including proper fit of the mask.
The passengers should be briefed on the proper use of their oxygen system before flight.
Pilots who wear beards should make sure their beard is carefully trimmed so that it will not interfere with
proper sealing of the oxygen masks. If you wear a beard or moustache, test the fit of your oxygen mask
on the ground for proper sealing. Studies conducted by the military and oxygen equipment
manufacturers conclude that oxygen masks do not seal over beards or heavy facial hair.
Federal Aviation Regulations related to the use of supplemental oxygen by flight crew and passengers
must be adhered to if flight to higher altitudes is to be accomplished safely. Passengers with significant
circulatory or lung disease may need to use supplemental oxygen at lower altitudes than specified by
these regulations.
Pilots of pressurized airplanes should receive physiological training with emphasis on hypoxia and the
use of oxygen and oxygen systems. Pilots of airplanes with pressure demand oxygen systems should
undergo training, experience altitude chamber decompression, and be familiar with pressure breathing
before flying at high altitude. This training is available throughout the United States at nominal cost.
Information regarding this training may be obtained by request from the Chief, Civil Aeromedical
Institute, Attention: Aeromedical Education Branch, AAC-140, Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center,
P. O. Box 25082, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73125.
Hyperventilation
Hyperventilation, or overbreathing, is a disturbance of respiration that may occur in individuals as a
result of emotional tension or anxiety. Under conditions of emotional stress, fright, or pain, breathing
rate may increase, causing increased lung ventilation, although the carbon dioxide output of the body
cells does not increase.
As a result, carbon dioxide is "washed out" of the blood. The most common symptoms of
hyperventilation are: dizziness, nausea, sleepiness, and finally, unconsciousness. If the symptoms
persist, discontinue use of oxygen and consciously slow your breathing rate until symptoms clear, and
then resume normal breathing rate. Normal breathing can be aided by talking aloud.
• Decreased speed and strength of muscular reflexes (even after one ounce of alcohol).
• Decreases in efficiency of eye movements during reading (after one ounce of alcohol).
Tests have shown that pilots commit major errors of judgment and procedure at blood alcohol levels
substantially less than the minimum legal levels of intoxication for most states. These tests further show
a continuation of impairment from alcohol up to as many as 14 hours after consumption, with no
appreciable diminution of impairment.
The body metabolizes ingested alcohol at a rate of about one-third of an ounce per hour. Even after the
body completely destroys a moderate amount of alcohol, a pilot can still be severely impaired for many
hours by hangover. The effects of alcohol on the body are magnified at altitudes, as 2 oz. of alcohol at
18,000 feet produce the same adverse effects as 6 oz. at sea level.
Federal Aviation Regulations have been amended to reflect the FAA’s growing concern with the effects
of alcohol impairment. 14 CFR 91 states:
Alcohol or Drugs
(a) No person may act or attempt to act as a crewmember of a civil aircraft:
3. While using any drug that affects the person’s faculties in any way contrary to safety.
Because of the slow destruction of alcohol by the body, a pilot may still be under influence eight hours
after drinking a moderate amount of alcohol. Therefore, an excellent rule is to allow at least 12 to 24
hours between "bottle and throttle," depending on the amount of alcoholic beverage consumed.
Drugs
Self-medication or taking medicine in any form when you are flying can be extremely hazardous. Even
simple home or over-the-counter remedies and drugs such as aspirin, antihistamines, cold tablets,
cough mixtures, laxatives, tranquillizers, and appetite suppressors, may seriously impair the judgment
and coordination needed while flying.
The safest rule is to take no medicine before or while flying, except after consultation with your Aviation
Medical Examiner.
Scuba Diving
Flying shortly after any prolonged scuba diving could be dangerous. Under the increased pressure of
the water, excess nitrogen is absorbed into your system. If sufficient time has not elapsed prior to take-
off for your system to rid itself of this excess gas, you may experience the bends at altitudes even under
10,000 feet.
Decompression Sickness
Pilots flying unpressurized airplanes at altitudes in excess of 10,000 feet should be alert for the
symptoms of “decompression sickness”. This phenomenon, while rare, can impair the pilot’s ability to
perform and in extreme cases, can result in the victim being rendered unconscious.
Decompression sickness, also known as dysbarism and aviator’s “bends”, is caused by nitrogen bubble
formation in body tissue as the ambient air pressure is reduced by climbing to higher altitudes. The
symptoms are pain in the joints, abdominal cramps, burning sensations in the skin, visual impairment
and numbness. Some of these symptoms are similar to hypoxia. The only known remedy for
decompression sickness is recompression, which can only be accomplished in an unpressurized
airplane by descending.
The pilot should immediately descend if it is suspected that this condition exists, since the effects will
only worsen with continued exposure to the reduced pressure environment at altitude and could result,
if uncorrected, in complete incapacitation. The possibility of decompression sickness can be greatly
reduced by pre-breathing oxygen prior to flight and by commencing oxygen breathing well below the
altitudes where it is legally mandatory.
Advances in the mechanical reliability of the airplanes we fly have been equally impressive, as attested
by the steadily declining statistics of accidents attributed to mechanical causes, at a time when the
airframe, systems and power plants have grown infinitely more complex. The explosion in capability of
avionics systems is even more remarkable. Radar, FMS, GPS, sophisticated autopilots, EFIS and other
devices which, just a few years ago, were too large and prohibitively expensive for general aviation size
airplanes, are becoming increasingly commonplace in even the smallest airplanes.
Therefore, this Safety Information is directed to the pilot, for it is in the area of the skill and proficiency
of you, the pilot, that the greatest gains in safe flying are to be made over the years to come. Intimate
knowledge of your airplane, its capabilities and its limitations, and disciplined adherence to the
procedures for your airplane’s operation, will allow you to transform potential tragedy into an interesting
hangar story when - as it inevitably will - the abnormal situation is presented.
Know your airplane’s limitations, and your own. Never exceed either.
Safe Flying,
The supplements contained in this supplement pack may not have been approved yet by foreign regulatory agencies. To determine
approval status, view our web page at http://pubs.hawkerbeechcraft.com and perform a search for the supplement part
number. Any information pending foreign regulatory agency approval will be listed in the description.
Raytheon Aircraft Company, which has been renamed Hawker Beechcraft Corporation, is now owned by Hawker Beechcraft, Inc.
Neither Hawker Beechcraft, Inc. nor Hawker Beechcraft Corporation are affiliated any longer with Raytheon Company. Any
Raytheon marks contained in this document are owned by Raytheon Company and are employed pursuant to a limited license
granted by Raytheon Company.
for
AIRPLANES EQUIPPED WITH COLLINS PRO LINE 21 AVIONICS
Supplements, or supplement revisions, incorporated into this manual which have not been approved by
Raytheon Aircraft Company, must be recorded on a separate Log of Supplements.
NOTE: Supplements applicable to equipment other than that installed may, at the discretion of the
owner/operator, be removed from the manual.
* Supplements marked with an asterisk will not be supplied with Pilot’s Operating Manuals
due to their limited applicability. If a document is required for your airplane, please order it
through normal channels.
Page 1 of 1